WO2022158313A1 - Composition, cured film, color filter, light-shielding film, optical element, solid imaging element, and headlight unit - Google Patents

Composition, cured film, color filter, light-shielding film, optical element, solid imaging element, and headlight unit Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022158313A1
WO2022158313A1 PCT/JP2022/000329 JP2022000329W WO2022158313A1 WO 2022158313 A1 WO2022158313 A1 WO 2022158313A1 JP 2022000329 W JP2022000329 W JP 2022000329W WO 2022158313 A1 WO2022158313 A1 WO 2022158313A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
group
inorganic particles
composition
light
mass
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2022/000329
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
宏明 出井
貴規 田口
未紗保 安達
Original Assignee
富士フイルム株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 富士フイルム株式会社 filed Critical 富士フイルム株式会社
Priority to JP2022576600A priority Critical patent/JPWO2022158313A1/ja
Publication of WO2022158313A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022158313A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • FMECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
    • F21LIGHTING
    • F21SNON-PORTABLE LIGHTING DEVICES; SYSTEMS THEREOF; VEHICLE LIGHTING DEVICES SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR VEHICLE EXTERIORS
    • F21S41/00Illuminating devices specially adapted for vehicle exteriors, e.g. headlamps
    • F21S41/40Illuminating devices specially adapted for vehicle exteriors, e.g. headlamps characterised by screens, non-reflecting members, light-shielding members or fixed shades
    • FMECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
    • F21LIGHTING
    • F21VFUNCTIONAL FEATURES OR DETAILS OF LIGHTING DEVICES OR SYSTEMS THEREOF; STRUCTURAL COMBINATIONS OF LIGHTING DEVICES WITH OTHER ARTICLES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • F21V9/00Elements for modifying spectral properties, polarisation or intensity of the light emitted, e.g. filters
    • F21V9/08Elements for modifying spectral properties, polarisation or intensity of the light emitted, e.g. filters for producing coloured light, e.g. monochromatic; for reducing intensity of light
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B5/00Optical elements other than lenses
    • G02B5/20Filters
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B5/00Optical elements other than lenses
    • G02B5/20Filters
    • G02B5/22Absorbing filters
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01LSEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
    • H01L27/00Devices consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid-state components formed in or on a common substrate
    • H01L27/14Devices consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid-state components formed in or on a common substrate including semiconductor components sensitive to infrared radiation, light, electromagnetic radiation of shorter wavelength or corpuscular radiation and specially adapted either for the conversion of the energy of such radiation into electrical energy or for the control of electrical energy by such radiation
    • H01L27/144Devices controlled by radiation
    • H01L27/146Imager structures

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to compositions, cured films, color filters, light-shielding films, optical elements, solid-state imaging devices, and headlight units.
  • a color filter used in a liquid crystal display device is provided with a light shielding film called a black matrix for the purpose of shielding light between colored pixels and improving contrast.
  • portable terminals of electronic devices such as mobile phones and PDAs (Personal Digital Assistants) are equipped with small and thin imaging units.
  • a solid-state imaging device such as a CCD (Charge Coupled Device) image sensor and a CMOS (Complementary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor) image sensor is provided with a light shielding film for the purpose of preventing noise generation and improving image quality.
  • Patent Document 1 discloses a black resin composition for a light shielding film containing silica or the like surface-treated with a silane coupling agent having a reactive (meth)acryloyl group in the molecule.
  • the present inventors have investigated the surface-treated silica and the like described in Patent Document 1, and have found that the composition containing the silica has a development residue suppressing property when set aside (after standing for a predetermined time), In addition, they have found that at least one of the low reflectivity properties of the cured film obtained using the above composition is inferior.
  • the above-mentioned development residue suppressing property when set aside means that when a composition layer is formed using the composition and the composition layer is left to stand for a predetermined time and then subjected to exposure and development processing, It means that the generated development residue is suppressed.
  • an object of the present invention is to provide a composition that can form a cured film that is excellent in suppressing development residue when left and has excellent low reflectivity.
  • Another object of the present invention is to provide a cured film, a color filter, a light-shielding film, an optical element, a solid-state imaging device, and a headlight unit.
  • modified inorganic particles contain inorganic particles and a coating layer covering part or all of the inorganic particles,
  • the specific group is a carboxylic acid group or a carboxylic anhydride group.
  • modified inorganic particles contain inorganic particles and a coating layer covering part or all of the inorganic particles,
  • the coating layer contains at least one selected from the group consisting of carboxylic acid groups, sulfonic acid groups, phosphoric acid groups, nitric acid groups, phenolic hydroxyl groups, and acid anhydride groups, and a hydrophobic group.
  • Composition [4] The composition according to any one of [1] to [3], wherein the inorganic particles have a particle size of less than 100 nm.
  • [5] The composition according to any one of [1] to [4], further comprising a coloring material.
  • composition of [5], wherein the colorant is a black colorant.
  • [9] further contains a resin, a polymerization initiator, and a coloring material,
  • Any one of [1] to [8], wherein the mass ratio of the total content of the modified inorganic particles, the resin, the polymerization initiator, and the polymerizable compound is 0.01 to 2.00.
  • the hydrophobic group contains at least one selected from the group consisting of fluorine atoms and silicon atoms.
  • the hydrophobic group is a dialkylsiloxane group or a fluoroalkyl group.
  • a color filter comprising the cured film of [14].
  • a light-shielding film comprising the cured film of [14].
  • An optical element comprising the cured film of [14].
  • a solid-state imaging device comprising the cured film of [14].
  • a headlight unit for a vehicle lamp comprising: a light source; and a light shielding part that shields at least part of the light emitted from the light source, A headlight unit, wherein the light shielding part contains the cured film according to [14].
  • the present invention it is possible to provide a composition that can form a cured film that is excellent in suppressing development residue when set aside and has excellent low reflectivity.
  • the present invention can also provide cured films, color filters, light-shielding films, optical elements, solid-state imaging devices, and headlight units.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing an enlarged imaging unit included in the solid-state imaging device shown in FIG. 1 ; It is a schematic sectional drawing which shows the structural example of an infrared sensor. It is a schematic diagram which shows the structural example of a headlight unit.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic perspective view showing a configuration example of a light shielding portion of the headlight unit; It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the light distribution pattern by a headlight unit.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram showing another example of a light distribution pattern by the headlight unit;
  • the notation that does not describe substitution and unsubstituted includes not only a group that does not contain a substituent but also a group that contains a substituent.
  • the term "alkyl group” includes not only alkyl groups containing no substituents (unsubstituted alkyl groups) but also alkyl groups containing substituents (substituted alkyl groups).
  • actinic rays or “radiation” in this specification means, for example, far ultraviolet rays, extreme ultraviolet lithography (EUV), X-rays, electron beams, and the like.
  • light used herein means actinic rays and radiation.
  • exposure in this specification includes not only exposure with far ultraviolet rays, X-rays, EUV light, etc., but also writing with particle beams such as electron beams and ion beams.
  • (Meth)acrylate in this specification means acrylate and methacrylate.
  • (Meth)acryl as used herein means acryl and methacryl.
  • (Meth)acryloyl as used herein means acryloyl and methacryloyl.
  • (Meth)acrylamide as used herein means acrylamide and methacrylamide.
  • ppm means “parts-per-million ( 10-6 )
  • ppb means “parts-per-billion ( 10-9 )
  • ppt means “ parts-per-trillion (10 ⁇ 12 )”.
  • the "weight average molecular weight (Mw)" in this specification is a polystyrene conversion value by the GPC (Gel Permeation Chromatography) method.
  • GPC method in the present specification, HLC-8020GPC (manufactured by Tosoh) as a measuring instrument, TSKgel SuperHZM-H, TSKgel SuperHZ4000, TSKgel SuperHZ2000 (manufactured by Tosoh, 4.6 mm ID ⁇ 15 cm) as columns, THF as an eluent. (tetrahydrofuran).
  • the bonding direction of the divalent groups (eg, -COO-) indicated in this specification is not limited.
  • the compound represented by the formula "X-Y-Z” when Y is -COO-, the compound may be "X-O-CO-Z", “X-CO —OZ”.
  • composition contains modified inorganic particles and a polymerizable compound.
  • the modified inorganic particles contain inorganic particles and a coating layer that partially or entirely coats the inorganic particles, and the coating layer contains a group that forms a salt under the action of an alkali (hereinafter also referred to as "specific group A”. ), and a group whose polarity is increased by the action of alkali (hereinafter also referred to as “specific group B”), and at least one specific group selected from the group consisting of a hydrophobic group. .
  • the present inventors presume as follows. Since the modified inorganic particles are covered with a coating layer having a specific group, the modified inorganic particles have excellent affinity for the developer used when forming a cured film from the composition. Therefore, it is speculated that the composition of the present invention is less likely to leave residue derived from the modified inorganic particles after being left behind, and is excellent in suppressing development residue after being left behind. In addition, when a cured film is formed from the composition, the modified inorganic particles having a hydrophobic group tend to be unevenly distributed on the surface of the cured film, and can form appropriate unevenness on the surface of the cured film.
  • the cured film obtained using the composition of the present invention can scatter the light irradiated on the surface and has excellent low reflectivity.
  • the effect of the present invention is that at least one of the effect of excellent suppression of development residue when the composition is left and the effect of excellent low reflectivity of a cured film formed from the composition is obtained. It is also said to be excellent.
  • the components contained in the composition of the present invention are described below.
  • compositions of the invention contain modified inorganic particles.
  • the modified inorganic particles have inorganic particles and a coating layer covering part or all of the inorganic particles.
  • the particle diameter of the inorganic particles is preferably 200 nm or less, more preferably less than 100 nm, still more preferably 10 to 90 nm, particularly preferably 20 to 80 nm, particularly preferably 30 to 70 nm, from the viewpoint of an excellent balance of each performance and handling property of the cured film. is most preferred.
  • particle size means the average primary particle size of particles measured by the following method.
  • the average primary particle size can be measured using a transmission electron microscope (TEM).
  • TEM transmission electron microscope
  • a transmission electron microscope HT7700 manufactured by Hitachi High-Technologies Corporation can be used.
  • the maximum length of the particle image obtained using a transmission electron microscope (Dmax: the maximum length at two points on the contour of the particle image) and the maximum vertical length (DV-max: two straight lines parallel to the maximum length
  • Dmax the maximum length at two points on the contour of the particle image
  • DV-max two straight lines parallel to the maximum length
  • the shortest length vertically connecting two straight lines when an image is sandwiched between two straight lines was measured, and the geometric mean value (Dmax ⁇ DV-max) 1/2 was taken as the particle diameter.
  • the particle diameters of 100 particles were measured by this method, and the arithmetic average value was taken as the average primary particle diameter of the particles.
  • the shape of the inorganic particles examples include fibrous, needle-like, plate-like, spherical, tetrapod-like, and balloon-like, with spherical being preferred.
  • the inorganic particles may be monodisperse particles or aggregated particles.
  • the inorganic particles may be hollow particles or solid particles. Among them, the inorganic particles are preferably hollow particles because the effects of the present invention are more excellent. Hollow particles refer to particles having cavities inside the particles.
  • a hollow particle may be a structure in which the particle consists of an internal cavity and an outer shell surrounding the cavity. Further, the hollow particles may have a structure in which a plurality of cavities are present inside the particles.
  • the hollow particles preferably have a porosity of 3% or more. Although the upper limit is not particularly limited, it is preferably less than 100%, more preferably 90% or less.
  • Hollow particles have a cavity inside and have a smaller specific gravity than particles without a hollow structure. It is thought that the effect of uneven distribution in In addition, hollow particles have a lower refractive index than inorganic particles having no hollow structure.
  • hollow particles with a low refractive index are unevenly distributed on the surface of the light-shielding film, and an AR (Anti-Reflection) type low-reflection effect is obtained. , it is thought that the low reflectivity of the light shielding film is improved.
  • hollow particles include hollow silica particles described in JP-A-2001-233611 and Japanese Patent No. 3272111, and Sururia 4110 (trade name, manufactured by Nikki Shokubai Kasei Co., Ltd.).
  • Solid particles refer to particles that have substantially no cavities inside the particles. Specifically, the solid particles preferably have a porosity of less than 3%. Examples of solid particles include IPA-ST-L (trade name, manufactured by Nissan Chemical Industries, Ltd.).
  • beaded inorganic particles which are particle aggregates in which a plurality of inorganic particles are linked in a chain
  • the beaded inorganic particles are preferably those in which a plurality of spherical colloidal inorganic particles having a particle diameter of 5 to 50 nm are joined together by metal oxide-containing inorganic particles.
  • beaded inorganic particles include silica sol described in Japanese Patent No. 4328935 and JP-A-2013-253145, and beaded colloidal inorganic particles are preferred.
  • the inorganic particles are preferably other than black.
  • the inorganic particles may have a color such as red, blue, yellow, green, purple, orange, or white, or may be colorless. Among them, the inorganic particles are preferably white or colorless.
  • inorganic particles examples include inorganic oxides, inorganic nitrides, inorganic carbides, carbonates, sulfates, silicates, phosphates, and composites of two or more of these. , inorganic nitrides or carbonates are preferred, and inorganic oxides are more preferred.
  • the inorganic particles preferably contain at least silicon.
  • inorganic particles include silica (silicon dioxide), titania (titanium dioxide), alumina (aluminum oxide), mica compounds, zinc oxide, zirconium oxide, tin oxide, potassium titanate, strontium titanate, aluminum borate, and magnesium oxide.
  • magnesium borate aluminum hydroxide, magnesium hydroxide, calcium hydroxide, titanium hydroxide, basic magnesium sulfate, calcium carbonate, magnesium carbonate, calcium sulfate, magnesium sulfate, calcium silicate, magnesium silicate, calcium phosphate, silicon nitride, Titanium nitride, aluminum nitride, silicon carbide, titanium carbide, and zinc sulfide.
  • the group consisting of silica, titania, alumina, mica compounds, glass, potassium titanate, strontium titanate, aluminum borate, magnesium oxide, calcium carbonate, magnesium carbonate, calcium silicate, magnesium silicate, calcium phosphate, and calcium sulfate It preferably contains at least one selected from, more preferably contains at least one selected from the group consisting of silica, titania, alumina, and calcium carbonate, silica, titania, and alumina It is more preferable to contain at least one selected from the group consisting of, and it is particularly preferable to contain silica.
  • the refractive index of the inorganic particles is preferably 1.10 to 1.40, more preferably 1.15 to 1.35.
  • the inorganic particles may be used singly or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of silica (silicon dioxide) is preferably 75 to 100% by mass, more preferably 90 to 100% by mass, more preferably 99% by mass, based on the total mass of the inorganic particles. ⁇ 100% by mass is more preferred.
  • the coating layer has a specific group (at least one group selected from the group consisting of specific group A and specific group B) and a hydrophobic group.
  • a coating layer is a layer which coat
  • the coverage of the inorganic particles by the coating layer is preferably 10% or more, more preferably 30% or more, and still more preferably 50% or more, relative to the total surface area of the inorganic particles.
  • the upper limit is preferably 100% or less, more preferably 80% or less, relative to the total surface area of the inorganic particles.
  • the coating layer may be arranged directly on the surface of the inorganic particles, or may be arranged via another layer between the inorganic particles.
  • the specific group B (a group whose polarity is increased by the action of an alkali) is preferable because the evaluation of storage stability (viscosity) in the Examples section described later is superior. Further, as the specific group, the specific group B (a group whose polarity increases due to the action of alkali), or a group other than a carboxylic acid group, from the viewpoint of better evaluation of storage stability (reflectance) in the Examples section described later. Groups which form salts under the action of alkali are preferred.
  • the hydrophobic group is not particularly limited as long as it is a group exhibiting hydrophobicity.
  • the hydrophobic group include a silicon atom-containing group, a fluorine atom-containing group, an optionally substituted alkyl group, an optionally substituted aryl group, (meth)acryloyl groups, glycidoxy groups, and amino groups.
  • the hydrophobic group preferably contains at least one selected from the group consisting of a fluorine atom and a silicon atom, and more preferably contains a silicon atom.
  • the group containing a silicon atom is preferably a siloxane group or a silyl group, more preferably a siloxane group, and still more preferably a dialkylsiloxane group.
  • the silicon atom-containing group may be chain, branched, or cyclic.
  • a group containing a fluorine atom a fluoroalkyl group is preferred, and a perfluoroalkyl group is more preferred.
  • a fluorine atom-containing group may be chain, branched, or cyclic.
  • the silicon atoms mentioned above do not include silicon derived from hydrolyzable silyl groups directly bonded to the inorganic particles when a silane coupling agent is used to produce the modified inorganic particles.
  • a modified silica having a methacryloyl group is produced by reacting a trimethoxysilyl group of 3-methacryloxypropyltrimethoxysilane with silica, the trimethoxysilyl group reacted with silica
  • the derived silicon atoms do not correspond to the silicon atoms possessed by the coating layer.
  • the hydrophobic group is preferably a group contained in a repeating unit represented by formula (A1) described later (preferably a group represented by SS1 in formula (A1)).
  • the coating layer preferably contains a polymer containing repeating units represented by formula (A1).
  • the coating layer may partially contain the polymer, or may be the polymer itself.
  • the content of the polymer is preferably 10 to 100% by mass, preferably 70 to 100% by mass, more preferably 95 to 100% by mass, relative to the total mass of the coating layer.
  • the repeating unit represented by formula (A1) contained in the polymer is shown below.
  • R S1 represents an optionally substituted alkyl group or a hydrogen atom.
  • the alkyl group may be linear or branched. Moreover, the alkyl group may have a cyclic structure as a whole or may contain a cyclic structure partially.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group is preferably 1-10, more preferably 1-3.
  • the preferable number of carbon atoms referred to herein means the number of carbon atoms including the number of carbon atoms that may be present in the substituent when the alkyl group contains a substituent.
  • R S1 is preferably a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  • L S1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • the divalent linking group may have a substituent, and the substituent of the divalent linking group may be a group represented by S S1 described later, or may be a group represented by S S1 described later. It may be a group partially containing the group represented by S1 .
  • the divalent linking group is preferably a combination of groups selected from the group consisting of an ester group and an alkylene group (preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms).
  • the divalent linking group is preferably a group represented by *A-CO-O-*B or *A-CO-O-alkylene group-*B.
  • *B represents the bonding position with S S1 in formula (A1)
  • *A represents the bonding position on the opposite side to *B.
  • the alkylene group may be linear or branched. Moreover, the alkylene group may have a cyclic structure as a whole, or may partially contain a cyclic structure.
  • the alkylene group is preferably linear.
  • the alkylene group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • the preferable number of carbon atoms referred to herein means the number of carbon atoms including the number of carbon atoms that may exist in the substituent when the alkylene group contains a substituent.
  • the alkylene group is preferably unsubstituted.
  • S S1 represents a hydrophobic group.
  • the hydrophobic group preferably contains a silicon atom or a fluorine atom.
  • the hydrophobic group is preferably an unsubstituted alkyl group, a fluoroalkyl group, or a group represented by the formula (SS1) described later, and a fluoroalkyl group or a group represented by the formula (SS1) described later. is more preferred, and a dialkylsiloxane group or a fluoroalkyl group is even more preferred.
  • the unsubstituted alkyl group represented by S S1 may be linear or branched. Moreover, the unsubstituted alkyl group may have a cyclic structure as a whole, or may partially contain a cyclic structure.
  • the unsubstituted alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group portion of the fluoroalkyl group represented by S S1 may be linear or branched. Moreover, the alkyl group portion may have a cyclic structure as a whole, or may partially contain a cyclic structure.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group portion is preferably 1-15, more preferably 1-10. It is also preferable that the alkyl group portion does not contain any substituents other than fluorine atoms.
  • the number of fluorine atoms in the fluoroalkyl group is preferably 1-30, more preferably 5-20. It is also preferable that all or part of the fluoroalkyl group is a perfluoroalkyl group.
  • S S1 is preferably a group represented by formula (SS1). *-L S2 -O-SiR S2 3 (SS1)
  • R 2 S2 represents a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may contain a substituent. * represents a binding position.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the hydrocarbon group is preferably 1-20, more preferably 1-10, and even more preferably 1-5.
  • the number of carbon atoms here means the number of carbon atoms including the number of carbon atoms that can exist in the substituents when the above hydrocarbon group contains substituents.
  • the hydrocarbon group is preferably an alkyl group.
  • the alkyl group may be linear or branched.
  • the alkyl group may have a cyclic structure as a whole or may contain a cyclic structure partially.
  • a plurality of R S2 may be the same or different.
  • L S2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • the divalent linking group for L S2 include the same groups as the divalent linking groups for L S1 in formula (A1).
  • the divalent linking group in L S2 may contain one or more (eg, 1 to 1000) -SiR S2 2 -O-.
  • R s2 in -SiR S2 2 -O- is the same as R s2 described above.
  • S S1 is more preferably a group represented by formula (A2).
  • * represents a binding position.
  • sa represents an integer from 1 to 1,000.
  • Each R S3 independently represents an optionally substituted hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or a group represented by formula (A3) described later.
  • multiple R 3 S3 may be the same or different.
  • the hydrocarbon group that can be represented by R 2 S3 include the hydrocarbon groups that may have a substituent that can be represented by R 2 S2 described above. Among them, it is preferable that each R 3 S3 bonded to Si on the right end in formula (A2) is independently the above hydrocarbon group.
  • each R S3 in “-(-SiR S3 2 -O-) sa -" is independently a group represented by formula (A3) described later. is preferred.
  • the number of R S3 groups represented by formula (A3) among the “2 ⁇ sa” R S3 groups in “—(—SiR S3 2 —O—) sa —” is preferably 0 to 1,000. , more preferably 0 to 10, and even more preferably 0 to 2.
  • Groups represented by formula (A3) are shown below.
  • * represents a binding position.
  • sb represents an integer from 0 to 300;
  • R S4 represents an optionally substituted hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • multiple R 2 S4 may be the same or different.
  • the hydrocarbon group that can be represented by R 2 S4 include the hydrocarbon groups that may have a substituent that can be represented by R 2 S2 described above.
  • the polymer containing the repeating unit represented by formula (A1) may contain repeating units other than the repeating unit represented by formula (A1).
  • the other repeating units a repeating unit derived from (meth)acryl or a repeating unit containing no silicon atom is preferable.
  • the molecular weight of the other repeating unit is preferably 86-1000, more preferably 100-500.
  • the content of the repeating unit represented by formula (A1) is preferably 10 to 100% by mass with respect to all repeating units, and 60 ⁇ 100% by mass is more preferable, and 90 to 100% by mass is more preferable.
  • the specific group A (group that forms a salt by the action of an alkali) is not particularly limited as long as it is a group that forms a salt with an alkali.
  • Examples of the specific group A include an acid group, preferably a carboxylic acid group, a sulfonic acid group, a phosphoric acid group, a nitric acid group, or a phenolic hydroxyl group, more preferably a carboxylic acid group or a phenolic hydroxyl group.
  • the specific group B (group whose polarity is increased by the action of an alkali) means a group whose polarity is increased by forming a polar group through decomposition or the like by the action of an alkali.
  • the specific group B include, for example, a lactone group, a carboxylic acid ester group (-COO-), an acid anhydride group such as a carboxylic acid anhydride group (-C(O)OC(O)-), an acid imide group (- NHCONH-), carboxylic acid thioester group (-COS-), carbonate group (-OC(O)O-), sulfate group (-OSO 2 O-), and sulfonate group (-SO 2 O- ).
  • a carboxylic acid ester group or an acid anhydride group is preferable, and a carboxylic acid anhydride group is more preferable.
  • the carboxylic anhydride group may be linear or cyclic, preferably cyclic.
  • the ring of the cyclic carboxylic acid anhydride group is preferably a 5- to 7-membered ring, more preferably a 5- or 6-membered ring, and still more preferably a 5-membered ring.
  • the specific group B is preferably a group obtained by removing one or two hydrogen atoms from the compound represented by the formula (P-1), and removing one hydrogen atom from the compound represented by the formula (P-1). group is more preferred.
  • R A1a represents a substituent.
  • n1a represents an integer of 0 or more.
  • Examples of the substituent represented by RA1a include an alkyl group.
  • Z 1a is preferably an alkylene group, an alkenylene group, or a group combining these, more preferably an alkylene group or an alkenylene group.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkylene group or alkenyl group is preferably 1-10, more preferably 2-5, and even more preferably 2-3.
  • n1a represents an integer of 0 or more.
  • n 1a is preferably an integer of 0 to 4, more preferably an integer of 0 to 2, and even more preferably 0 to 1.
  • R A1a may be the same or different.
  • two or more RA1a groups may combine with each other to form a ring, but preferably do not combine with each other to form a ring.
  • each R independently represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • Each R p independently represents a substituent, and each p independently represents an integer of 0-9. * represents a binding position.
  • the coating layer may contain a polymer containing a repeating unit having a specific group.
  • the repeating unit having a specific group preferably contains at least one selected from the group consisting of repeating units represented by formulas (D) to (F), represented by formula (E) or (F) It is more preferable to contain repeating units having
  • cylic represents a cyclic group into which an acid anhydride group has been introduced.
  • the acid anhydride group the acid anhydride group possessed by the specific group B is preferable.
  • the number of atoms contained in the cyclic group is not particularly limited.
  • Repeating units represented by formula (D) are preferably repeating units represented by formulas (d-1) to (d-4).
  • Each R p independently represents a substituent, and each p independently represents an integer of 0-4.
  • each Re independently represents a hydrogen atom or an organic group.
  • Organic groups include alkyl groups, cycloalkyl groups, aryl groups, aralkyl groups, and alkenyl groups, which may contain substituents.
  • "cylic” represents a cyclic group into which an acid anhydride group has been introduced.
  • the acid anhydride group the acid anhydride group possessed by the specific group B is preferable.
  • the number of atoms contained in the cyclic group is not particularly limited.
  • R represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • R p independently represents a substituent, and each p independently represents an integer of 0 to 8.
  • Each Re independently represents a hydrogen atom or an organic group.
  • RF represents an optionally substituted alkyl group or a hydrogen atom.
  • the alkyl group may be linear or branched. Moreover, the alkyl group may have a cyclic structure as a whole or may contain a cyclic structure partially.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group is preferably 1-10, more preferably 1-3.
  • the preferable number of carbon atoms referred to herein means the number of carbon atoms including the number of carbon atoms that may be present in the substituent when the alkyl group contains a substituent.
  • RF is preferably a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  • LF represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • the divalent linking group is preferably a combination of groups selected from the group consisting of an alkylene group, an ester group, and an alkylene group (preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms).
  • the alkylene group may be linear or branched. Moreover, the alkylene group may have a cyclic structure as a whole, or may partially contain a cyclic structure.
  • the alkylene group is preferably linear.
  • the alkylene group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • the preferable number of carbon atoms referred to herein means the number of carbon atoms including the number of carbon atoms that may exist in the substituent when the alkylene group contains a substituent.
  • the alkylene group is preferably unsubstituted.
  • SF represents an acid anhydride group.
  • the acid anhydride group the acid anhydride group possessed by the specific group B is preferable.
  • R F each independently represents an optionally substituted alkyl group or a hydrogen atom.
  • R p independently represents a substituent, and each p independently represents an integer of 0 to 8.
  • Each Re independently represents a hydrogen atom or an organic group.
  • LF represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • R represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • Examples of monomers for forming repeating units having a specific group include itaconic anhydride, maleic anhydride, allylsuccinic anhydride, (2-methyl-2-propenyl)succinic anhydride, and 2-octenylsuccinic acid.
  • anhydride 2,3-dimethylmaleic anhydride, 2-dodecen-1-ylsuccinic anhydride, 5-(2,5-dioxotetrahydrofuryl)-3-methyl-3-cyclohexene-1,2-dicarboxylic anhydride Acid anhydrides, bicyclo[2.2.2]oct-5-ene-2,3-dicarboxylic anhydride, 2-butene-1-ylsuccinic anhydride, 1-cyclohexene-1,2-dicarboxylic anhydride , citraconic anhydride, 5-norbornene-2,3-dicarboxylic anhydride, phenylmaleic anhydride, and cis-4-cyclohexene-1,2-dicarboxylic anhydride.
  • itaconic anhydride, maleic anhydride, or allylsuccinic anhydride is preferable as the monomer.
  • the polymer contained in the coating layer preferably does not substantially contain repeating units having a hydrolyzable silyl group.
  • substantially free of repeating units means that the content of repeating units having a hydrolyzable silyl group in the polymer contained in the coating layer is 1.0% by mass or less with respect to all repeating units. However, 0.1% by mass or less is preferable. The upper limit is preferably 0% by mass.
  • the particle diameter (number average particle diameter) of the modified inorganic particles is preferably 1 to 500 nm, more preferably 20 to 200 nm, still more preferably 30 to 160 nm, and particularly preferably 30 to 100 nm, from the viewpoint that the effects of the present invention are more excellent.
  • the particle diameter of the modified inorganic particles can be measured by the same method as the particle diameter (number average particle diameter) of the inorganic particles described above, which is measured using a TEM or the like.
  • the content of the coating layer is preferably 2% by mass or more, more preferably 6% by mass or more, more preferably 8% by mass, based on the total mass of the modified inorganic particles, from the viewpoint that the effects of the present invention are more excellent.
  • the above is more preferable.
  • the upper limit is preferably 30% by mass or less, more preferably 20% by mass or less, and even more preferably 15% by mass or less, relative to the total mass of the modified inorganic particles.
  • Modified inorganic particles may be used singly or in combination of two or more. Among them, the modified inorganic particles are preferably used singly or in combination of two. When using two or more modified inorganic particles, the total content is preferably within the following range.
  • the content of the modified inorganic particles is preferably 0.1 to 30.0% by mass, more preferably 0.5 to 20.0% by mass, relative to the total solid content of the composition, and the effects of the present invention are more excellent. From the point of view, 1.0 to 20.0% by mass is more preferable, and 2.5 to 16.0% by mass is particularly preferable.
  • the "solid content" of the composition herein means a component that forms a cured film, and when the composition contains a solvent (organic solvent, water, etc.), it means all components excluding the solvent. .
  • a liquid component is also regarded as a solid content.
  • the method for producing the modified inorganic particles is not particularly limited, and for example, the following production method A can be mentioned.
  • the ethylenically unsaturated group of the coating precursor layer in the modified inorganic particle precursor containing the inorganic particles and the coating precursor layer containing the ethylenically unsaturated group by coating the inorganic particles, and the formula (1b) described later Ethylenically unsaturated group in the represented compound and a compound containing the above-described specific group and having an ethylenically unsaturated group (preferably the compound represented by formula (P-1)) in the ethylenically unsaturated group is polymerized to form a coating layer containing the polymer on the surfaces of the inorganic particles to coat the inorganic particles (coating layer forming step).
  • the modified inorganic particle precursor in the modified inorganic particle manufacturing method A contains inorganic particles and a coating precursor layer that coats the inorganic particles.
  • the inorganic particles in the modified inorganic particle precursor include, for example, the inorganic particles exemplified as the inorganic particles of the modified inorganic particles.
  • the coating precursor layer in the modified inorganic particle precursor contains ethylenically unsaturated groups (eg, (meth)acryloyl groups, vinyl groups, styryl groups, etc.).
  • the modified inorganic particle precursor may be used after purchasing a commercially available product, or may be used after being manufactured.
  • inorganic particles are reacted with a silane coupling agent containing an ethylenically unsaturated group (e.g., 3-methacryloxypropyltrimethoxysilane, etc.) to obtain inorganic particles. and forming a coating precursor layer on the surface of to produce a modified inorganic particle precursor.
  • a silane coupling agent containing an ethylenically unsaturated group e.g., 3-methacryloxypropyltrimethoxysilane, etc.
  • R S1 represents an optionally substituted alkyl group or a hydrogen atom.
  • L S1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • S S1 represents a group containing -SiR S2 2 -O-.
  • R S2 represents an optionally substituted hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • a plurality of R S2 may be the same or different.
  • Each group represented by each symbol in formula (1b) is the same as the group represented by the corresponding symbol in formula (A1). That is, the compound represented by formula (1b) is a monomer corresponding to the repeating unit represented by formula (A1).
  • the ethylenically unsaturated groups in the coating precursor layer of the modified inorganic particle precursor and the ethylenically unsaturated groups in the compound represented by formula (1b) (preferably represented by formula (1b) Ethylenically unsaturated group specified in the formula (1b) in the compound obtained) and a compound containing a specific group and containing an ethylenically unsaturated group (preferably represented by formula (P-1)
  • a polymer-containing coating layer is formed on the surfaces of the inorganic particles by polymerizing (generally, radically polymerizing) the ethylenically unsaturated groups in the compound) to cover the inorganic particles.
  • the polymerization system contains a compound represented by the formula (1b), and a compound containing a specific group A and an ethylenically unsaturated group (preferably, the formula (P -1), other compounds containing ethylenically unsaturated groups (hereinafter also referred to as "other compounds") may be present.
  • the above other compounds are preferably compounds containing no silicon atoms.
  • (Meth)acrylic compounds are preferable as the other compounds.
  • the molecular weight of the other compound is preferably 86-1000, more preferably 100-700.
  • the compound represented by formula (1b) and a compound containing a specific group and containing an ethylenically unsaturated group (preferably, formula (P-1).
  • the total content of the compound represented by ) is the compound represented by formula (1b), a compound containing a specific group and an ethylenically unsaturated group (preferably, formula (P-1) compound represented), and other compounds (preferably silicon-free compounds), relative to the total content, preferably 10 to 100% by mass, more preferably 60 to 100% by mass, 90 to 100 % by mass is more preferred.
  • a purification treatment is performed to separate part or all of the polymerized product polymerized without being incorporated into the polymer of the coating layer in the coating layer forming step and the resulting modified inorganic particles.
  • the purification treatment include a treatment of filtering (preferably microfiltration) the solution subjected to the coating layer forming step, obtaining modified inorganic particles as a filter cake, and separating the polymerization product into the filtrate.
  • Other purification treatments include centrifugation of the solution subjected to the coating layer forming step to separate the supernatant containing the polymerization product and the sediment containing the modified inorganic particles. In carrying out the filtration and / or the centrifugation, the solution that has undergone the coating layer forming step is treated for efficient purification treatment (for example, addition of a suitable solvent and / or partial distillation of the solvent etc.) may be implemented.
  • the modified inorganic particles with the polymerization product adhered on the surface may be obtained by evaporating the solvent of the solution subjected to the coating layer forming step without performing the purification treatment.
  • the modified inorganic particles thus obtained may be directly mixed with other raw materials and used to produce a composition.
  • the modified inorganic particles may be redispersed in another solvent and the resulting dispersion used to prepare the composition and mixed with other raw materials.
  • the solution containing the modified inorganic particles subjected to the coating layer forming step may be mixed with other raw materials as it is for use in the production of the composition.
  • the following manufacturing method B is also mentioned as a manufacturing method of a modified inorganic particle.
  • the inorganic particles are reacted with a silane coupling agent containing a hydrophobic group and a silane coupling agent containing a specific group to form a coating layer on the surface of the inorganic particles to cover the inorganic particles.
  • a method B for producing modified inorganic particles which includes a step (coating layer forming step B), is also included.
  • the modified inorganic particles obtained by the production method B are surface-modified with a silane coupling agent containing at least a silane coupling agent containing a hydrophobic group and a silane coupling agent containing a specific group. It corresponds to inorganic particles.
  • Examples of the inorganic particles include the inorganic particles exemplified as the inorganic particles of the modified inorganic particles.
  • Silane coupling agents containing a hydrophobic group include, for example, silane coupling agents containing a group represented by SS1 in formula (A1) described above.
  • a compound represented by Formula (2b) is preferred.
  • X represents a hydroxyl group or -OR S3 .
  • R S3 represents an optionally substituted hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • Y represents an optionally substituted hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • L S2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • SS2 represents a specific group.
  • a represents an integer of 1 to 3;
  • b represents an integer of 0 to 2; However, a+b is 3.
  • R S3 represents an optionally substituted hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • R S3 is preferably a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms which may contain a substituent, more preferably an unsubstituted hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and an unsubstituted hydrocarbon group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
  • a hydrocarbon group is more preferred, and a methyl group or an ethyl group is particularly preferred.
  • a plurality of R S3 may be the same or different.
  • Y represents an optionally substituted hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • Y has the same definition as R S3 , and the preferred range is also the same.
  • L S2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • L S2 is preferably an optionally substituted alkylene group.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkylene group which may contain a substituent is preferably 1-20, more preferably 1-10, and even more preferably 1-5.
  • the alkylene group may be linear, branched, or cyclic.
  • SS2 represents a specific group.
  • the specific group represented by SS2 has the same meaning as the specific group possessed by the coating layer described above, and the preferred range is also the same.
  • a represents an integer of 1 to 3; As a, 2 to 3 are preferable, and 3 is more preferable.
  • b represents an integer of 0 to 2; b is preferably 0 to 1, more preferably 0. However, a+b is 3.
  • silane coupling agents include silane coupling agents that do not contain a hydrophobic group and the specific group A or the specific group B and that contain an amino group, an aryl group, or an epoxy group.
  • composition of the present invention may contain other modified inorganic particles or other inorganic particles in addition to the above modified inorganic particles.
  • modified inorganic particles include, but are not limited to, modified inorganic particles other than the modified inorganic particles described above.
  • Inorganic particles contained in other modified inorganic particles include inorganic particles possessed by the modified inorganic particles described above.
  • composition of the invention contains a polymerizable compound.
  • polymerizable compound means an organic compound (for example, an organic compound containing an ethylenically unsaturated group) that can be polymerized under the action of a polymerization initiator or the like, which will be described later.
  • the composition of the present invention contains a solvent, the polymerizable compound is preferably dissolved in the solvent.
  • the polymerizable compound may be a low-molecular-weight polymerizable compound or a high-molecular-weight polymerizable compound.
  • low-molecular-weight polymerizable compounds include polymerizable low-molecular-weight compounds described later.
  • high-molecular-weight polymerizable compound include resins described later that contain groups (ethylenically unsaturated groups, etc.) that polymerize under the action of a polymerization initiator.
  • the content of the polymerizable compound (the total content of the low-molecular-weight polymerizable compound and the high-molecular-weight polymerizable compound) is preferably 10 to 90% by mass based on the total solid content of the composition.
  • the content of the polymerizable compound is preferably 50 to 90% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition, and 65 to 85% by mass. more preferred. Further, when the composition of the present invention contains a coloring material to be described later, the content of the polymerizable compound is preferably 15 to 55% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition, and 20 to 50% by mass. more preferred. The content of the polymerizable compound is preferably 20 to 95% by mass, more preferably 50 to 90% by mass, and even more preferably 70 to 88% by mass, based on the total non-colored organic solid content of the composition.
  • a non-coloring organic solid content is a solid content and refers to a non-coloring organic component.
  • inorganic particles discussed above, do not fall under the organic component and are not included in non-colored organic solids.
  • a component used as a coloring material or a coloring agent organic pigment, etc.
  • Non-colored organic solids include, for example, a polymerizable compound, a resin described later that does not contain a group that polymerizes under the action of a polymerization initiator (ethylenically unsaturated group, etc.), a polymerization initiator, a surfactant agents and polymerization inhibitors.
  • a polymerization initiator ethylenically unsaturated group, etc.
  • a surfactant agents ethylenically unsaturated group, etc.
  • a polymerizable low-molecular-weight compound is one form of a polymerizable compound.
  • the content of the polymerizable low-molecular-weight compound in the composition is preferably 5-60% by mass based on the total solid content of the composition.
  • the content of the polymerizable low-molecular-weight compound is preferably 20 to 50% by mass, more preferably 25 to 40% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition. % is more preferred.
  • the content of the polymerizable low-molecular-weight compound is preferably 7 to 30% by mass, more preferably 10 to 20% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition. % is more preferred.
  • the content of the polymerizable low-molecular-weight compound is preferably 10 to 70% by mass, more preferably 20 to 60% by mass, and even more preferably 30 to 50% by mass, based on the total non-colored organic solid content of the composition. .
  • the polymerizable low-molecular-weight compounds may be used singly or in combination of two or more. When two or more polymerizable low-molecular-weight compounds are used, the total content is preferably within the above range.
  • the molecular weight (or weight-average molecular weight) of the polymerizable low-molecular-weight compound is not particularly limited, but is preferably 2500 or less. The lower limit is preferably 100 or more.
  • the polymerizable low-molecular-weight compound is preferably a compound containing an ethylenically unsaturated group (a group containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond). That is, the composition of the present invention preferably contains an ethylenically unsaturated group-containing low-molecular-weight compound as a polymerizable low-molecular-weight compound.
  • the polymerizable low-molecular-weight compound is preferably a compound containing one or more ethylenically unsaturated bonds, more preferably a compound containing two or more, still more preferably a compound containing three or more, and particularly a compound containing four or more. preferable.
  • the upper limit is, for example, 15 or less.
  • Ethylenically unsaturated groups include, for example, vinyl groups, (meth)allyl groups, and (meth)acryloyl groups.
  • polymerizable low-molecular-weight compound for example, the compounds described in paragraph [0050] of JP-A-2008-260927 and paragraph [0040] of JP-A-2015-68893 can be used. is incorporated herein.
  • Polymerizable low-molecular-weight compounds may be in any chemical form such as monomers, prepolymers, oligomers, mixtures thereof, and polymers thereof.
  • the polymerizable low-molecular compound is preferably a 3- to 15-functional (meth)acrylate compound, more preferably a 3- to 6-functional (meth)acrylate compound.
  • the polymerizable low-molecular-weight compound is also preferably a compound containing one or more ethylenically unsaturated groups and having a boiling point of 100°C or higher under normal pressure.
  • a compound containing one or more ethylenically unsaturated groups and having a boiling point of 100°C or higher under normal pressure.
  • the compounds described in paragraph [0227] of JP-A-2013-29760 and paragraphs [0254] to [0257] of JP-A-2008-292970 can be used, and the contents thereof are incorporated herein.
  • Polymerizable low-molecular-weight compounds include dipentaerythritol triacrylate (commercially available, for example, KAYARAD D-330; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol tetraacrylate (commercially available, for example, KAYARAD D-320 Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate (commercially available, for example, KAYARAD D-310; Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate (commercially available , for example, KAYARAD DPHA; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., A-DPH-12E; manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), and these (meth)acryloyl groups are via ethylene glycol residues or propylene glycol residues (eg, SR454, SR499, commercial
  • oligomeric types can also be used.
  • NK ester A-TMMT penentaerythritol tetraacrylate, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • KAYARAD RP-1040 penentaerythritol tetraacrylate, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • KAYARAD DPEA-12LT KAYARAD DPHA LT
  • KAYARAD RP-3060 KAYARAD DPEA-12
  • the polymerizable low-molecular-weight compound may be a urethane (meth)acrylate compound having both a (meth)acryloyl group and a urethane bond in the compound. manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) may be used.
  • Preferred embodiments of the polymerizable low-molecular compound are shown below.
  • the polymerizable low-molecular-weight compound may have acid groups such as carboxylic acid groups, sulfonic acid groups, and phosphoric acid groups.
  • the polymerizable low-molecular-weight compound containing an acid group is preferably an ester of an aliphatic polyhydroxy compound and an unsaturated carboxylic acid.
  • a polymerizable low-molecular-weight compound having an acid group is more preferable, and in this ester, a compound in which the aliphatic polyhydroxy compound is pentaerythritol and/or dipentaerythritol is more preferable.
  • Commercially available products include, for example, Aronix TO-2349, M-305, M-510 and M-520 manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.
  • the acid value of the polymerizable low-molecular compound containing an acid group is preferably 0.1-40 mgKOH/g, more preferably 5-30 mgKOH/g.
  • the acid value of the polymerizable low-molecular-weight compound is 0.1 mgKOH/g or more, the development dissolution property is good, and when it is 40 mgKOH/g or less, it is advantageous in terms of production and/or handling. Furthermore, the photopolymerization performance is good and the curability is excellent.
  • a preferred embodiment of the polymerizable low-molecular-weight compound is a compound containing a caprolactone structure.
  • Examples of compounds containing a caprolactone structure are not particularly limited as long as they contain a caprolactone structure in the molecule.
  • Examples include trimethylolethane, ditrimethylolethane, trimethylolpropane, ditrimethylolpropane, pentaerythritol, dipentaerythritol,
  • Examples include ⁇ -caprolactone-modified polyfunctional (meth)acrylates obtained by esterifying polyhydric alcohols such as tripentaerythritol, glycerin, diglycerol, and trimethylolmelamine with (meth)acrylic acid and ⁇ -caprolactone. be done.
  • a compound containing a caprolactone structure represented by the following formula (Z-1) is preferable.
  • R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • m represents the number of 1 or 2
  • * represents a bonding position
  • R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • "*" represents a bonding position
  • Commercially available polymerizable low-molecular-weight compounds containing a caprolactone structure include, for example, M-350 (trade name) (trimethylolpropane tri
  • a compound represented by the following formula (Z-4) or (Z-5) can also be used as the polymerizable low-molecular compound.
  • E represents -((CH 2 ) y CH 2 O)- or ((CH 2 ) y CH(CH 3 )O)-, and y represents an integer of 0 to 10, and X represents a (meth)acryloyl group, a hydrogen atom, or a carboxylic acid group.
  • the total number of (meth)acryloyl groups is 3 or 4
  • m represents an integer of 0-10, and the sum of m is an integer of 0-40.
  • formula (Z-5) the total number of (meth)acryloyl groups is 5 or 6
  • n represents an integer of 0-10, and the sum of each n is an integer of 0-60.
  • m is preferably an integer of 0-6, more preferably an integer of 0-4.
  • the sum of m is preferably an integer of 2 to 40, more preferably an integer of 2 to 16, and even more preferably an integer of 4 to 8.
  • n is preferably an integer of 0-6, more preferably an integer of 0-4.
  • the sum of n is preferably an integer of 3-60, more preferably an integer of 3-24, and even more preferably an integer of 6-12.
  • -((CH 2 ) y CH 2 O)- or -((CH 2 ) y CH(CH 3 )O)- in formula (Z-4) or formula (Z-5) is on the oxygen atom side is preferably bound to X.
  • the compounds represented by formula (Z-4) or formula (Z-5) may be used singly or in combination of two or more.
  • formula (Z-5) a form in which all six X are acryloyl groups, a compound in which all six X are acryloyl groups in formula (Z-5), and among six X,
  • a preferred embodiment is a mixture with a compound having at least one hydrogen atom. With such a configuration, the developability can be further improved.
  • the total content of the compound represented by formula (Z-4) or formula (Z-5) in the polymerizable low-molecular-weight compound is preferably 20% by mass or more, more preferably 50% by mass or more.
  • pentaerythritol derivatives and/or dipentaerythritol derivatives are more preferred.
  • the polymerizable low-molecular-weight compound may contain a cardo skeleton.
  • a polymerizable low-molecular-weight compound containing a cardo skeleton is preferably a polymerizable low-molecular-weight compound containing a 9,9-bisarylfluorene skeleton.
  • Examples of polymerizable low-molecular-weight compounds containing a cardo skeleton include Oncoat EX series (manufactured by Nagase & Co., Ltd.) and Ogsol (manufactured by Osaka Gas Chemicals Co., Ltd.).
  • the polymerizable low-molecular-weight compound is also preferably a compound containing an isocyanuric acid skeleton as a central nucleus.
  • examples of such polymerizable low-molecular-weight compounds include NK Ester A-9300 (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.).
  • the content of ethylenically unsaturated groups in the polymerizable low-molecular-weight compound (meaning the value obtained by dividing the number of ethylenically unsaturated groups in the polymerizable low-molecular-weight compound by the molecular weight (g/mol) of the polymerizable low-molecular-weight compound ) is preferably 5.0 mmol/g or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 20.0 mmol/g or less.
  • the composition of the invention preferably contains a coloring material.
  • the coloring material is a material different from the inorganic particles described above.
  • Colorants include, for example, chromatic colorants, achromatic colorants, and infrared absorbers.
  • a chromatic colorant means a colorant other than a white colorant and a black colorant.
  • the chromatic colorant is preferably a colorant that absorbs in a wavelength range of 400 nm or more and less than 650 nm.
  • the colorant preferably contains at least one selected from the group consisting of chromatic colorants and achromatic colorants, and contains at least one selected from the group consisting of chromatic colorants and black colorants.
  • the pattern shape when placed is more excellent, it is more preferable to contain at least one selected from the group consisting of a chromatic colorant of an organic pigment and a black colorant of an inorganic pigment, and carbon black It is particularly preferred to include black colorants other than inorganic pigments.
  • the content of the coloring material is preferably 30 to 80% by mass based on the total solid content of the composition.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 40% by mass or more, still more preferably 44% by mass or more, and particularly preferably 48% by mass or more, from the viewpoint of better color separation.
  • the upper limit is more preferably less than 70% by mass, and even more preferably 65% by mass or less, from the viewpoint of further improving the accuracy of the pattern shape. When two or more coloring materials are included, the total amount thereof preferably falls within the above range.
  • the lower limit of the mass ratio of the content of the coloring material to the content of the modified inorganic particles is 1 or more from the viewpoint of better color separation. It is preferably 2 or more, more preferably 3 or more, and particularly preferably 5 or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 16 or less, more preferably 14 or less, even more preferably 13 or less, and particularly preferably 12 or less, from the viewpoint of better transmittance. In particular, if the mass ratio is in the range of 2 to 14, the occurrence of peeling after the moisture resistance test can be further suppressed.
  • Mass ratio of the total content of modified inorganic particles, resin, polymerization initiator and polymerizable compound to the content of coloring material is preferably 0.01 to 2.00, more preferably 0.10 to 1.80, even more preferably 0.20 to 1.00.
  • Chromatic colorants include red colorants, green colorants, blue colorants, yellow colorants, violet colorants and orange colorants.
  • a chromatic colorant may be a pigment or a dye.
  • a pigment and a dye may be used in combination.
  • the pigment may be either an inorganic pigment or an organic pigment, and an inorganic pigment is preferable.
  • an inorganic pigment or a material in which a part of an organic-inorganic pigment is replaced with an organic chromophore can also be used. By replacing an inorganic pigment or an organic-inorganic pigment with an organic chromophore, hue design can be facilitated.
  • the average primary particle size of the pigment is preferably 1 to 200 nm.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 5 nm or more, and even more preferably 10 nm or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 180 nm or less, still more preferably 150 nm or less, and particularly preferably 100 nm or less.
  • the primary particle diameter of the pigment can be determined from the image photograph obtained by observing the primary particles of the pigment with a transmission electron microscope. Specifically, the projected area of the primary particles of the pigment is obtained, and the corresponding circle equivalent diameter is calculated as the primary particle diameter of the pigment.
  • the average primary particle size in the present invention is the arithmetic mean value of the primary particle sizes of 400 primary particles of the pigment.
  • the primary particles of the pigment refer to independent particles without agglomeration.
  • the chromatic colorant preferably contains a pigment.
  • the content of the pigment in the chromatic colorant is preferably 50% by mass or more, more preferably 70% by mass or more, still more preferably 80% by mass or more, and 90% by mass or more. is particularly preferred.
  • the upper limit is preferably 100% by mass or less. Examples of pigments include those shown below.
  • a halogenated zinc phthalocyanine pigment having an average number of halogen atoms of 10 to 14, an average number of bromine atoms of 8 to 12, and an average number of chlorine atoms of 2 to 5 per molecule.
  • Specific examples include compounds described in International Publication No. 2015/118720.
  • compounds described in Chinese Patent Application No. 106909027, phthalocyanine compounds having phosphoric acid esters as ligands described in WO 2012/102395, and the like can also be used.
  • An aluminum phthalocyanine compound having a phosphorus atom can also be used as a blue pigment. Specific examples include compounds described in paragraphs [0022] to [0030] of JP-A-2012-247591 and paragraph [0047] of JP-A-2011-157478.
  • JP-A-6443711 pigments, quinophthalone-based yellow pigments described in JP-A-2018-155881, compounds described in JP-A-2018-062644, quinophthalone compounds described in JP 6432077, and patents Pigments described in JP-A-6443711 can also be used.
  • JP-A-2018-062644 can also be used as the yellow pigment.
  • This compound can also be used as a pigment derivative.
  • a diketopyrrolopyrrole compound in which at least one bromine atom is substituted in the structure described in JP-A-2017-201384, a diketopyrrolo described in paragraphs [0016] to [0022] of Japanese Patent No. 6248838 Pyrrole compounds, diketopyrrolopyrrole compounds described in WO 2012/102399, diketopyrrolopyrrole compounds described in WO 2012/117965, naphthol azo compounds described in JP 2012-229344, etc. can also be used.
  • a compound having a structure in which an aromatic ring group in which a group having an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom or a nitrogen atom is bonded to an aromatic ring is bonded to a diketopyrrolopyrrole skeleton may also be used. can.
  • the compounds described in Japanese Patent Nos. 6516119 and 6525101 can also be used as red pigments.
  • This compound can also be used as a pigment derivative.
  • dyes can also be used as chromatic colorants.
  • the dye is not particularly limited, and known dyes can be used.
  • thiazole compounds described in JP-A-2012-158649, azo compounds described in JP-A-2011-184493, and azo compounds described in JP-A-2011-145540 can also be preferably used.
  • yellow dyes for example, quinophthalone compounds described in paragraphs [0011] to [0034] of JP-A-2013-054339 and quinophthalones described in paragraphs [0013] to [0058] of JP-A-2014-026228 Compounds can also be used.
  • achromatic colorant examples include black colorants and white colorants, with black colorants being preferred.
  • black colorant examples include one or more selected from the group consisting of black pigments and black dyes.
  • a plurality of coloring agents that cannot be used alone as a black coloring agent may be combined and adjusted so as to be black as a whole, and used as a black coloring agent.
  • a plurality of pigments having a color other than black alone may be used in combination as a black pigment.
  • a plurality of dyes having a color other than black alone may be used in combination as a black dye
  • a pigment having a color alone other than black and a dye alone having a color other than black may be combined to form a black dye.
  • a black colorant means a colorant that absorbs over the entire wavelength range of 400 to 700 nm. More specifically, for example, a black colorant that meets the evaluation criteria Z described below is preferred.
  • a composition containing a coloring material, a transparent resin matrix (acrylic resin or the like), and a solvent, and having a coloring material content of 60% by mass relative to the total solid content is prepared.
  • the resulting composition is applied onto a glass substrate so that the thickness of the cured film after drying is 1 ⁇ m to form a cured film.
  • the light-shielding property of the cured film after drying is evaluated using a spectrophotometer (UV-3600 manufactured by Hitachi, Ltd., etc.).
  • the coloring material can be judged to be a black coloring material that meets the evaluation criteria Z.
  • the maximum value of the transmittance of the cured film after drying at a wavelength of 400 to 700 nm is more preferably less than 8%, more preferably less than 5%, in the evaluation criteria Z.
  • the black pigment may be an inorganic pigment or an organic pigment.
  • the black colorant is preferably a black pigment, more preferably an inorganic pigment, from the viewpoint that the light resistance of the light shielding film is more excellent.
  • the black pigment a pigment that expresses black color by itself is preferable, and a pigment that expresses black color by itself and absorbs infrared rays is more preferable.
  • the black pigment that absorbs infrared rays has absorption in, for example, the wavelength region of the infrared region (preferably wavelength of 650 to 1300 nm).
  • a black pigment having a maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 675 to 900 nm is also preferred.
  • the particle size of the black pigment is not particularly limited, but is preferably 5 to 100 nm, more preferably 5 to 50 nm, from the viewpoint of better balance between handling properties and the stability of the composition over time (black pigment does not settle). 5 to 30 nm is more preferred.
  • the particle size of the black pigment means the average primary particle size of particles measured by the following method.
  • the average primary particle size can be measured using a transmission electron microscope (TEM).
  • TEM transmission electron microscope
  • a transmission electron microscope for example, a transmission microscope HT7700 manufactured by Hitachi High-Technologies Corporation can be used.
  • the maximum length of the particle image obtained using a transmission electron microscope (Dmax: the maximum length at two points on the contour of the particle image) and the maximum vertical length (DV-max: two straight lines parallel to the maximum length
  • Dmax the maximum length at two points on the contour of the particle image
  • DV-max maximum vertical length
  • the shortest length vertically connecting two straight lines when an image is sandwiched between two straight lines was measured, and the geometric mean value (Dmax ⁇ DV-max) 1/2 was taken as the particle diameter.
  • the particle diameters of 100 particles were measured by this method, and the arithmetic average value was taken as the average primary particle diameter of the particles.
  • Inorganic pigment used as black colorant is not particularly limited as long as it has a light-shielding property and contains an inorganic compound, but known inorganic pigments can be used. . Inorganic pigments are preferable as the black colorant because the light-shielding film has better low reflectivity and light-shielding properties.
  • inorganic pigments include Group 4 metal elements such as titanium (Ti) and zirconium (Zr), Group 5 metal elements such as vanadium (V) and niobium (Nb), yttrium (Y), and aluminum (Al).
  • Group 4 metal elements such as titanium (Ti) and zirconium (Zr)
  • Group 5 metal elements such as vanadium (V) and niobium (Nb), yttrium (Y), and aluminum (Al).
  • the inorganic pigment may contain two or more metal atoms.
  • metal oxides metal nitrides and metal oxynitrides, particles in which other metal atoms are mixed may be used.
  • metal nitride-containing particles further containing atoms (preferably oxygen atoms and/or sulfur atoms) selected from elements of groups 13 to 17 of the periodic table can be used.
  • the metal oxide, metal nitride and metal oxynitride may be coated with an inorganic substance and/or an organic substance.
  • the inorganic substance include metal atoms contained in the inorganic pigment.
  • organic substance include organic substances having the hydrophobic group described above, and silane compounds are preferable.
  • the method for producing the above metal nitride, metal oxide or metal oxynitride is not particularly limited as long as a black pigment having desired physical properties can be obtained. You can use the method.
  • the vapor phase reaction method includes an electric furnace method, a thermal plasma method, and the like, but the thermal plasma method is preferable from the viewpoints of less impurity contamination, easier particle diameter uniformity, and higher productivity.
  • the metal nitride, metal oxide or metal oxynitride may be subjected to a surface modification treatment.
  • the surface may be modified with a surface treating agent having both a silicone group and an alkyl group. Examples of such inorganic particles include the "KTP-09" series (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.).
  • Inorganic pigments also include, for example, zirconium nitride containing yttrium.
  • zirconium nitride containing yttrium When the composition contains yttrium-containing zirconium nitride, it is possible to improve the visible light shielding property while maintaining the i-line transmittance.
  • the particle size (average primary particle size) of the yttrium-containing zirconium nitride is preferably 10 to 100 nm from the viewpoint of suppressing a decrease in light shielding properties at a wavelength of 550 nm (visible light).
  • the average primary particle size of the yttrium-containing zirconium nitride powder can be measured by converting the measured specific surface area into spheres.
  • yttrium is contained in a solid solution state in the zirconium nitride powder.
  • X1 is the light transmittance at a wavelength of 550 nm
  • X2 is the light transmittance at a wavelength of 365 nm. 5% or less is preferable, and 6.5% or less is more preferable.
  • X2 is preferably 25% or more, more preferably 26% or more.
  • the ratio of X2 to X1 (X2/X1) is preferably 3.5 or more, more preferably 4.0 or more.
  • the content of yttrium is preferably 1.0 to 12.0% by mass, relative to the total mass of zirconium nitride and yttrium, from the viewpoint of suppressing a decrease in light shielding properties at a wavelength of 550 nm (visible light), and 2.0 to 2.0%. 11.0% by mass is more preferable.
  • the above content can be measured by ICP emission spectrometry.
  • Yttrium-containing zirconium nitride and its production method include, for example, those described in JP-A-2020-180036, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • Inorganic pigments also include, for example, zirconium nitride containing aluminum.
  • Zirconium containing aluminum is preferably zirconium nitride coated with alumina.
  • Moisture resistance is improved by coating zirconium nitride with alumina.
  • the zirconium nitride coated with alumina preferably has a volume resistivity of 1 ⁇ 10 6 ⁇ cm or more, more preferably 1 ⁇ 10 7 ⁇ cm or more.
  • the volume resistivity of zirconium nitride coated with alumina is obtained as follows.
  • Alumina-coated zirconium nitride is placed in a pressure vessel and compressed at 5 to 10 MPa to form a compact, and the resistance value of the compact is measured with a digital multimeter. Then, the obtained resistance value is multiplied by a resistivity correction factor (RCF) that is referred to based on the thickness of the green compact, the shape of the apparatus, and the thickness of the green compact, to obtain the volume resistivity of the powder ( ⁇ cm) is obtained.
  • RCF resistivity correction factor
  • the coating amount of alumina is preferably 1.5 to 9% by mass, more preferably 3 to 7% by mass with respect to 100% by mass of zirconium nitride.
  • the isoelectric point of zirconium nitride coated with alumina is preferably 5.7 or higher, more preferably 5.8 or higher.
  • the “isoelectric point of alumina-coated zirconium nitride” means that when the pH of a dispersion liquid in which alumina-coated zirconium nitride is dispersed, the charge per piece becomes zero as a whole, and the dispersion liquid means the pH at which the powder does not move even if a voltage is applied to .
  • an inorganic nitride powder such as a zirconium nitride powder, exhibits a large change in zeta potential when the pH changes, and at a certain pH, the surface potential (zeta potential) becomes zero, and the isoelectric potential does not exhibit any electrophoresis. have a point.
  • zeta potential is an electric double layer, which is an electric double structure formed by attracting ions with opposite polar charges around powder with a certain polar charge in a dispersion liquid. , means the potential of the sliding surface at which liquid flow begins to occur. This zeta potential is measured as follows using, for example, a zeta potential meter (model: DT1202) manufactured by Dispersion Technology.
  • the device is measured using the colloidal oscillating current method.
  • the above dispersion is placed in a container and sandwiched between a pair of electrodes, and a predetermined voltage is applied to these electrodes to move the powder in the dispersion.
  • a predetermined voltage is applied to these electrodes to move the powder in the dispersion.
  • the charged particles and their surrounding counter ions are polarized, generating an electric field called the colloidal oscillation potential, which can be detected as a current.
  • This current becomes a colloidal oscillation current.
  • the zeta potential is determined from the measured colloidal oscillatory currents using Smoluchowski's equation and coupling theory.
  • the pH at which the zeta potential becomes zero is the isoelectric point of the powder.
  • the L * value of zirconium nitride coated with alumina is preferably 13 or less.
  • the “L * value of zirconium nitride coated with alumina” is the lightness index in the CIE1976 L * a * b * color space (measurement light source C: color temperature 6774K).
  • the above CIE1976L * a * b * color space was converted from the CIEXYZ color system by the International Commission on Illumination (CIE) in 1976, and a constant distance in the color system is almost perceptually uniform in any color region. It is a color space defined to have a difference.
  • L * value, a * value, and b * value are quantities determined by an orthogonal coordinate system in the CIE1976L * a * b * color space, and are expressed by equations (1) to (3).
  • L * 116(Y/Y0) 1/ 3-16 ( 1 )
  • a * 500 [(X/X 0 ) 1/3 - (Y/Y 0 ) 1/3 ]
  • b * 200 [(Y/Y 0 ) 1/3 - (Z/Z 0 ) 1/3 ] (3)
  • X/X 0 , Y/Y 0 , Z/Z 0 >0.008856
  • X, Y, and Z are the tristimulus values of the object color.
  • the lightness index L * value of zirconium nitride coated with alumina is determined using, for example, a spectral color difference meter (model: SE7700) manufactured by Nippon Denshoku Industries Co., Ltd. When the L * value is 13 or less, the blackness is sufficient and a predetermined color tone can be obtained as a black pigment.
  • the BET specific surface area of zirconium nitride coated with alumina is preferably 20 m 2 /g or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 1000 m 2 /g or less.
  • the BET specific surface area is measured by using, for example, a specific surface area measuring device (model: SA1100) manufactured by Shibata Kagaku Co., Ltd., on the surface of the powder (black pigment), a gas molecule (for example, nitrogen gas, etc.) whose adsorption area is known. is adsorbed and calculated from the adsorption amount.
  • the BET equation when adsorption is in equilibrium at a constant temperature, adsorption
  • the amount of gas molecules in only one layer is measured, making it possible to measure the exact specific surface area.
  • the BET specific surface area is 20 m 2 /g or more, a decrease in coloring power (color development power) can be suppressed.
  • Alumina-coated zirconium nitride and its manufacturing method include, for example, those described in JP-A-2020-158377, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • nitrides or oxynitrides of one or more metals selected from the group consisting of titanium, vanadium, zirconium, niobium, and iron are more preferable because they can suppress the occurrence of undercuts when forming a light-shielding film.
  • one or more metal oxynitrides selected from the group consisting of titanium, vanadium, zirconium and iron are more preferable, and zirconium oxynitride or titanium oxynitride (titanium black ) is particularly preferred.
  • Titanium black is black particles containing titanium oxynitride. Titanium black can be surface-modified as necessary for the purpose of improving dispersibility, suppressing cohesion, and the like. Titanium black can be coated with silicon oxide, titanium oxide, germanium oxide, aluminum oxide, magnesium oxide, or zirconium oxide. can also be processed.
  • Titanium black can be produced by heating a mixture of titanium dioxide and metallic titanium in a reducing atmosphere (JP-A-49-5432), and ultra-fine dioxide obtained by high-temperature hydrolysis of titanium tetrachloride.
  • a method of reducing titanium in a reducing atmosphere containing hydrogen JP-A-57-205322
  • a method of reducing titanium dioxide or titanium hydroxide at high temperature in the presence of ammonia JP-A-60-65069, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 61-201610
  • a method of adhering a vanadium compound to titanium dioxide or titanium hydroxide and subjecting it to high-temperature reduction in the presence of ammonia Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 61-201610.
  • the particle size of titanium black is not particularly limited, but is preferably 10 to 45 nm, more preferably 12 to 20 nm.
  • the specific surface area of titanium black is not particularly limited, but since the water repellency after surface treatment with a water repellent agent has a predetermined performance, the value measured by the BET (Brunauer, Emmett, Teller) method is 5 to 5. It is preferably 150 m 2 /g, more preferably 20 to 100 m 2 /g.
  • titanium black for example, titanium black 10S, 12S, 13R, 13M, 13M-C, 13R, 13R-N, 13M-T (trade name, manufactured by Mitsubishi Materials Corporation), Tilac D (trade name) , manufactured by Ako Kasei Co., Ltd.), and MT-150A (trade name, manufactured by Teika Co., Ltd.).
  • the composition also preferably contains titanium black as a dispersant containing titanium black and Si atoms.
  • titanium black is contained as a dispersant in the composition.
  • the content ratio (Si/Ti) of Si atoms and Ti atoms in the material to be dispersed is preferably 0.05 to 0.5, more preferably 0.07 to 0.4 in terms of mass.
  • the material to be dispersed includes both titanium black in the state of primary particles and titanium black in the state of aggregates (secondary particles).
  • the Si/Ti ratio of the substance to be dispersed is at least a predetermined value, when a composition layer using the substance to be dispersed is patterned by photolithography or the like, it is difficult for a residue to remain in the removed portion. If /Ti is equal to or less than a predetermined value, the light shielding ability tends to be good.
  • the following means can be used. First, titanium oxide and silica particles are dispersed using a disperser to obtain a dispersion, and this mixture is subjected to a reduction treatment at a high temperature (for example, 850 to 1000 ° C.), so that titanium black particles are the main component. Then, a dispersed material containing Si and Ti can be obtained. Titanium black in which Si/Ti is adjusted can be produced, for example, by the method described in paragraphs [0005] and [0016] to [0021] of JP-A-2008-266045.
  • the content ratio (Si/Ti) of Si atoms and Ti atoms in the object to be dispersed is, for example, the method described in paragraphs [0054] to [0056] of WO 2011/049090 (2-1 ) or method (2-3).
  • the above titanium black can be used.
  • a composite oxide of a plurality of metals selected from Cu, Fe, Mn, V, Ni, etc., cobalt oxide, Black pigments such as iron oxide, carbon black, and aniline black may be used singly or in combination of two or more as an object to be dispersed.
  • the dispersed material comprising titanium black accounts for 50% by mass or more of the total dispersed material.
  • Inorganic pigments also include carbon black.
  • Carbon blacks include, for example, furnace black, channel black, thermal black, acetylene black and lamp black.
  • carbon black produced by a known method such as an oil furnace method may be used, or a commercially available product may be used.
  • Specific examples of commercial products of carbon black include C.I. I. Pigment Black 1 and other organic pigments, and C.I. I. Inorganic pigments such as Pigment Black 7 can be used.
  • Carbon black that has undergone surface treatment is preferable as the carbon black.
  • the surface treatment can modify the surface state of the carbon black particles and improve the dispersion stability in the composition.
  • Examples of the surface treatment include coating treatment with a resin, surface treatment for introducing an acidic group, and surface treatment with a silane coupling agent.
  • the carbon black carbon black coated with a resin is preferable.
  • the light shielding properties and insulating properties of the light shielding film can be improved.
  • the reliability of the image display device can be improved by reducing leakage current. Therefore, the light shielding film is suitable for applications that require insulation.
  • Coating resins include epoxy resins, polyamides, polyamideimides, novolac resins, phenolic resins, urea resins, melamine resins, polyurethanes, diallyl phthalate resins, alkylbenzene resins, polystyrene, polycarbonates, polybutylene terephthalate, and modified polyphenylene oxides.
  • the content of the coating resin is preferably 0.1 to 40% by mass, more preferably 0.5 to 30% by mass, based on the total amount of the carbon black and the coating resin, from the viewpoint that the light shielding film has better light shielding properties and insulating properties. more preferred.
  • the crystallite size of the inorganic pigment is preferably 10 nm or more, more preferably 20 nm or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 60 nm or less, more preferably 50 nm or less, and even more preferably 40 nm or less.
  • the crystallite size is less than 10 nm, the particle surface is likely to be oxidized, resulting in a decrease in light shielding properties. If the crystallite size is more than 60 nm, the transmission peak of the colored film shifts to longer wavelengths, resulting in lower light transmittance in the ultraviolet region and lower light shielding properties in the visible region.
  • the crystallite size is determined, for example, by the following method. It can be calculated from the half width of the X-ray diffraction peak derived from the (111) plane in the X-ray diffraction spectrum when CuK ⁇ rays are used as the X-ray source.
  • K represents a constant of 0.9.
  • represents 0.15406 (nm).
  • is a value represented by the above formula (5).
  • is as described above.
  • Equation (5) ⁇ e represents the half width of the diffraction peak.
  • ⁇ O represents the half width correction value (0.12°).
  • ⁇ , ⁇ e and ⁇ O are calculated in radians.
  • the X-ray diffraction spectrum is measured by a wide-angle X-ray diffraction method using CuK ⁇ rays as an X-ray source.
  • the X-ray diffractometer for example, RU-200R manufactured by Rigakusha can be used.
  • the measurement conditions are an output of 50 kV/200 mA, a slit system of 1°-1°-0.15 mm-0.45 mm, a measurement step (2 ⁇ ) of 0.02°, and a scan speed of 2°/min.
  • the value of the X-diffraction peak includes, for example, paragraphs [0027] to [0028] of JP-A-2009-091205, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • a method of adjusting the crystallite size within the above range includes, for example, a method of adjusting crystal growth conditions during particle synthesis by gas phase reaction.
  • the crystallite size can be easily adjusted within the above range by adjusting the cooling time and cooling rate after the particles are vaporized.
  • inorganic pigments used as black colorants include, for example, JP-A-2017-222559, WO-A-2019/130772, WO-A-2019/059359 and JP-A-2009-091205. , the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • Organic pigment used as a black colorant is not particularly limited as long as it has a light-shielding property and contains an organic compound, but known organic pigments can be used. .
  • organic pigments include, for example, bisbenzofuranone compounds, azomethine compounds, perylene compounds, and azo compounds, with bisbenzofuranone compounds and perylene compounds being preferred.
  • Examples of the bisbenzofuranone compound include compounds described in JP-A-2010-534726, JP-A-2012-515233, and JP-A-2012-515234.
  • a bisbenzofuranone compound is available as “Irgaphor Black” (trade name) manufactured by BASF.
  • Perylene compounds include those described in JP-A-62-001753 and JP-B-63-026784. The perylene compound is C.I. I. Pigment Black 21, 30, 31, 32, 33, and 34.
  • black dye a dye that expresses black color by itself can be used.
  • pyridone azo compounds, cyanine compounds, phenothiazine compounds, and pyrrolopyrazole azomethine compounds can be used.
  • black dyes include dyes defined by the Color Index (C.I.) of Solvent Black 27 to 47, and Solvent Black 27, 29 or 34 C.I. I.
  • Commercially available products of these black dyes include Spiron Black MH, Black BH (manufactured by Hodogaya Chemical Co., Ltd.), VALIFAST Black 3804, 3810, 3820, 3830 (manufactured by Orient Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Dyes such as Savinyl Black RLSN (manufactured by Clariant Co., Ltd.), KAYASET Black KR, K-BL (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) and the like.
  • a pigment multimer as a black dye.
  • dye multimers include compounds described in JP-A-2011-213925 and JP-A-2013-041097.
  • a polymerizable dye having polymerizability in the molecule may be used, and commercially available products thereof include, for example, the RDW series manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.
  • a plurality of dyes having a color other than black alone may be used in combination as a black dye. Examples of such colored dyes include, for example, R (red), G (green), and B (blue) chromatic dyes (chromatic dyes), and paragraph [0027 ] to [0200] can also be used.
  • white colorant As the white colorant, one or more selected from the group consisting of white pigments and white dyes can be mentioned, and white pigments are preferable from the viewpoint of weather resistance and the like.
  • white pigments include titanium oxide, strontium titanate, barium titanate, zinc oxide, magnesium oxide, zirconium oxide, aluminum oxide, barium sulfate, silica, talc, mica, aluminum hydroxide, calcium silicate, and aluminum silicate. , hollow resin particles, and zinc sulfide.
  • the white pigment is preferably particles containing titanium atoms, more preferably titanium oxide. Titanium oxide described in "Titanium Oxide, Physical Properties and Applied Techniques, Manabu Seino, Jun. 25, 1991, published by Gihodo Publishing" can also be suitably used as titanium oxide.
  • C.I. I. Pigment White 1 C.I. I. Pigment White 1, 3, 6, 16, 18, 21 can be used as a white pigment.
  • An infrared absorbing agent means a compound having absorption in the wavelength region of the infrared region (preferably wavelength of 650 to 1300 nm).
  • a compound having a maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 675 to 900 nm is preferred.
  • Colorants having such spectral characteristics include, for example, pyrrolopyrrole compounds, copper compounds, cyanine compounds, phthalocyanine compounds, iminium compounds, thiol complex compounds, transition metal oxide compounds, squarylium compounds, naphthalocyanine compounds, and quatarylene. compounds, dithiol metal complex compounds, and croconium compounds.
  • Phthalocyanine compounds, naphthalocyanine compounds, iminium compounds, cyanine compounds, squarylium compounds, and croconium compounds may use compounds disclosed in paragraphs [0010] to [0081] of JP-A-2010-111750. The contents are incorporated herein.
  • cyanine compound for example, "Functional Dyes, Shin Okawara/Ken Matsuoka/Teijiro Kitao/Tsunesuke Hirashima, Kodansha Scientific" can be referred to, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • the compound having a maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 675 to 900 nm is preferably at least one selected from the group consisting of cyanine compounds, pyrrolopyrrole compounds, squarylium compounds, phthalocyanine compounds, and naphthalocyanine compounds.
  • the infrared absorber is preferably a compound that dissolves in water at 25°C in an amount of 1% by mass or more, and more preferably a compound that dissolves in water at 25°C in an amount of 10% by mass or more. Solvent resistance is improved by using such a compound.
  • Pyrrolopyrrole compounds can be referred to paragraphs [0049] to [0062] of JP-A-2010-222557, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • JP 2014-063144 Paragraphs [0053] to [0099] of JP-A-2014-052431, paragraphs [0085]-[0150] of JP-A-2014-052431, paragraphs [0076]-[0124] of JP-A-2014-044301, JP-A-2012- 008532, paragraphs [0045] to [0078], JP 2015-172102, paragraphs [0027] to [0067], JP 2015-172004, paragraphs [0029] to [0067], JP 2015 -040895, paragraphs [0029] to [0085], JP 2014-126642, paragraphs [0022] to [0036], JP 2014-148567, paragraphs [0011] to [0017], JP Paragraphs [0010] to [0025] of 2015-157893, paragraphs [0013] to [0026] of JP 2014
  • the composition of the invention may contain a resin.
  • the resin is blended, for example, for use as a binder and for dispersing particles such as pigments in the composition.
  • a resin that is mainly used to disperse particles such as pigments is also called a dispersant.
  • the above dispersant does not contain either fluorine atoms or silicon atoms.
  • the use of the resin is only an example, and the resin can be used for purposes other than such uses.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the resin is preferably 2,000 to 2,000,000.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 1,000,000 or less, and even more preferably 500,000 or less.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 3000 or more, and even more preferably 5000 or more.
  • resins include (meth)acrylic resins, epoxy resins, ene-thiol resins, polycarbonate resins, polyether resins, polyarylate resins, polysulfone resins, polyethersulfone resins, polyphenylene resins, polyarylene ether phosphine oxide resins, polyimide resins, Polyamideimide resins, polyolefin resins, cyclic olefin resins, polyester resins, and styrene resins can be used. One of these resins may be used alone, or two or more may be mixed and used. As the cyclic olefin resin, norbornene resin is preferable from the viewpoint of improving heat resistance.
  • norbornene resins include, for example, the ARTON series manufactured by JSR Corporation (for example, ARTON F4520).
  • epoxy resins include epoxy resins that are glycidyl etherified compounds of phenolic compounds, epoxy resins that are glycidyl etherified compounds of various novolak resins, alicyclic epoxy resins, aliphatic epoxy resins, heterocyclic epoxy resins, glycidyl ester-based Epoxy resins, glycidylamine-based epoxy resins, epoxy resins obtained by glycidylating halogenated phenols, condensation products of silicon compounds containing epoxy groups and other silicon compounds, polymerizable unsaturated compounds having epoxy groups and others with other polymerizable unsaturated compounds.
  • Epoxy resins include Marproof G-0150M, G-0105SA, G-0130SP, G-0250SP, G-1005S, G-1005SA, G-1010S, G-2050M, G-01100, G-01758 (NOF). Co., Ltd., epoxy group-containing polymer) and the like can also be used. Also, resins described in Examples of International Publication No. 2016/088645 can be used as the resin. When the resin contains an ethylenically unsaturated group, particularly a (meth)acryloyl group, in the side chain, the main chain and the ethylenically unsaturated group are linked via a divalent linking group containing an alicyclic structure. It is also preferred that
  • the curable composition of the invention preferably contains an alkali-soluble resin.
  • the curable composition of the present invention contains an alkali-soluble resin
  • the acid group includes a carboxyl group, a phosphoric acid group, a sulfo group, a phenolic hydroxy group and the like, and a carboxyl group is preferred.
  • the number of acid groups that the alkali-soluble resin has may be one, or two or more.
  • the alkali-soluble resin can also be used as a dispersant.
  • the alkali-soluble resin preferably contains a repeating unit having an acid group on its side chain, and more preferably contains 5 to 70 mol % of repeating units having an acid group on its side chain in all repeating units of the resin.
  • the upper limit of the content of repeating units having an acid group in a side chain is preferably 50 mol % or less, more preferably 30 mol % or less.
  • the lower limit of the content of repeating units having an acid group in the side chain is preferably 10 mol % or more, more preferably 20 mol % or more.
  • the alkali-soluble resin is also preferably an alkali-soluble resin having a polymerizable group.
  • Polymerizable groups include (meth)allyl groups (meaning both allyl groups and methallyl groups), (meth)acryloyl groups, and the like.
  • the alkali-soluble resin having a polymerizable group is preferably a resin containing a repeating unit having a polymerizable group in its side chain and a repeating unit having an acid group in its side chain.
  • the alkali-soluble resin is a monomer component containing a compound represented by the following formula (ED1) and/or a compound represented by the following formula (ED2) (hereinafter, these compounds may be referred to as "ether dimer"). It is also preferred to include repeating units derived from
  • R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 25 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
  • R represents a hydrogen atom or an organic group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • ED2 the description in JP-A-2010-168539 can be referred to, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • the alkali-soluble resin preferably contains a repeating unit derived from the compound represented by the following formula (X).
  • R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • R 2 represents an alkylene group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms
  • R 3 represents a hydrogen atom or 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may contain a benzene ring.
  • represents an alkyl group of n represents an integer of 1-15.
  • JP 2012-208494 paragraph numbers 0558 to 0571 (corresponding US Patent Application Publication No. 2012/0235099, paragraph numbers 0685 to 0700), JP 2012-198408 can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated herein.
  • the acid value of the resin is preferably 10 to 500 mgKOH/g.
  • the lower limit is preferably 30 mgKOH/g or more, more preferably 50 mgKOH/g or more, and even more preferably 70 mgKOH/g or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 400 mgKOH/g or less, more preferably 300 mgKOH/g or less, still more preferably 200 mgKOH/g or less, and particularly preferably 100 mgKOH/g or less.
  • the ethylenically unsaturated bond equivalent of the resin (especially the alkali-soluble resin) (meaning the value obtained by dividing the number of ethylenically unsaturated groups in the polymerizable compound by the molecular weight (g/mol) of the polymerizable compound) is 0.4 to 2.5 mmol/g is preferred.
  • the lower limit is preferably 1.0 mmol/g, more preferably 1.2 mmol/g.
  • the upper limit is preferably 2.3 mmol/g, more preferably 2.0 mmol/g.
  • the curable composition of the present invention contains a resin having an acid value of 10 to 100 mgKOH/g and an ethylenically unsaturated bond equivalent of 1.0 to 2.0 mmol/g, after the moisture resistance test It is possible to further suppress the occurrence of peeling.
  • alkali-soluble resins include resins with the following structures.
  • Me represents a methyl group.
  • the curable composition of the present invention also preferably contains a resin having a basic group.
  • Basic groups include amino groups and ammonium bases.
  • the resin having a basic group may further have an acid group in addition to the basic group.
  • such a resin is also an alkali-soluble resin.
  • Resins having a basic group include resins having a tertiary amino group and a quaternary ammonium base.
  • the resin having a tertiary amino group and a quaternary ammonium base is preferably a resin having a repeating unit having a tertiary amino group and a repeating unit having a quaternary ammonium base.
  • the resin having a tertiary amino group and a quaternary ammonium base may further have a repeating unit having an acid group.
  • the resin having a tertiary amino group and a quaternary ammonium base also preferably has a block structure.
  • the resin having a tertiary amino group and a quaternary ammonium base preferably has an amine value of 10 to 250 mgKOH/g and a quaternary ammonium salt value of 10 to 90 mgKOH/g, and an amine value of 50 to 200 mgKOH. /g, and a quaternary ammonium salt value of 10 to 50 mgKOH/g.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the resin having a tertiary amino group and a quaternary ammonium base is preferably 3,000 to 300,000, more preferably 5,000 to 30,000.
  • a resin having a tertiary amino group and a quaternary ammonium group is an ethylenically unsaturated monomer having a tertiary amino group, an ethylenically unsaturated monomer having a quaternary ammonium group, and optionally other ethylenic It can be produced by copolymerizing unsaturated monomers.
  • ethylenically unsaturated monomers having a tertiary amino group and ethylenically unsaturated monomers having a quaternary ammonium base include those described in paragraphs 0150 to 0170 of WO 2018/230486. , the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • a resin having an acidic group described in paragraphs 0079 to 0160 of JP-A-2018-87939 may be used in combination.
  • the resin having a basic group is preferably a resin containing a nitrogen atom in its main chain.
  • Resins containing nitrogen atoms in the main chain include poly(lower alkyleneimine)-based repeating units, polyallylamine-based repeating units, polydiallylamine-based repeating units, metaxylenediamine-epichlorohydrin polycondensate-based It preferably contains a repeating unit having at least one nitrogen atom selected from repeating units and polyvinylamine-based repeating units.
  • the oligoimine resin is a resin having a repeating unit having a partial structure X having a functional group with a pKa of 14 or less and a repeating unit having a side chain containing an oligomer chain or polymer chain Y having 40 to 10000 atoms. is preferred.
  • the oligoimine resin may further have a repeating unit having an acid group.
  • the description in paragraphs 0102 to 0166 of JP-A-2012-255128 can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated herein.
  • the curable composition of the present invention can also contain a resin as a dispersant, and preferably contains a resin as a dispersant.
  • Dispersants include acidic dispersants (acidic resins) and basic dispersants (basic resins).
  • the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) represents a resin in which the amount of acid groups is greater than the amount of basic groups.
  • the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) is preferably a resin in which the amount of acid groups is 70 mol % or more when the total amount of acid groups and basic groups is 100 mol %. A resin consisting only of groups is more preferred.
  • the acid group possessed by the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) is preferably a carboxyl group.
  • a basic dispersant represents a resin in which the amount of basic groups is greater than the amount of acid groups.
  • the basic dispersant (basic resin) is preferably a resin in which the amount of basic groups exceeds 50 mol % when the total amount of acid groups and basic groups is 100 mol %.
  • the dispersant is preferably a resin having a basic group, more preferably a basic dispersant.
  • the resin used as the dispersant examples include the resin having a tertiary amino group and a quaternary ammonium base, the oligoimine resin, and the like. Also, the resin used as the dispersant is preferably a graft resin. Grafted resins include resins having repeating units with grafted chains. The graft resin may further have repeating units with acid groups. Details of the graft resin can be referred to paragraphs 0025 to 0094 of JP-A-2012-255128, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • the graft chain is selected from the group consisting of a polyester structure, a polyether structure, and a poly(meth)acrylate structure in order to improve the interaction between the graft chain and the solvent, thereby enhancing the dispersibility of the coloring material and the like. It is preferably a graft chain containing at least one kind of polyether structure, and more preferably a graft chain containing at least one of a polyester structure and a polyether structure.
  • the resin used as the dispersant is preferably a resin containing a repeating unit having an acid group. It is also preferable that the resin used as the dispersant has a structure in which a plurality of polymer chains are bonded to the core portion.
  • Such resins include, for example, dendrimers (including star polymers). Further, specific examples of dendrimers include polymer compounds C-1 to C-31 described in paragraphs 0196 to 0209 of JP-A-2013-043962. Moreover, the alkali-soluble resin mentioned above can also be used as a dispersing agent.
  • Dispersants are also available as commercial products, and specific examples thereof include Disperbyk-111 (manufactured by BYK Chemie) and Solsperse 76500 (manufactured by Nippon Lubrizol Co., Ltd.). Dispersants described in paragraphs 0041 to 0130 of JP-A-2014-130338 can also be used, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • the resin content is preferably 1 to 50% by mass based on the total solid content of the curable composition.
  • the lower limit is preferably 5% by mass or more, more preferably 7% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 40% by mass or less, more preferably 30% by mass or less.
  • the content of the alkali-soluble resin is preferably 1 to 50% by mass based on the total solid content of the curable composition.
  • the lower limit is preferably 5% by mass or more, more preferably 7% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 40% by mass or less, more preferably 30% by mass or less.
  • the content of the alkali-soluble resin in the resin contained in the curable composition is preferably 50 to 100% by mass, more preferably 75 to 100% by mass, and 90 to 100% by mass. is more preferred.
  • the content of the resin as a dispersant is preferably 0.1 to 40% by mass based on the total solid content of the curable composition.
  • the upper limit is preferably 20% by mass or less, more preferably 10% by mass or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 0.5% by mass or more, more preferably 1% by mass or more.
  • the curable composition of the present invention may contain only one type of resin, or may contain two or more types. When two or more kinds are included, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is within the above range.
  • the composition includes, as a resin other than the resins described above, for example, a polymerized product (resin) polymerized without being incorporated into the polymer of the coating layer in the coating layer forming step described in the manufacturing method of the modified inorganic particles. may contain.
  • the polymerization product is the same as the polymer described as the polymer contained in the coating layer of the modified inorganic particles, except that it is not incorporated as the polymer in the coating layer.
  • the content of the polymerization product in the composition is preferably 0 to 20% by mass, more preferably 0 to 10% by mass, and still more preferably 0 to 5% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition.
  • the composition of the invention may contain a polymerization initiator.
  • a polymerization initiator for example, a known polymerization initiator can be used.
  • examples of polymerization initiators include photopolymerization initiators and thermal polymerization initiators, and photopolymerization initiators are preferred.
  • the content of the polymerization initiator is preferably 0.5 to 20% by mass, more preferably 1.0 to 10% by mass, even more preferably 1.5 to 8% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition.
  • a polymerization initiator may be used individually by 1 type, or may use 2 or more types together. When two or more polymerization initiators are used in combination, the total content is preferably within the above range.
  • thermal polymerization initiators examples include 2,2′-azobisisobutyronitrile (AIBN), 3-carboxypropionitrile, azobismalenonitrile, and dimethyl-(2,2′)-azobis(2 -methyl propionate) [V-601], and organic peroxides such as benzoyl peroxide, lauroyl peroxide, and potassium persulfate.
  • thermal polymerization initiators include polymerization initiators described in Kiyomi Kato, "Ultraviolet Curing System” (published by Sogo Gijutsu Center Co., Ltd.: 1989), pp. 65-148.
  • the photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited and can be appropriately selected from known photopolymerization initiators. For example, compounds having photosensitivity to light in the ultraviolet range to the visible range are preferred.
  • the photopolymerization initiator is preferably a photoradical polymerization initiator.
  • photopolymerization initiators include halogenated hydrocarbon derivatives (e.g., compounds having a triazine skeleton, compounds having an oxadiazole skeleton, etc.), acylphosphine compounds, hexaarylbiimidazoles, oxime compounds, organic peroxides, thio compounds. , ketone compounds, aromatic onium salts, ⁇ -hydroxyketone compounds, and ⁇ -aminoketone compounds.
  • halogenated hydrocarbon derivatives e.g., compounds having a triazine skeleton, compounds having an oxadiazole skeleton, etc.
  • acylphosphine compounds e.g., acylphosphine compounds, hexaarylbiimidazoles, oxime compounds, organic peroxides, thio compounds.
  • ketone compounds aromatic onium salts
  • ⁇ -hydroxyketone compounds ⁇ -aminoketone compounds.
  • photopolymerization initiators include trihalomethyltriazine compounds, benzyldimethylketal compounds, ⁇ -hydroxyketone compounds, ⁇ -aminoketone compounds, acylphosphine compounds, phosphine oxide compounds, metallocene compounds, oxime compounds, and triarylimidazoles.
  • oxime compounds dimers, onium compounds, benzothiazole compounds, benzophenone compounds, acetophenone compounds, cyclopentadiene-benzene-iron complexes, halomethyloxadiazole compounds, or 3-aryl-substituted coumarin compounds, oxime compounds, ⁇ -hydroxy A compound selected from a ketone compound, an ⁇ -aminoketone compound, and an acylphosphine compound is more preferred, and an oxime compound is even more preferred.
  • the photopolymerization initiator include compounds described in paragraphs [0065] to [0111] of JP-A-2014-130173 and Japanese Patent No. 6301489, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • ⁇ -hydroxyketone compounds include Omnirad 184, Omnirad 1173, Omnirad 2959, Omnirad 127 (manufactured by IGM Resins BV) and the like (former BASF, Irgacure 184, Irgacure 1173, Irgacure 2959, Irgacure 2959, Irgacure in that order).
  • Examples of commercially available ⁇ -aminoketone compounds include Omnirad 907, Omnirad 369, Omnirad 369E, and Omnirad 379EG (manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), etc. ).
  • acylphosphine compounds include Omnirad 819 and Omnirad TPO (manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.) and the like (former BASF, Irgacure 819 and Irgacure TPO in this order).
  • Examples of oxime compounds include compounds described in JP-A-2001-233842, compounds described in JP-A-2000-080068, compounds described in JP-A-2006-342166, J. Am. C. S. Compounds described in Perkin II (1979, pp.1653-1660); C. S. Compounds described in Perkin II (1979, pp.156-162), compounds described in Journal of Photopolymer Science and Technology (1995, pp.202-232), compounds described in JP-A-2000-066385, Compounds described in JP-A-2000-080068, compounds described in JP-A-2004-534797, compounds described in JP-A-2006-342166, compounds described in JP-A-2017-019766, Patent No.
  • oxime compounds include 3-benzoyloxyiminobutane-2-one, 3-acetoxyiminobutane-2-one, 3-propionyloxyiminobutane-2-one, 2-acetoxyiminopentane-3-one, 2-acetoxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 2-benzoyloxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 3-(4-toluenesulfonyloxy)iminobutan-2-one, and 2-ethoxycarbonyloxy and imino-1-phenylpropan-1-one.
  • IRGACURE-OXE01 IRGACURE-OXE02, IRGACURE-OXE03, IRGACURE-OXE04 (manufactured by BASF), TR-PBG-304 (manufactured by Changzhou Yuan Electronics New Materials Co., Ltd.), and Adeka Optomer N-1919.
  • ADEKA Corporation photopolymerization initiator 2 described in JP-A-2012-014052.
  • the oxime compound it is also preferable to use a compound having no coloring property and a compound having high transparency and resistance to discoloration.
  • Commercially available products include ADEKA Arkles NCI-730, NCI-831 and NCI-930 (manufactured by ADEKA Corporation).
  • an oxime compound having a fluorene ring can also be used as a photopolymerization initiator.
  • Specific examples of oxime compounds having a fluorene ring include compounds described in JP-A-2014-137466.
  • an oxime compound having a skeleton in which at least one benzene ring of a carbazole ring is a naphthalene ring can be used.
  • Specific examples of such oxime compounds include compounds described in WO2013/083505.
  • an oxime compound having a fluorine atom can also be used as a photopolymerization initiator.
  • Specific examples of the oxime compound having a fluorine atom include compounds described in JP-A-2010-262028, compounds 24, 36 to 40 described in JP-A-2014-500852, and JP-A-2013-164471. and the compound (C-3) of
  • an oxime compound having a nitro group can be used as a photopolymerization initiator.
  • the oxime compound having a nitro group is also preferably a dimer.
  • Specific examples of the oxime compound having a nitro group include paragraphs [0031] to [0047] of JP-A-2013-114249, paragraphs [0008]-[0012] and [0070]- of JP-A-2014-137466. [0079], compounds described in paragraphs [0007] to [0025] of Japanese Patent No. 4223071, and ADEKA Arkles NCI-831 (manufactured by ADEKA Corporation).
  • An oxime compound having a benzofuran skeleton can also be used as the photopolymerization initiator in the present invention.
  • Specific examples include OE-01 to OE-75 described in WO 2015/036910.
  • oxime compounds preferably used in the present invention are shown below, but the present invention is not limited to these.
  • the oxime compound is preferably a compound having a maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 350 to 500 nm, more preferably a compound having a maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 360 to 480 nm.
  • the molar extinction coefficient of the oxime compound at a wavelength of 365 nm or a wavelength of 405 nm is preferably high from the viewpoint of sensitivity, more preferably 1000 to 300000, further preferably 2000 to 300000, even more preferably 5000 to 200000. It is particularly preferred to have
  • the molar extinction coefficient of a compound can be measured using known methods. For example, it is preferably measured at a concentration of 0.01 g/L using an ethyl acetate solvent with a spectrophotometer (Cary-5 spectrophotometer manufactured by Varian).
  • a bifunctional or trifunctional or higher functional radical photopolymerization initiator may be used as the photopolymerization initiator.
  • a radical photopolymerization initiator two or more radicals are generated from one molecule of the radical photopolymerization initiator, so good sensitivity can be obtained.
  • the crystallinity is lowered, the solubility in a solvent or the like is improved, the precipitation becomes difficult over time, and the stability over time of the composition can be improved.
  • Specific examples of bifunctional or trifunctional or higher photoradical polymerization initiators include, for example, Japanese Patent Publication No. 2010-527339, Japanese Patent Publication No. 2011-524436, International Publication No.
  • the photopolymerization initiator preferably contains an oxime compound and an ⁇ -aminoketone compound. By using both together, the developability is improved, and it is easy to form a pattern excellent in rectangularity.
  • the ⁇ -aminoketone compound is preferably 50 to 600 parts by mass, more preferably 150 to 400 parts by mass, per 100 parts by mass of the oxime compound.
  • the content of the photopolymerization initiator is preferably 0.1 to 40% by mass, more preferably 0.5 to 30% by mass, still more preferably 1 to 20% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition.
  • the composition may contain only one type of photopolymerization initiator, or may contain two or more types. When two or more kinds are included, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is within the above range.
  • the composition may contain a polymerization inhibitor.
  • a polymerization inhibitor for example, a known polymerization inhibitor can be used.
  • polymerization inhibitors include phenol-based polymerization inhibitors (e.g., p-methoxyphenol, 2,5-di-tert-butyl-4-methylphenol, 2,6-di-tert-butyl-4-methylphenol, 4,4'-thiobis(3-methyl-6-t-butylphenol), 2,2'-methylenebis(4-methyl-6-t-butylphenol), 4-methoxynaphthol, etc.); hydroquinone-based polymerization inhibitors (e.g.
  • hydroquinone, 2,6-di-tert-butyl hydroquinone, etc. hydroquinone, 2,6-di-tert-butyl hydroquinone, etc.); quinone polymerization inhibitors (e.g., benzoquinone, etc.); free radical polymerization inhibitors (e.g., 2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine 1-oxyl free radical, 4-hydroxy-2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine 1-oxyl free radical, etc.); nitrobenzene-based polymerization inhibitors (e.g., nitrobenzene, 4-nitrotoluene, etc.); and phenothiazine-based polymerization inhibitors (eg, phenothiazine, 2-methoxyphenothiazine, etc.); Among them, a phenol-based polymerization inhibitor or a free-radical polymerization inhibitor is preferable because the effects of the present invention are more excellent.
  • quinone polymerization inhibitors e
  • the content of the polymerization inhibitor is preferably 0.0001 to 0.5 mass%, more preferably 0.001 to 0.2 mass%, and 0.008 to 0.05, based on the total solid content of the composition. % by mass is more preferred.
  • a polymerization inhibitor may be used individually by 1 type, or may use 2 or more types together. When two or more polymerization inhibitors are used in combination, the total content is preferably within the above range.
  • the ratio of the content of the polymerization inhibitor to the content of the polymerizable compound in the composition is 0.00005 to 0.02. is preferred, and 0.0001 to 0.005 is more preferred.
  • the composition of the invention preferably contains a solvent.
  • An organic solvent is preferable as the solvent.
  • Organic solvents include ester-based solvents, ketone-based solvents, alcohol-based solvents, amide-based solvents, ether-based solvents, and hydrocarbon-based solvents.
  • Ester-based solvents substituted with cyclic alkyl groups and ketone-based solvents substituted with cyclic alkyl groups can also be preferably used.
  • organic solvents include polyethylene glycol monomethyl ether, dichloromethane, methyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl lactate, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, butyl acetate, methyl 3-methoxypropionate, 2 - heptanone, cyclohexanone, cyclohexyl acetate, cyclopentanone, ethyl carbitol acetate, butyl carbitol acetate, propylene glycol monomethyl ether and propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate.
  • aromatic hydrocarbons (benzene, toluene, xylene, ethylbenzene, etc.) as organic solvents may be reduced for environmental reasons (for example, 50 mass ppm (parts per million) or less, 10 mass ppm or less, or 1 mass ppm or less).
  • an organic solvent with a low metal content it is preferable to use an organic solvent with a low metal content, and the metal content of the organic solvent is preferably, for example, 10 mass ppb (parts per billion) or less. If necessary, an organic solvent with a ppt (parts per trillion) mass level may be used, and such an organic solvent is provided by, for example, Toyo Gosei Co., Ltd. (Chemical Daily, November 13, 2015).
  • Examples of methods for removing impurities such as metals from organic solvents include distillation (molecular distillation, thin film distillation, etc.) and filtration using a filter.
  • the filter pore size of the filter used for filtration is preferably 10 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 5 ⁇ m or less, and even more preferably 3 ⁇ m or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 1 nm or more.
  • the material of the filter is preferably polytetrafluoroethylene, polyethylene or nylon.
  • the organic solvent may contain isomers (compounds with the same number of atoms but different structures). Moreover, only one isomer may be contained, or a plurality of isomers may be contained.
  • the content of peroxide in the organic solvent is preferably 0.8 mmol/L or less, and more preferably substantially free of peroxide.
  • the content of the solvent is preferably 10-97% by mass with respect to the total amount of the composition.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 30% by mass or more, still more preferably 40% by mass or more, particularly preferably 50% by mass or more, even more preferably 60% by mass or more, and most preferably 70% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 96% by mass or less, and even more preferably 95% by mass or less.
  • the composition may contain only one type of solvent, or may contain two or more types. When two or more kinds are included, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is within the above range.
  • composition may further contain other optional ingredients than those mentioned above.
  • optional ingredients include particulate components other than those mentioned above, ultraviolet absorbers, silane coupling agents, surfactants, sensitizers, co-sensitizers, cross-linking agents, curing accelerators, thermosetting accelerators, plasticizers, diluents, and oil sensitizers, etc., and adhesion promoters to the substrate surface and other aids (e.g., conductive particles, fillers, antifoaming agents, flame retardants, leveling agents, release accelerators, Antioxidants, perfumes, surface tension modifiers, chain transfer agents, etc.) may be added as necessary.
  • aids e.g., conductive particles, fillers, antifoaming agents, flame retardants, leveling agents, release accelerators, Antioxidants, perfumes, surface tension modifiers, chain transfer agents, etc.
  • composition of the present invention contains modified inorganic particles and a polymerizable compound, and the modified inorganic particles contain inorganic particles and a coating layer covering part or all of the inorganic particles. and the coating layer contains at least one selected from the group consisting of a carboxylic acid group, a sulfonic acid group, a phosphoric acid group, a nitric acid group, a phenolic hydroxyl group, and an acid anhydride group, and a hydrophobic group. Things are mentioned.
  • Each component contained in the above composition is synonymous with each component described above, and the preferred ranges are also the same.
  • the composition is preferably prepared by preparing a dispersion liquid of the modified inorganic particles and further mixing the obtained composition with other components to form a composition.
  • the composition contains a coloring material
  • the composition is preferably prepared by mixing a coloring material, a resin and a solvent.
  • the composition further contains a polymerization inhibitor.
  • the above composition can be prepared by mixing each of the above components by a known mixing method (for example, a mixing method using a stirrer, homogenizer, high-pressure emulsifier, wet pulverizer, or wet disperser).
  • a mixing method using a stirrer, homogenizer, high-pressure emulsifier, wet pulverizer, or wet disperser.
  • each component When preparing the composition, each component may be blended all at once, or each component may be dissolved or dispersed in a solvent and then blended sequentially. In addition, there are no particular restrictions on the order of addition and working conditions when blending.
  • the composition is preferably filtered with a filter for purposes such as removing foreign substances and reducing defects.
  • a filter for example, any filter that has been used for filtering purposes can be used without particular limitation.
  • filters made of fluororesins such as PTFE (polytetrafluoroethylene), polyamide resins such as nylon, and polyolefin resins (including high density and ultrahigh molecular weight) such as polyethylene and polypropylene (PP).
  • PTFE polytetrafluoroethylene
  • nylon polyamide resins
  • polyolefin resins including high density and ultrahigh molecular weight
  • PP polypropylene
  • nylon is preferred.
  • the pore size of the filter is preferably 0.1-7.0 ⁇ m, more preferably 0.2-2.5 ⁇ m, even more preferably 0.2-1.5 ⁇ m, and particularly preferably 0.3-0.7 ⁇ m. Within this range, it is possible to reliably remove fine foreign matters such as impurities and aggregates contained in the pigment while suppressing filter clogging of the pigment (including black pigment).
  • different filters may be combined. At that time, the filtering by the first filter may be performed only once, or may be performed twice or more. When filtering is performed twice or more by combining different filters, it is preferable that the pore size of the second and subsequent filtering is the same as or larger than the pore size of the first filtering.
  • the first filters having different pore diameters within the range described above may be combined.
  • the pore size here can refer to the nominal value of the filter manufacturer.
  • Commercially available filters can be selected from various filters provided by Nihon Pall Co., Ltd., Advantech Toyo Co., Ltd., Nihon Entegris Co., Ltd. (formerly Nihon Microlith Co., Ltd.), and Kitz Micro Filter Co., Ltd., for example.
  • the second filter a filter made of the same material as the first filter described above can be used.
  • the pore size of the second filter is preferably 0.2-10.0 ⁇ m, more preferably 0.2-7.0 ⁇ m, even more preferably 0.3-6.0 ⁇ m.
  • the composition preferably does not contain impurities such as metals, halogen-containing metal salts, acids and alkalis.
  • the content of impurities contained in these materials is preferably 1 mass ppm or less, more preferably 1 mass ppb or less, still more preferably 100 mass ppt or less, and particularly preferably 10 mass ppt or less. below the detection limit of the instrument) is most preferred.
  • the above impurities can be measured by an inductively coupled plasma mass spectrometer (manufactured by Yokogawa Analytical Systems, Agilent 7500cs).
  • a composition layer formed using the composition of the present invention is cured to obtain a cured film (including a patterned cured film).
  • a method for producing a cured film is not particularly limited, but preferably includes the following steps. - Composition layer formation process - exposure process - development process Hereinafter, each process is demonstrated.
  • composition layer forming step In the composition layer forming step, prior to exposure, the composition is applied onto a support or the like to form a composition layer (composition layer).
  • a support for example, a substrate for a solid-state imaging device provided with an imaging device (light receiving device) such as CCD (Charge Coupled Device) or CMOS (Complementary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor) on a substrate (eg, silicon substrate) is used.
  • an undercoat layer may be provided on the support for improving adhesion to the upper layer, preventing diffusion of substances, flattening the surface of the substrate, and the like.
  • composition layer coated on the support for example, various coating methods such as a slit coating method, an inkjet method, a spin coating method, a cast coating method, a roll coating method, and a screen printing method can be applied.
  • the film thickness of the composition layer is preferably 0.1 to 10 ⁇ m, more preferably 0.2 to 5 ⁇ m, even more preferably 0.2 to 3 ⁇ m. Drying (pre-baking) of the composition layer coated on the support can be carried out, for example, by using a hot plate, an oven or the like at a temperature of 50 to 140° C. for 10 to 300 seconds.
  • the composition layer formed in the composition layer forming step is exposed to actinic rays or radiation, and the irradiated composition layer is cured.
  • light irradiation is preferably performed through a photomask having patterned openings.
  • Exposure is preferably carried out by irradiation with radiation. Radiation that can be used for exposure is preferably ultraviolet such as g-line, h-line or i-line, and the light source is preferably a high-pressure mercury lamp.
  • the irradiation intensity is preferably 5-1500 mJ/cm 2 , more preferably 10-1000 mJ/cm 2 .
  • the composition layer may be heated in the exposure step.
  • the heating temperature is not particularly limited, it is preferably 80 to 250°C.
  • the heating time is preferably 30 to 300 seconds.
  • the post-heating step described below may also be performed. In other words, when the composition layer is heated in the exposure step, the method for producing a cured film does not need to include a post-heating step.
  • the developing step is a step of developing the exposed composition layer to form a cured film.
  • the composition layer in the portion not irradiated with light in the exposure step is eluted, leaving only the photocured portion to obtain a patterned cured film.
  • the type of developer used in the development process is not particularly limited, but an alkaline developer that does not cause damage to the underlying imaging device, circuits, and the like is desirable.
  • the developing temperature is, for example, 20 to 30.degree.
  • the development time is, for example, 20 to 90 seconds. In order to remove the residue better, in recent years, it may be carried out for 120 to 180 seconds. Furthermore, in order to further improve the residue removability, the process of shaking off the developer every 60 seconds and then supplying new developer may be repeated several times.
  • the alkaline developer is preferably an alkaline aqueous solution prepared by dissolving an alkaline compound in water to a concentration of 0.001 to 10% by mass (preferably 0.01 to 5% by mass).
  • Alkaline compounds include, for example, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, sodium silicate, sodium metasilicate, aqueous ammonia, ethylamine, diethylamine, dimethylethanolamine, tetramethylammonium hydroxide, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, tetrapropyl ammonium hydroxide, tetrabutylammonium hydroxy, benzyltrimethylammonium hydroxide, choline, pyrrole, piperidine, and 1,8-diazabicyclo[5.4.0]-7-undecene (of which organic alkali is preferred). .).
  • it is generally washed with water after development.
  • Post-bake Heat treatment (post-baking) is preferably performed after the exposure step.
  • a post-bake is a heat treatment after development to complete curing.
  • the heating temperature is preferably 240° C. or lower, more preferably 220° C. or lower. Although there is no lower limit, it is preferably 50° C. or higher, more preferably 100° C. or higher, in consideration of efficient and effective treatment.
  • Post-baking can be performed continuously or batchwise using heating means such as a hot plate, a convection oven (hot air circulation dryer), and a high-frequency heater.
  • the above post-baking is preferably performed in an atmosphere with a low oxygen concentration.
  • the oxygen concentration is preferably 19% by volume or less, more preferably 15% by volume or less, even more preferably 10% by volume or less, particularly preferably 7% by volume or less, and most preferably 3% by volume or less. Although there is no particular lower limit, 10 ppm by volume or more is preferable.
  • Curing may be completed by UV (ultraviolet) irradiation instead of post-baking by heating.
  • the composition described above preferably further contains a UV curing agent.
  • the UV curing agent is preferably a UV curing agent capable of curing at a wavelength shorter than 365 nm, which is the exposure wavelength of the polymerization initiator added for the lithography process by ordinary i-line exposure.
  • Examples of UV curing agents include Ciba Irgacure 2959 (trade name).
  • the composition layer is preferably made of a material that cures at a wavelength of 340 nm or less. Although the lower limit of the wavelength is not particularly limited, it is preferably 220 nm or more.
  • the exposure amount of UV irradiation is preferably 100 to 5000 mJ, more preferably 300 to 4000 mJ, even more preferably 800 to 3500 mJ.
  • This UV curing step is preferably performed after the exposure step in order to perform low-temperature curing more effectively. It is preferable to use an ozoneless mercury lamp as an exposure light source.
  • a cured film formed using the composition of the present invention (particularly, the composition of the present invention containing a black colorant) has excellent light-shielding properties, and the film thickness in the wavelength region of 400 to 1100 nm is 1.5.
  • the optical density (OD) per 5 ⁇ m is preferably 2.5 or more, more preferably 3.0 or more. Although the upper limit is not particularly limited, generally 10 or less is preferable.
  • the above cured film can be preferably used as a light shielding film.
  • the optical density per 1.5 ⁇ m film thickness in the wavelength region of 400 to 1100 nm is 2.5 or more, which means that the optical density per 1.5 ⁇ m film thickness is 2.5 or more in the entire wavelength range of 400 to 1100 nm. is 2.5 or more.
  • a method for measuring the optical density of a cured film first, a cured film is formed on a glass substrate, and a spectrophotometer U-4100 (trade name, manufactured by Hitachi High-Technologies Corporation) integrating sphere type light receiving unit. is used to measure the film thickness at the measurement point, and the optical density per predetermined film thickness is calculated.
  • the thickness of the cured film is, for example, preferably 0.1 to 4.0 ⁇ m, more preferably 1.0 to 2.5 ⁇ m.
  • the cured film may be thinner or thicker than this range depending on the application.
  • the light shielding property may be adjusted by making the film thinner than the above range (for example, 0.1 to 0.5 ⁇ m).
  • the optical density per 1.0 ⁇ m film thickness in the wavelength range of 400 to 1200 nm is preferably 0.1 to 1.5, more preferably 0.2 to 1.0.
  • the reflectance of the cured film is preferably less than 8%, more preferably less than 6%, and even more preferably less than 4%.
  • the lower limit is preferably 0% or more.
  • the reflectance is determined from the reflectance spectrum obtained by using a spectroscope V7200 (trade name) VAR unit manufactured by JASCO Corporation to irradiate light with a wavelength of 400 to 1100 nm at an incident angle of 5°.
  • the reflectance of the cured film is defined as the reflectance of the light having the maximum reflectance in the wavelength range of 400 to 1100 nm.
  • the above cured film can be used for personal computers, tablets, mobile phones, smartphones, portable devices such as digital cameras; OA (Office Automation) devices such as printer multifunction devices and scanners; surveillance cameras, barcode readers, cash Industrial equipment such as automated teller machines (ATMs), high-speed cameras, and equipment with personal authentication functions that use face image authentication or biometric authentication; vehicle-mounted camera equipment; endoscopes, capsules Medical camera equipment such as scopes and catheters; and biosensors, biosensors, military reconnaissance cameras, stereo map cameras, weather and ocean observation cameras, land resource exploration cameras, and space astronomy and deep space. It is suitable for light-shielding members and light-shielding films of optical filters and modules used in space equipment such as target search cameras, etc., as well as anti-reflection members and anti-reflection films.
  • the cured film can also be used for applications such as micro LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) and micro OLEDs (Organic Light Emitting Diodes).
  • the cured film is suitable for optical filters and optical films used in micro LEDs and micro OLEDs, as well as members imparting a light shielding function or an antireflection function.
  • Micro LEDs and micro OLEDs include, for example, examples described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 2015-500562 and Japanese Patent Publication No. 2014-533890.
  • the above cured film is also suitable as an optical and optical film used in quantum dot sensors and quantum dot solid-state imaging devices. Moreover, it is suitable as a member that imparts a light shielding function and an antireflection function. Examples of quantum dot sensors and quantum dot solid-state imaging devices include those described in US Patent Application Publication No. 2012/37789 and International Publication No. 2008/131313.
  • the cured film of the present invention is excellent in light-shielding properties and low reflectivity.
  • a light-shielding film is one of the preferred applications of the cured film of the present invention, and the light-shielding film of the present invention can be produced in the same manner as described above as the method for producing the cured film.
  • the composition can be applied to a substrate to form a composition layer, exposed to light, and developed to produce a light-shielding film.
  • the present invention also includes the invention of optical elements.
  • the optical element of the present invention is an optical element having the cured film (light shielding film).
  • optical elements include optical elements used in optical equipment such as cameras, binoculars, microscopes, and semiconductor exposure apparatuses. Above all, as the optical element, for example, a solid-state imaging element mounted on a camera or the like is preferable.
  • the solid-state imaging device of the present invention is a solid-state imaging device containing the cured film (light-shielding film) of the present invention described above.
  • a cured film for example, a plurality of photodiodes constituting a light receiving area of a solid-state imaging device (CCD image sensor, CMOS image sensor, etc.) and Examples include a form having a light receiving element made of polysilicon or the like and having a cured film on the side of the support on which the light receiving element is formed (for example, a portion other than the light receiving portion and/or the pixels for color adjustment, etc.) or on the opposite side of the formation surface.
  • a solid-state imaging device includes the above solid-state imaging device.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a configuration example of a solid-state imaging device including the solid-state imaging device of the present invention.
  • a solid-state imaging device 100 includes a rectangular solid-state imaging element 101 and a transparent cover glass 103 held above the solid-state imaging element 101 and sealing the solid-state imaging element 101.
  • a lens layer 111 is provided over the cover glass 103 with spacers 104 interposed therebetween.
  • the lens layer 111 is composed of a support 113 and a lens material 112 .
  • the lens layer 111 may have a structure in which the support 113 and the lens material 112 are integrally molded.
  • light diffusion weakens the light-condensing effect of the lens material 112 , thereby reducing the amount of light reaching the imaging unit 102 .
  • noise is generated due to stray light. Therefore, the peripheral region of the lens layer 111 is provided with a light shielding film 114 to shield the light.
  • the cured film of the present invention can also be used as the light shielding film 114 described above.
  • the solid-state imaging device 101 photoelectrically converts an optical image formed by the imaging unit 102 serving as its light-receiving surface, and outputs it as an image signal.
  • This solid-state imaging device 101 has a laminated substrate 105 in which two substrates are laminated.
  • the laminated board 105 is composed of a rectangular chip board 106 and a circuit board 107 of the same size.
  • the substrate material used as the chip substrate 106 for example, known materials can be used.
  • An imaging unit 102 is provided in the central portion of the surface of the chip substrate 106 .
  • a light shielding film 115 is provided in the peripheral area of the imaging unit 102 .
  • the shielding film 115 shields the stray light incident on the peripheral region, thereby preventing generation of dark current (noise) from circuits in the peripheral region. It is preferable to use the cured film of the present invention as the light shielding film 115 .
  • a plurality of electrode pads 108 are provided on the surface edge of the chip substrate 106 .
  • the electrode pads 108 are electrically connected to the imaging section 102 via signal lines (not shown) (bonding wires are also possible) provided on the surface of the chip substrate 106 .
  • External connection terminals 109 are provided on the rear surface of the circuit board 107 at positions substantially below the electrode pads 108 .
  • Each external connection terminal 109 is connected to an electrode pad 108 via a penetrating electrode 110 vertically penetrating through the laminated substrate 105 . Further, each external connection terminal 109 is connected to a control circuit for controlling driving of the solid-state imaging device 101 and an image processing circuit for performing image processing on an imaging signal output from the solid-state imaging device 101 via wiring (not shown). It is
  • FIG. 2 A schematic cross-sectional view of the imaging unit 102 is shown in FIG.
  • the imaging unit 102 is composed of units provided on a substrate 204, such as a light receiving element 201, a color filter 202, a microlens 203, and the like.
  • the color filter 202 has blue pixels 205b, red pixels 205r, green pixels 205g, and a black matrix 205bm.
  • the cured film of the present invention may be used as the black matrix 205bm.
  • a p-well layer 206 is formed on the surface layer of the substrate 204 .
  • light receiving elements 201 which are made of an n-type layer and generate and store signal charges by photoelectric conversion are arranged in a square lattice.
  • a vertical transfer path 208 made of an n-type layer is formed on one side of the light receiving element 201 via a readout gate portion 207 on the surface layer of the p-well layer 206 .
  • a vertical transfer path 208 belonging to an adjacent pixel is formed on the other side of the light receiving element 201 via an element isolation region 209 made of a p-type layer.
  • the read gate portion 207 is a channel region for reading signal charges accumulated in the light receiving element 201 to the vertical transfer path 208 .
  • a gate insulating film 210 made of an ONO (Oxide-Nitride-Oxide) film is formed on the surface of the substrate 204 .
  • a vertical transfer electrode 211 made of polysilicon or amorphous silicon is formed on the gate insulating film 210 so as to cover the vertical transfer path 208 , the readout gate portion 207 and the element isolation region 209 .
  • the vertical transfer electrode 211 functions as a drive electrode that drives the vertical transfer path 208 to transfer charges, and a readout electrode that drives the readout gate section 207 to read out signal charges.
  • the signal charges are sequentially transferred from the vertical transfer path 208 to a horizontal transfer path (not shown) and an output section (floating diffusion amplifier), and then output as a voltage signal.
  • a light shielding film 212 is formed on the vertical transfer electrode 211 so as to cover the surface thereof.
  • the light shielding film 212 has an opening directly above the light receiving element 201 and shields the other region from light.
  • the cured film of the present invention may be used as the light shielding film 212 .
  • On the light shielding film 212 there is provided a transparent intermediate layer consisting of an insulating film 213 made of BPSG (borophospho silicate glass), an insulating film (passivation film) 214 made of P—SiN, and a flattening film 215 made of a transparent resin or the like. ing.
  • a color filter 202 is formed on the intermediate layer.
  • the image display device of the present invention comprises the cured film of the present invention.
  • Examples of the mode in which the image display device has a cured film include a mode in which the cured film is contained in a black matrix and a color filter containing such a black matrix is used in the image display device.
  • a black matrix and a color filter containing the black matrix will be described, and further, a liquid crystal display containing such a color filter will be described as a specific example of the image display device.
  • the cured film of the present invention is also preferably contained in a black matrix.
  • a black matrix may be contained in an image display device such as a color filter, a solid-state imaging device, and a liquid crystal display device.
  • As the black matrix for example, those already described above; a black edge provided at the periphery of an image display device such as a liquid crystal display device; a grid pattern between red, blue, and green pixels, and/or , striped black portions; dot-shaped and/or linear black patterns for TFT (thin film transistor) light shielding;
  • TFT thin film transistor
  • the black matrix has a high light shielding property (optical density OD is 3 or more).
  • the black matrix As a method for producing the black matrix, for example, it can be produced by the same method as the method for producing the cured film. Specifically, the composition can be applied to a substrate to form a composition layer, exposed to light, and developed to produce a patterned cured film (black matrix). The thickness of the cured film used as the black matrix is preferably 0.1 to 4.0 ⁇ m.
  • the substrate material preferably has a transmittance of 80% or more for visible light (wavelength 400 to 800 nm).
  • examples of such materials include glasses such as soda lime glass, alkali-free glass, quartz glass, and borosilicate glass; plastics such as polyester resins and polyolefin resins; And, from the viewpoint of heat resistance, alkali-free glass, quartz glass, or the like is preferable.
  • the cured film of the invention is also preferably contained in a color filter.
  • a color filter including a substrate and the black matrix. That is, a color filter having red, green, and blue colored pixels formed in the openings of the black matrix formed on the substrate can be exemplified.
  • a color filter containing a black matrix can be produced, for example, by the following method.
  • a composition layer of a composition containing a pigment corresponding to each colored pixel of a color filter is formed in the openings of a patterned black matrix formed on a substrate.
  • a composition for each color for example, a known composition can be used, but in the composition described in this specification, a composition in which the black colorant is replaced with a colorant corresponding to each pixel is used. is preferred.
  • the composition layer is exposed through a photomask having a pattern corresponding to the openings of the black matrix.
  • the substrate can be baked to form colored pixels in the openings of the black matrix.
  • the cured film of the present invention is contained in a liquid crystal display device.
  • a form in which the liquid crystal display device contains a cured film for example, a form in which a color filter containing the black matrix (cured film) already described is included.
  • a liquid crystal display device includes, for example, a mode comprising a pair of substrates arranged facing each other and a liquid crystal compound sealed between the substrates.
  • the substrate for example, the substrate for the black matrix has already been described.
  • liquid crystal display device for example, from the user side, polarizing plate/substrate/color filter/transparent electrode layer/alignment film/liquid crystal layer/alignment film/transparent electrode layer/TFT (Thin Film Transistor) A laminate containing an element/substrate/polarizing plate/backlight unit in this order is mentioned.
  • liquid crystal display device for example, “Electronic display device (written by Akio Sasaki, published by Industrial Research Institute Co., Ltd. in 1990)", “Display device (written by Junsho Ibuki, published by Sangyo Tosho Co., Ltd. in 1989)", etc.
  • the disclosed liquid crystal display device can be mentioned.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a configuration example of an infrared sensor provided with the cured film of the present invention.
  • An infrared sensor 300 shown in FIG. 3 includes a solid-state imaging device 310 .
  • the imaging area provided on the solid-state imaging device 310 is configured by combining an infrared absorption filter 311 and a color filter 312 according to the embodiment of the present invention.
  • the infrared absorption filter 311 transmits light in the visible region (for example, light with a wavelength of 400 to 700 nm), and transmits light in the infrared region (for example, light with a wavelength of 800 to 1300 nm, preferably light with a wavelength of 900 to 1200 nm). It is preferably a film that shields light having a wavelength of 900 to 1000 nm), and a cured film containing an infrared absorbing agent (the form of the infrared absorbing agent is as described above) as a coloring agent can be used.
  • the color filter 312 is a color filter formed with pixels that transmit and absorb light of specific wavelengths in the visible light region.
  • pixels of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) are formed.
  • a color filter or the like is used, and its form is as already explained.
  • a resin film 314 (for example, a transparent resin film or the like) that can transmit light having a wavelength that has passed through the infrared transmission filter 313 is arranged.
  • the infrared transmission filter 313 is a filter that has a visible light shielding property and transmits infrared rays of a specific wavelength, and is a colorant that absorbs light in the visible light region (for example, a perylene compound and/or a bisbenzoate Furanone compounds, etc.) and infrared absorbers (eg, pyrrolopyrrole compounds, phthalocyanine compounds, naphthalocyanine compounds, polymethine compounds, etc.) can be used in the cured film of the present invention.
  • the infrared transmission filter 313 preferably blocks light with a wavelength of 400 to 830 nm and transmits light with a wavelength of 900 to 1300 nm, for example.
  • a microlens 315 is arranged on the incident light h ⁇ side of the color filter 312 and the infrared transmission filter 313 .
  • a planarization film 316 is formed to cover the microlenses 315 .
  • the resin film 314 is arranged in the form shown in FIG. That is, the infrared transmission filter 313 may be formed on the solid-state imaging device 310 .
  • the film thickness of the color filter 312 and the film thickness of the infrared transmission filter 313 are the same, but the film thicknesses of both may be different.
  • the color filter 312 is provided closer to the incident light hv than the infrared absorption filter 311.
  • the infrared absorption filter 311 may be provided on the incident light h ⁇ side of the color filter 312 .
  • the infrared absorption filter 311 and the color filter 312 are laminated adjacent to each other. good.
  • the cured film of the present invention can be used as a light shielding film such as the edge and / or side of the surface of the infrared absorption filter 311, and if it is used for the inner wall of the infrared sensor device, it can be used for internal reflection and / or meaningless light to the light receiving part. can be prevented from entering, and the sensitivity can be improved.
  • this infrared sensor since image information can be captured at the same time, it is possible to perform motion sensing, etc., by recognizing an object whose motion is to be detected. In addition, since distance information can be obtained with this infrared sensor, it is possible to take an image including 3D information. Furthermore, this infrared sensor can also be used as a biometric sensor.
  • the solid-state imaging device includes a lens optical system, a solid-state imaging device, an infrared light emitting diode, and the like.
  • paragraphs 0032 to 0036 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-233983 can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated into the specification of the present application.
  • the cured film of the present invention is contained as a light-shielding film in a headlight unit of a vehicle lighting device such as an automobile.
  • the cured film of the present invention contained in the headlight unit as a light shielding film is preferably formed in a pattern so as to block at least part of the light emitted from the light source.
  • FIGS. 4 and 5 A headlight unit according to the above embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5.
  • FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing a configuration example of a headlight unit
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic perspective view showing a configuration example of a light blocking portion of the headlight unit. As shown in FIG.
  • the headlight unit 10 has a light source 12, a light shielding section 14, and a lens 16, and the light source 12, the light shielding section 14, and the lens 16 are arranged in this order.
  • the light shielding part 14 has a base 20 and a light shielding film 22 as shown in FIG.
  • the light shielding film 22 is formed with a patterned opening 23 for irradiating the light emitted from the light source 12 in a specific shape.
  • the light distribution pattern irradiated from the lens 16 is determined by the shape of the opening 23 of the light shielding film 22 .
  • the lens 16 projects the light L from the light source 12 that has passed through the light blocking portion 14 . If a specific light distribution pattern can be emitted from the light source 12, the lens 16 is not necessarily required.
  • the lens 16 is appropriately determined according to the irradiation distance of the light L and the irradiation range.
  • the structure of the substrate 20 is not particularly limited as long as it can hold the light shielding film 22. However, it is preferable that the substrate 20 is not deformed by the heat of the light source 12. For example, it is made of glass. be. Although an example of the light distribution pattern is shown in FIG. 5, it is not limited to this. Also, the light source 12 is not limited to one, and may be arranged in a row or in a matrix, for example. When a plurality of light sources are provided, for example, one light shielding section 14 may be provided for one light source 12 . In this case, the light shielding films 22 of the plurality of light shielding portions 14 may all have the same pattern or different patterns.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the light distribution pattern by the headlight unit
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing another example of the light distribution pattern by the headlight unit.
  • the light distribution pattern 30 shown in FIG. 6 and the light distribution pattern 32 shown in FIG. 7 both indicate areas irradiated with light.
  • a region 31 shown in FIG. 6 and a region 31 shown in FIG. 7 both indicate irradiation regions irradiated by the light source 12 (see FIG. 4) when the light shielding film 22 is not provided. Due to the pattern of the light shielding film 22, the intensity of the light sharply drops at the edge 30a, as in the light distribution pattern 30 shown in FIG. 6, for example.
  • the light distribution pattern 30 shown in FIG. 6 is, for example, a pattern that does not illuminate an oncoming vehicle in left-hand traffic. Also, like a light distribution pattern 32 shown in FIG. 7, a pattern obtained by cutting out a part of the light distribution pattern 30 shown in FIG. 6 may be used. In this case as well, the intensity of the light sharply drops at the edge 32a, as in the light distribution pattern 30 shown in FIG. Furthermore, the intensity of the light is sharply reduced at the notch 33 as well. For this reason, in the area corresponding to the notch 33, for example, it is possible to display a mark indicating the state of the road, such as a curved road, an upward slope, a downward slope, or the like. As a result, safety during night driving can be improved.
  • the light shielding portion 14 is not limited to being fixed between the light source 12 and the lens 16, and may be placed between the light source 12 and the lens 16 by a drive mechanism (not shown) as necessary. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a specific light distribution pattern is obtained by allowing the light to enter. Further, the light shielding portion 14 may constitute a shade member capable of shielding the light from the light source 12 . In this case, a driving mechanism (not shown) may be used to enter between the light source 12 and the lens 16 as necessary to obtain a specific light distribution pattern.
  • the present invention will be described in more detail below based on examples.
  • the materials, amounts used, proportions, processing details, processing procedures, etc. shown in the following examples can be changed as appropriate without departing from the gist of the present invention. Therefore, the scope of the present invention should not be construed as limited by the examples shown below.
  • the particle diameter of the inorganic particles was measured by the method using the TEM described above.
  • an inorganic particle dispersion liquid PS-1 (hollow silica surface-modified with a methacrylic group) having a solid content of 20% by mass was obtained. dispersion) was obtained.
  • the inorganic particle dispersion PS-1 (30.0 g) obtained above, X-22-2404 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., one end methacrylic modified silicone oil, 1.8 g), Itaconic anhydride (0.4 g) and PGMEA (propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, 28.2 g) were added, and the contents of the flask were heated to 80° C. under a nitrogen atmosphere.
  • a polymerization initiator V-601 (manufactured by FUJIFILM Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd., 0.01 g) was added to the resulting flask and stirred for 3 hours.
  • V-601 (0.02 g) was added to the flask and stirred for 2 hours. After that, the contents of the flask were subjected to microfiltration, and 1-methoxy-2-propanol was added to the obtained filter cake so that the solid content was 20% by mass, thereby obtaining S-1 (solid content: 20% by mass). , 31.5 g).
  • S-2 (solid content: 20% by mass) was obtained in the same manner as S-1, except that itaconic anhydride was changed to methacrylic acid in the above [Production of S-1].
  • S-3 (solid content: 20% by mass) was obtained in the same manner as S-1, except that vinylphenol was used instead of itaconic anhydride in the above [Production of S-1].
  • ⁇ resin ⁇ ⁇ B-1 the following resin (weight average molecular weight 11,000, acid value 32 mgKOH / g (where Me represents a methyl group))
  • ⁇ B-4 the following resin (weight average molecular weight 21,000, acid value 36 mgKOH / g)
  • ⁇ B-6 Solsperse 36000 (manufactured by Lubrizol)
  • ⁇ B-7 B-10 described in paragraph [0352] of WO 2020/203080
  • ⁇ B-8 SOLSPERSE20000 (manufactured by Lubrizol, amine value 32 mgKOH / g)
  • ⁇ X-2 the following compound (wherein Ph represents a phenyl group and Me represents a methyl group.)
  • compositions of Examples and Comparative Examples were prepared by using the following raw materials and mixing them according to the formulations shown in Tables 2 to 7.
  • ⁇ M-1 NK ester A-TMMT (tetrafunctional acrylate, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.)
  • ⁇ M-2 Aronix TO-2349 (acid-modified polyfunctional acrylate, manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.)
  • ⁇ M-3 Ogsol EA-0300 (fluorene-containing acrylate, manufactured by Osaka Gas Chemicals Co., Ltd.)
  • ⁇ M-6 KBM-5103 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Silicone Co., Ltd.)
  • ⁇ W-2 the following surfactant (weight average molecular weight 3000, where n represents an integer of 1 or more.)
  • ⁇ W-3 KF6000 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Silicone Co., Ltd.)
  • W-4 FZ-2122 (manufactured by Dow Toray Chemical Co., Ltd.)
  • EHPE 3150 compound containing an epoxy group, manufactured by Daicel Corporation
  • Example 1 [Evaluation of reflectance (low reflectivity)] ⁇ Preparation of a substrate with a light-shielding film using the composition>
  • the composition of Example 1 obtained above was applied onto a glass substrate by spin coating to prepare a composition layer having a thickness of 1.5 ⁇ m. After pre-baking at 100° C. for 120 seconds, the entire surface of the substrate was exposed to light of 500 mJ/cm 2 with a high pressure mercury lamp (lamp power 50 mW/cm 2 ) using UX-1000SM-EH04 (manufactured by Ushio Inc.). exposed with The exposed substrate was post-baked at 220° C. for 300 seconds to obtain a substrate with a light-shielding film using the composition of Example 1. Further, a substrate with a light-shielding film was produced in the same manner as in Example 1, except that the composition was changed according to Tables 2-7.
  • a silicon oxide layer was formed on a silicon wafer by plasma CVD (chemical vapor deposition).
  • this silicon oxide layer was patterned by a dry etching method to form barrier ribs (width 100 nm, thickness 500 nm) made of silicon oxide in a grid pattern at intervals of 1.0 ⁇ m.
  • the dimensions of the opening of the partition on the silicon wafer (the area partitioned by the partition on the silicon wafer) were 1.0 ⁇ m long and 1.0 ⁇ m wide.
  • the composition of each example and each comparative example was applied by a spin coating method so that the film thickness after film formation was 0.8 ⁇ m, and then a hot plate was applied. After heating at 90° C.
  • a focused ion beam (FIB) was used to prepare a cross-sectional sample of the portion where the color filters were embedded in the barrier ribs, and a scanning electron microscope ( SEM) (S-4800H, manufactured by Hitachi High-Technologies Corporation) was used to measure the taper angle of the cross section of the color filter, and the accuracy of the pattern shape was evaluated according to the following criteria. The closer the taper angle of the color filter cross section to 90 degrees, the higher the accuracy of the pattern shape. If the evaluation was A to C, it was determined that there was no practical problem.
  • the taper angle of the color filter cross section is 88 degrees or more and 90 degrees or less
  • ⁇ Vis is 0.5 mPa s or less
  • a substrate with a light-shielding film was prepared using the composition before the standing treatment in the same manner as ⁇ Preparation of a substrate with a light-shielding film using the composition>, and the reflectance was measured.
  • the composition was allowed to stand (stationary treatment) under the conditions of 45° C. and light shielding for 3 days, and the upper layer liquid of the composition after the stationary treatment was used to prepare a substrate with a light-shielding film.
  • the absolute value ⁇ R of the difference in reflectance before and after the standing was calculated and evaluated according to the following evaluation criteria. The smaller the ⁇ R, the less the change in reflectance occurs, which is preferable. If the evaluation was A to C, it was determined that there was no practical problem. (Evaluation criteria) A: ⁇ R is 0.5% or less B: ⁇ R is more than 0.5% and 1% or less C: ⁇ R is more than 1% and 3% or less D: ⁇ R is more than 3%
  • Tables 2 to 7 show the evaluation results.
  • each description shows the following.
  • “Content of modified inorganic particles (% by mass)” indicates the content of modified inorganic particles relative to the total solid content of the composition.
  • the description of "A” or “B” in the “hydrophobic group” indicates that the hydrophobic group is a group containing a silicon atom when it is “A”, and when it is "B", the hydrophobic group is Indicates a group containing a fluorine atom.
  • the colorant is at least one selected from the group consisting of chromatic colorants and black colorants of inorganic pigments. If it contains, it is confirmed that the pattern shape is more excellent when placed, and from the comparison of Examples 8 and 23 and Examples 19, 20 and 45 to 52, the colorant is an inorganic pigment other than carbon black. When the black colorant is contained, it was confirmed that the pattern shape when placed was further excellent.

Abstract

The present invention addresses the problem of providing: a composition which, after having been spread and allowed to stand, is highly inhibited from leaving development residues and which can form cured films having exceedingly low reflecting properties; a cured film; a color filter; a light-shielding film; an optical element; a solid imaging element; and a headlight unit. This composition comprises modified inorganic particles and a polymerizable compound, wherein the modified inorganic particles comprise inorganic particles and a coating layer with which some or all of the inorganic particles are coated, the coating layer containing a hydrophobic group and at least one specific group selected from the group consisting of groups which each form a salt by the action of an alkali and groups which each increase in polarity by the action of an alkali.

Description

組成物、硬化膜、カラーフィルタ、遮光膜、光学素子、固体撮像素子、ヘッドライトユニットComposition, cured film, color filter, light-shielding film, optical element, solid-state imaging device, headlight unit
 本発明は、組成物、硬化膜、カラーフィルタ、遮光膜、光学素子、固体撮像素子、及び、ヘッドライトユニットに関する。 The present invention relates to compositions, cured films, color filters, light-shielding films, optical elements, solid-state imaging devices, and headlight units.
 液晶表示装置に用いられるカラーフィルタには、着色画素間の光を遮蔽し、コントラストを向上させる等の目的で、ブラックマトリクスと呼ばれる遮光膜が備えられている。
 また、現在、携帯電話及びPDA(Personal Digital Assistant)等の電子機器の携帯端末には、小型で薄型な撮像ユニットが搭載されている。CCD(Charge Coupled Device)イメージセンサ及びCMOS(Complementary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor)イメージセンサ等の固体撮像素子には、ノイズ発生防止、及び、画質の向上等を目的として遮光膜が設けられている。
A color filter used in a liquid crystal display device is provided with a light shielding film called a black matrix for the purpose of shielding light between colored pixels and improving contrast.
At present, portable terminals of electronic devices such as mobile phones and PDAs (Personal Digital Assistants) are equipped with small and thin imaging units. A solid-state imaging device such as a CCD (Charge Coupled Device) image sensor and a CMOS (Complementary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor) image sensor is provided with a light shielding film for the purpose of preventing noise generation and improving image quality.
 例えば、特許文献1には、分子内に反応性(メタ)アクリロイル基を有するシランカップリング剤により表面処理されたシリカ等を成分とする遮光膜用黒色樹脂組成物が開示されている。 For example, Patent Document 1 discloses a black resin composition for a light shielding film containing silica or the like surface-treated with a silane coupling agent having a reactive (meth)acryloyl group in the molecule.
特開2016-161926号公報JP 2016-161926 A
 本発明者らは、特許文献1に記載の表面処理されたシリカ等について検討したところ、上記シリカを含有する組成物は、引き置いた際(所定時間静置した後)の現像残渣抑制性、及び、上記組成物を用いて得られる硬化膜の低反射性の少なくとも一方が劣ることを知見した。なお、上記引き置いた際の現像残渣抑制性とは、組成物を用いて組成物層を形成して、その組成物層を所定時間静置した後に、露光及び現像処理を施した際に、発生する現像残渣が抑制されることを意味する。 The present inventors have investigated the surface-treated silica and the like described in Patent Document 1, and have found that the composition containing the silica has a development residue suppressing property when set aside (after standing for a predetermined time), In addition, they have found that at least one of the low reflectivity properties of the cured film obtained using the above composition is inferior. In addition, the above-mentioned development residue suppressing property when set aside means that when a composition layer is formed using the composition and the composition layer is left to stand for a predetermined time and then subjected to exposure and development processing, It means that the generated development residue is suppressed.
 そこで、本発明は、引き置いた際の現像残渣抑制性に優れ、かつ、低反射性に優れる硬化膜を形成できる組成物の提供を課題とする。また、本発明は、硬化膜、カラーフィルタ、遮光膜、光学素子、固体撮像素子、及び、ヘッドライトユニットの提供も課題とする。 Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a composition that can form a cured film that is excellent in suppressing development residue when left and has excellent low reflectivity. Another object of the present invention is to provide a cured film, a color filter, a light-shielding film, an optical element, a solid-state imaging device, and a headlight unit.
 本発明者は、鋭意検討した結果、以下の構成により上記課題を解決できることを見出し、本発明を完成させた。 As a result of intensive studies, the inventor found that the above problems can be solved by the following configuration, and completed the present invention.
 〔1〕 修飾無機粒子と、重合性化合物とを含有し、
 上記修飾無機粒子が、無機粒子と、上記無機粒子の一部又は全部を被覆する被覆層とを含有し、
 上記被覆層が、アルカリの作用により塩を形成する基、及び、アルカリの作用により極性が増大する基からなる群から選択される少なくとも1つの特定基と、疎水性基とを含有する、組成物。
 〔2〕 上記特定基が、カルボン酸基又はカルボン酸無水物基である、〔1〕に記載の組成物。
 〔3〕 修飾無機粒子と、重合性化合物とを含有し、
 上記修飾無機粒子が、無機粒子と、上記無機粒子の一部又は全部を被覆する被覆層とを含有し、
 上記被覆層が、カルボン酸基、スルホン酸基、リン酸基、硝酸基、フェノール性水酸基、及び、酸無水物基からなる群から選択される少なくとも1種と、疎水性基とを含有する、組成物。
 〔4〕 上記無機粒子の粒子径が、100nm未満である、〔1〕~〔3〕のいずれか1つに記載の組成物。
 〔5〕 更に、色材を含有する、〔1〕~〔4〕のいずれか1つに記載の組成物。
 〔6〕 上記色材が、黒色着色剤である、〔5〕に記載の組成物。
 〔7〕 上記色材が、無機顔料である、〔5〕又は〔6〕に記載の組成物。
 〔8〕 更に、樹脂、及び、重合開始剤を含有する、〔1〕~〔7〕のいずれか1つに記載の組成物。
 〔9〕 更に、樹脂、重合開始剤、及び、色材を含有し、
 上記色材の含有量に対する、
 上記修飾無機粒子、上記樹脂、上記重合開始剤、及び、上記重合性化合物の合計含有量の質量比が、0.01~2.00である、〔1〕~〔8〕のいずれか1つに記載の組成物。
 〔10〕 上記修飾無機粒子の含有量が、組成物の全固形分に対して、1.0~20.0質量%である、〔1〕~〔9〕のいずれか1つに記載の組成物。
 〔11〕 上記無機粒子が、シリカ、チタニア、及び、アルミナからなる群から選択される少なくとも1種を含有する、〔1〕~〔10〕のいずれか1つに記載の組成物。
 〔12〕 上記疎水性基が、フッ素原子及びケイ素原子からなる群から選択される少なくとも1種を含有する、〔1〕~〔11〕のいずれか1つに記載の組成物。
 〔13〕 上記疎水性基が、ジアルキルシロキサン基、又は、フルオロアルキル基である、〔1〕~〔12〕のいずれか1つに記載の組成物。
 〔14〕 〔1〕~〔13〕のいずれか1つに記載の組成物を用いて形成された、硬化膜。
 〔15〕 〔14〕に記載の硬化膜を含有する、カラーフィルタ。
 〔16〕 〔14〕に記載の硬化膜を含有する、遮光膜。
 〔17〕 〔14〕に記載の硬化膜を含有する、光学素子。
 〔18〕 〔14〕に記載の硬化膜を含有する、固体撮像素子。
 〔19〕 車両用灯具のヘッドライトユニットであって、
 光源と、
 上記光源から出射された光の少なくとも一部を遮光する遮光部とを有し、
 上記遮光部が、〔14〕に記載の硬化膜を含有する、ヘッドライトユニット。
[1] containing modified inorganic particles and a polymerizable compound,
The modified inorganic particles contain inorganic particles and a coating layer covering part or all of the inorganic particles,
The composition, wherein the coating layer contains at least one specific group selected from the group consisting of a group that forms a salt by the action of an alkali and a group that increases in polarity by the action of an alkali, and a hydrophobic group. .
[2] The composition of [1], wherein the specific group is a carboxylic acid group or a carboxylic anhydride group.
[3] containing modified inorganic particles and a polymerizable compound,
The modified inorganic particles contain inorganic particles and a coating layer covering part or all of the inorganic particles,
The coating layer contains at least one selected from the group consisting of carboxylic acid groups, sulfonic acid groups, phosphoric acid groups, nitric acid groups, phenolic hydroxyl groups, and acid anhydride groups, and a hydrophobic group. Composition.
[4] The composition according to any one of [1] to [3], wherein the inorganic particles have a particle size of less than 100 nm.
[5] The composition according to any one of [1] to [4], further comprising a coloring material.
[6] The composition of [5], wherein the colorant is a black colorant.
[7] The composition according to [5] or [6], wherein the coloring material is an inorganic pigment.
[8] The composition according to any one of [1] to [7], further comprising a resin and a polymerization initiator.
[9] further contains a resin, a polymerization initiator, and a coloring material,
For the content of the above coloring material,
Any one of [1] to [8], wherein the mass ratio of the total content of the modified inorganic particles, the resin, the polymerization initiator, and the polymerizable compound is 0.01 to 2.00. The composition according to .
[10] The composition according to any one of [1] to [9], wherein the content of the modified inorganic particles is 1.0 to 20.0% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the composition. thing.
[11] The composition according to any one of [1] to [10], wherein the inorganic particles contain at least one selected from the group consisting of silica, titania, and alumina.
[12] The composition according to any one of [1] to [11], wherein the hydrophobic group contains at least one selected from the group consisting of fluorine atoms and silicon atoms.
[13] The composition according to any one of [1] to [12], wherein the hydrophobic group is a dialkylsiloxane group or a fluoroalkyl group.
[14] A cured film formed using the composition according to any one of [1] to [13].
[15] A color filter comprising the cured film of [14].
[16] A light-shielding film comprising the cured film of [14].
[17] An optical element comprising the cured film of [14].
[18] A solid-state imaging device comprising the cured film of [14].
[19] A headlight unit for a vehicle lamp, comprising:
a light source;
and a light shielding part that shields at least part of the light emitted from the light source,
A headlight unit, wherein the light shielding part contains the cured film according to [14].
 本発明によれば、引き置いた際の現像残渣抑制性に優れ、かつ、低反射性に優れる硬化膜を形成できる組成物の提供できる。また、本発明は、硬化膜、カラーフィルタ、遮光膜、光学素子、固体撮像素子、及び、ヘッドライトユニットも提供できる。 According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a composition that can form a cured film that is excellent in suppressing development residue when set aside and has excellent low reflectivity. The present invention can also provide cured films, color filters, light-shielding films, optical elements, solid-state imaging devices, and headlight units.
固体撮像装置の構成例を示す概略断面図である。It is a schematic sectional drawing which shows the structural example of a solid-state imaging device. 図1で示す固体撮像装置が備える撮像部を拡大して示す概略断面図である。FIG. 2 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing an enlarged imaging unit included in the solid-state imaging device shown in FIG. 1 ; 赤外線センサの構成例を示す概略断面図である。It is a schematic sectional drawing which shows the structural example of an infrared sensor. ヘッドライトユニットの構成例を示す模式図である。It is a schematic diagram which shows the structural example of a headlight unit. ヘッドライトユニットの遮光部の構成例を示す模式的斜視図である。FIG. 4 is a schematic perspective view showing a configuration example of a light shielding portion of the headlight unit; ヘッドライトユニットによる配光パターンの一例を示す模式図である。It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the light distribution pattern by a headlight unit. ヘッドライトユニットによる配光パターンの他の例を示す模式図である。FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram showing another example of a light distribution pattern by the headlight unit;
 以下、本発明について詳細に説明する。
 以下に記載する構成要件の説明は、本発明の代表的な実施態様に基づいてなされる場合があるが、本発明はそのような実施態様に制限されない。
 なお、本明細書において、「~」を用いて表される数値範囲は、「~」の前後に記載される数値を下限値及び上限値として含有する範囲を意味する。
The present invention will be described in detail below.
The description of the constituent elements described below may be made based on representative embodiments of the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to such embodiments.
In this specification, a numerical range represented by "-" means a range including the numerical values before and after "-" as lower and upper limits.
 また、本明細書における基(原子団)の表記において、置換及び無置換を記していない表記は、置換基を含有しない基と共に置換基を含有する基をも包含する。例えば、「アルキル基」とは、置換基を含有しないアルキル基(無置換アルキル基)のみならず、置換基を含有するアルキル基(置換アルキル基)をも包含する。 In addition, in the notation of a group (atomic group) in this specification, the notation that does not describe substitution and unsubstituted includes not only a group that does not contain a substituent but also a group that contains a substituent. For example, the term "alkyl group" includes not only alkyl groups containing no substituents (unsubstituted alkyl groups) but also alkyl groups containing substituents (substituted alkyl groups).
 また、本明細書中における「活性光線」又は「放射線」とは、例えば、遠紫外線、極紫外線(EUV:Extreme ultraviolet lithography)、X線、及び、電子線等を意味する。また、本明細書中における「光」とは、活性光線及び放射線を意味する。本明細書中における「露光」とは、特に断らない限り、遠紫外線、X線、及びEUV光等による露光のみならず、電子線及びイオンビーム等の粒子線による描画も包含する。 In addition, "actinic rays" or "radiation" in this specification means, for example, far ultraviolet rays, extreme ultraviolet lithography (EUV), X-rays, electron beams, and the like. Further, the term "light" used herein means actinic rays and radiation. Unless otherwise specified, "exposure" in this specification includes not only exposure with far ultraviolet rays, X-rays, EUV light, etc., but also writing with particle beams such as electron beams and ion beams.
 また、本明細書における「(メタ)アクリレート」は、アクリレート及びメタクリレートを意味する。本明細書における「(メタ)アクリル」は、アクリル及びメタクリルを意味する。本明細書における「(メタ)アクリロイル」は、アクリロイル及びメタクリロイルを意味する。本明細書における「(メタ)アクリルアミド」は、アクリルアミド及びメタクリルアミドを意味する。本明細書中における「単量体」と「モノマー」とは、同義である。 "(Meth)acrylate" in this specification means acrylate and methacrylate. "(Meth)acryl" as used herein means acryl and methacryl. "(Meth)acryloyl" as used herein means acryloyl and methacryloyl. "(Meth)acrylamide" as used herein means acrylamide and methacrylamide. The terms "monomer" and "monomer" used herein are synonymous.
 本明細書における「ppm」は、「parts-per-million(10-6)」を意味し、「ppb」は「parts-per-billion(10-9)」を意味し、「ppt」は「parts-per-trillion(10-12)」を意味する。 As used herein, "ppm" means "parts-per-million ( 10-6 )", "ppb" means "parts-per-billion ( 10-9 )", and "ppt" means " parts-per-trillion (10 −12 )”.
 また、本明細書における「重量平均分子量(Mw)」は、GPC(Gel Permeation Chromatography:ゲル浸透クロマトグラフィー)法によるポリスチレン換算値である。
 本明細書における「GPC法」は、測定機器としてHLC-8020GPC(東ソー製)を、カラムとしてTSKgel SuperHZM-H、TSKgel SuperHZ4000、TSKgel SuperHZ2000(東ソー製、4.6mmID×15cm)を、溶離液としてTHF(テトラヒドロフラン)を用いる方法を意味する。
Moreover, the "weight average molecular weight (Mw)" in this specification is a polystyrene conversion value by the GPC (Gel Permeation Chromatography) method.
"GPC method" in the present specification, HLC-8020GPC (manufactured by Tosoh) as a measuring instrument, TSKgel SuperHZM-H, TSKgel SuperHZ4000, TSKgel SuperHZ2000 (manufactured by Tosoh, 4.6 mm ID × 15 cm) as columns, THF as an eluent. (tetrahydrofuran).
 本明細書における表記される2価の基(例えば、-COO-)の結合方向は、特に断らない限り、制限されない。例えば、「X-Y-Z」なる式で表される化合物中の、Yが-COO-である場合、上記化合物は「X-O-CO-Z」であってもよく、「X-CO-O-Z」であってもよい。 Unless otherwise specified, the bonding direction of the divalent groups (eg, -COO-) indicated in this specification is not limited. For example, in the compound represented by the formula "X-Y-Z", when Y is -COO-, the compound may be "X-O-CO-Z", "X-CO —OZ”.
[組成物]
 本発明の組成物の一の好適態様としては、修飾無機粒子、及び、重合性化合物を含有する。修飾無機粒子は、無機粒子と、無機粒子の一部又は全部を被覆する被覆層とを含有し、被覆層が、アルカリの作用により塩を形成する基(以下、「特定基A」ともいう。)、及び、アルカリの作用により極性が増大する基(以下、「特定基B」ともいう。)からなる群から選択される少なくとも1つの特定基と、疎水性基とを含有することが挙げられる。
[Composition]
One preferred embodiment of the composition of the present invention contains modified inorganic particles and a polymerizable compound. The modified inorganic particles contain inorganic particles and a coating layer that partially or entirely coats the inorganic particles, and the coating layer contains a group that forms a salt under the action of an alkali (hereinafter also referred to as "specific group A". ), and a group whose polarity is increased by the action of alkali (hereinafter also referred to as “specific group B”), and at least one specific group selected from the group consisting of a hydrophobic group. .
 上記構成の組成物を用いた場合、本発明の課題が解決されるメカニズムは必ずしも定かではないが、本発明者らは、以下のように推測している。
 修飾無機粒子は、特定基を有する被覆層で覆われているため、組成物から硬化膜を形成する際に用いられる現像液に対する親和性が優れている。そのため、本発明の組成物は、引き置いた後の修飾無機粒子由来の残渣が残留しにくく、引き置いた際の現像残渣抑制性に優れると推測している。
 また、疎水性基を有する修飾無機粒子は、組成物から硬化膜を形成した場合に硬化膜の表面に偏在しやすく、硬化膜の表面に適度な凹凸を形成できる。そのため、本発明の組成物を用いて得られる硬化膜は、表面に照射された光を散乱させることができ、低反射性も優れたと推測している。
 以下、組成物の引き置いた際の現像残渣抑制性に優れること、及び、組成物から形成した硬化膜の低反射性に優れることの少なくとも一方の効果が得られることを、本発明の効果が優れるともいう。
 以下、本発明の組成物が含有する成分について説明する。
Although the mechanism by which the problems of the present invention are solved by using the composition having the above constitution is not necessarily clear, the present inventors presume as follows.
Since the modified inorganic particles are covered with a coating layer having a specific group, the modified inorganic particles have excellent affinity for the developer used when forming a cured film from the composition. Therefore, it is speculated that the composition of the present invention is less likely to leave residue derived from the modified inorganic particles after being left behind, and is excellent in suppressing development residue after being left behind.
In addition, when a cured film is formed from the composition, the modified inorganic particles having a hydrophobic group tend to be unevenly distributed on the surface of the cured film, and can form appropriate unevenness on the surface of the cured film. Therefore, it is speculated that the cured film obtained using the composition of the present invention can scatter the light irradiated on the surface and has excellent low reflectivity.
Hereinafter, the effect of the present invention is that at least one of the effect of excellent suppression of development residue when the composition is left and the effect of excellent low reflectivity of a cured film formed from the composition is obtained. It is also said to be excellent.
The components contained in the composition of the present invention are described below.
〔修飾無機粒子〕
 本発明の組成物は、修飾無機粒子を含有する。
 修飾無機粒子は、無機粒子と、上記無機粒子の一部又は全部を被覆する被覆層とを有する。
[Modified inorganic particles]
The compositions of the invention contain modified inorganic particles.
The modified inorganic particles have inorganic particles and a coating layer covering part or all of the inorganic particles.
<無機粒子>
 無機粒子の粒子径は、硬化膜の各性能及びハンドリング性のバランスが優れる点から、200nm以下が好ましく、100nm未満がより好ましく、10~90nmが更に好ましく、20~80nmが特に好ましく、30~70nmが最も好ましい。
 なお、「粒子径」は、以下の方法により測定した粒子の平均一次粒子径を意味する。平均一次粒子径は、透過型電子顕微鏡(Transmission Electron Microscope、TEM)を用いて測定できる。透過型電子顕微鏡としては、例えば、日立ハイテクノロジーズ社製の透過型顕微鏡HT7700を使用できる。
 透過型電子顕微鏡を用いて得た粒子像の最大長(Dmax:粒子画像の輪郭上の2点における最大長さ)、及び最大長垂直長(DV-max:最大長に平行な2本の直線で画像を挟んだ時、2直線間を垂直に結ぶ最短の長さ)を測長し、その相乗平均値(Dmax×DV-max)1/2を粒子径とした。この方法で100個の粒子の粒子径を測定し、その算術平均値を粒子の平均一次粒子径とした。
<Inorganic particles>
The particle diameter of the inorganic particles is preferably 200 nm or less, more preferably less than 100 nm, still more preferably 10 to 90 nm, particularly preferably 20 to 80 nm, particularly preferably 30 to 70 nm, from the viewpoint of an excellent balance of each performance and handling property of the cured film. is most preferred.
In addition, "particle size" means the average primary particle size of particles measured by the following method. The average primary particle size can be measured using a transmission electron microscope (TEM). As a transmission electron microscope, for example, a transmission microscope HT7700 manufactured by Hitachi High-Technologies Corporation can be used.
The maximum length of the particle image obtained using a transmission electron microscope (Dmax: the maximum length at two points on the contour of the particle image) and the maximum vertical length (DV-max: two straight lines parallel to the maximum length The shortest length vertically connecting two straight lines when an image is sandwiched between two straight lines was measured, and the geometric mean value (Dmax×DV-max) 1/2 was taken as the particle diameter. The particle diameters of 100 particles were measured by this method, and the arithmetic average value was taken as the average primary particle diameter of the particles.
 無機粒子の形状として、例えば、繊維状、針状、板状、球状、テトラポット状及びバルーン状が挙げられ、球状が好ましい。
 無機粒子は、単分散粒子であってもよく、凝集粒子であってもよい。
Examples of the shape of the inorganic particles include fibrous, needle-like, plate-like, spherical, tetrapod-like, and balloon-like, with spherical being preferred.
The inorganic particles may be monodisperse particles or aggregated particles.
 無機粒子は、中空粒子であってもよく、中実粒子であってもよい。中でも、無機粒子は、本発明の効果がより優れる点から、中空粒子であるのが好ましい。
 中空粒子は、粒子の内部に空洞が存在する粒子をいう。中空粒子は、粒子が、内部の空洞と、空洞を包囲する外殻とからなる構造であってもよい。また、中空粒子は、粒子の内部に空洞が複数存在する構造であってもよい。
 中空粒子は、空隙率が3%以上であるのが好ましい。上限は特に制限されないが、100%未満が好ましく、90%以下がより好ましい。
The inorganic particles may be hollow particles or solid particles. Among them, the inorganic particles are preferably hollow particles because the effects of the present invention are more excellent.
Hollow particles refer to particles having cavities inside the particles. A hollow particle may be a structure in which the particle consists of an internal cavity and an outer shell surrounding the cavity. Further, the hollow particles may have a structure in which a plurality of cavities are present inside the particles.
The hollow particles preferably have a porosity of 3% or more. Although the upper limit is not particularly limited, it is preferably less than 100%, more preferably 90% or less.
 中空粒子は、内部に空洞を有し、中空構造を有さない粒子に比較して比重が小さいため、組成物を用いて形成された硬化膜中で、中空粒子が表面に浮かび、遮光膜表面に偏在する効果がより高まると考えられる。
 また、中空粒子は、中空構造を有さない無機粒子に比較して、無機粒子自体の屈折率が低い。例えば、中空粒子をシリカで構成した場合、中空シリカ粒子は、屈折率の低い空気(屈折率=1.0)を有しているため、中空シリカ粒子自体の屈折率が1.2~1.4となり、通常のシリカ(屈折率=1.6)と比較して著しく低くなる。このため、中空粒子を含有する組成物を用いて遮光膜を形成することにより、遮光膜の表面に屈折率の低い中空粒子が偏在し、AR(Anti-Reflection)型の低反射効果が得られ、遮光膜の低反射性が向上すると考えられる。
 中空粒子としては、例えば、特開2001-233611号公報、及び、特許第3272111号公報に記載されている中空シリカ粒子、並びに、スルーリア4110(商品名、日揮触媒化成社製)が挙げられる。
Hollow particles have a cavity inside and have a smaller specific gravity than particles without a hollow structure. It is thought that the effect of uneven distribution in
In addition, hollow particles have a lower refractive index than inorganic particles having no hollow structure. For example, when the hollow particles are composed of silica, the hollow silica particles have air with a low refractive index (refractive index=1.0), so the hollow silica particles themselves have a refractive index of 1.2 to 1.0. 4, which is significantly lower than that of ordinary silica (refractive index=1.6). Therefore, by forming a light-shielding film using a composition containing hollow particles, hollow particles with a low refractive index are unevenly distributed on the surface of the light-shielding film, and an AR (Anti-Reflection) type low-reflection effect is obtained. , it is thought that the low reflectivity of the light shielding film is improved.
Examples of hollow particles include hollow silica particles described in JP-A-2001-233611 and Japanese Patent No. 3272111, and Sururia 4110 (trade name, manufactured by Nikki Shokubai Kasei Co., Ltd.).
 中実粒子は、粒子の内部に空洞が実質的に存在しない粒子をいう。
 具体的には、中実粒子は、空隙率が3%未満であるのが好ましい。
 中実粒子としては、例えば、IPA-ST-L(商品名、日産化学社製)が挙げられる。
Solid particles refer to particles that have substantially no cavities inside the particles.
Specifically, the solid particles preferably have a porosity of less than 3%.
Examples of solid particles include IPA-ST-L (trade name, manufactured by Nissan Chemical Industries, Ltd.).
 無機粒子としては、複数の無機粒子が鎖状に連なった粒子凝集体である数珠状無機粒子を使用してもよい。数珠状無機粒子としては、粒子径が5~50nmの複数の球状コロイダル無機粒子が、金属酸化物含有無機粒子によって接合されたものが好ましい。
 数珠状無機粒子としては、例えば、特許第4328935号公報、及び、特開2013-253145号公報に記載されているシリカゾルが挙げられ、数珠状コロイダル無機粒子が好ましい。
As the inorganic particles, beaded inorganic particles, which are particle aggregates in which a plurality of inorganic particles are linked in a chain, may be used. The beaded inorganic particles are preferably those in which a plurality of spherical colloidal inorganic particles having a particle diameter of 5 to 50 nm are joined together by metal oxide-containing inorganic particles.
Examples of beaded inorganic particles include silica sol described in Japanese Patent No. 4328935 and JP-A-2013-253145, and beaded colloidal inorganic particles are preferred.
 無機粒子は、黒色以外であるのが好ましい。無機粒子は、赤、青、黄、緑、紫、橙、又は、白等の色を有していてもよく、無色であってもよい。中でも、無機粒子は、白色又は無色であることが好ましい。 The inorganic particles are preferably other than black. The inorganic particles may have a color such as red, blue, yellow, green, purple, orange, or white, or may be colorless. Among them, the inorganic particles are preferably white or colorless.
 無機粒子としては、例えば、無機酸化物、無機窒化物、無機炭化物、炭酸塩、硫酸塩、ケイ酸塩、リン酸塩、及び、これらのうち2種以上の複合化物が挙げられ、無機酸化物、無機窒化物又は炭酸塩が好ましく、無機酸化物がより好ましい。なお、無機粒子は、少なくともケイ素を含有することが好ましい。 Examples of inorganic particles include inorganic oxides, inorganic nitrides, inorganic carbides, carbonates, sulfates, silicates, phosphates, and composites of two or more of these. , inorganic nitrides or carbonates are preferred, and inorganic oxides are more preferred. The inorganic particles preferably contain at least silicon.
 無機粒子としては、例えば、シリカ(二酸化ケイ素)、チタニア(二酸化チタン)、アルミナ(酸化アルミニウム)、雲母化合物、酸化亜鉛、酸化ジルコン、酸化錫、チタン酸カリウム、チタン酸ストロンチウム、硼酸アルミニウム、酸化マグネシウム、硼酸マグネシウム、水酸化アルミニウム、水酸化マグネシウム、水酸化カルシウム、水酸化チタン、塩基性硫酸マグネシウム、炭酸カルシウム、炭酸マグネシウム、硫酸カルシウム、硫酸マグネシウム、ケイ酸カルシウム、ケイ酸マグネシウム、リン酸カルシウム、窒化珪素、窒化チタン、窒化アルミ、炭化珪素、炭化チタン、及び、硫化亜鉛が挙げられる。
 中でも、シリカ、チタニア、アルミナ、雲母化合物、硝子、チタン酸カリウム、チタン酸ストロンチウム、硼酸アルミニウム、酸化マグネシウム、炭酸カルシウム、炭酸マグネシウム、ケイ酸カルシウム、ケイ酸マグネシウム、リン酸カルシウム、及び、硫酸カルシウムからなる群から選択される少なくとも1種を含有することが好ましく、シリカ、チタニア、アルミナ、及び、炭酸カルシウムからなる群から選択される少なくとも1種を含有することがより好ましく、シリカ、チタニア、及び、アルミナからなる群から選択される少なくとも1種を含有することが更に好ましく、シリカを含有することが特に好ましい。
Examples of inorganic particles include silica (silicon dioxide), titania (titanium dioxide), alumina (aluminum oxide), mica compounds, zinc oxide, zirconium oxide, tin oxide, potassium titanate, strontium titanate, aluminum borate, and magnesium oxide. , magnesium borate, aluminum hydroxide, magnesium hydroxide, calcium hydroxide, titanium hydroxide, basic magnesium sulfate, calcium carbonate, magnesium carbonate, calcium sulfate, magnesium sulfate, calcium silicate, magnesium silicate, calcium phosphate, silicon nitride, Titanium nitride, aluminum nitride, silicon carbide, titanium carbide, and zinc sulfide.
Among them, the group consisting of silica, titania, alumina, mica compounds, glass, potassium titanate, strontium titanate, aluminum borate, magnesium oxide, calcium carbonate, magnesium carbonate, calcium silicate, magnesium silicate, calcium phosphate, and calcium sulfate It preferably contains at least one selected from, more preferably contains at least one selected from the group consisting of silica, titania, alumina, and calcium carbonate, silica, titania, and alumina It is more preferable to contain at least one selected from the group consisting of, and it is particularly preferable to contain silica.
 無機粒子の屈折率は、1.10~1.40が好ましく、1.15~1.35がより好ましい。 The refractive index of the inorganic particles is preferably 1.10 to 1.40, more preferably 1.15 to 1.35.
 無機粒子は、1種単独で用いてもよく、2種以上を併用してもよい。
 無機粒子がシリカ(二酸化ケイ素)を含有する場合、シリカ(二酸化ケイ素)の含有量は、無機粒子の全質量に対して、75~100質量%が好ましく、90~100質量%がより好ましく、99~100質量%が更に好ましい。
The inorganic particles may be used singly or in combination of two or more.
When the inorganic particles contain silica (silicon dioxide), the content of silica (silicon dioxide) is preferably 75 to 100% by mass, more preferably 90 to 100% by mass, more preferably 99% by mass, based on the total mass of the inorganic particles. ~100% by mass is more preferred.
<被覆層>
 被覆層は、特定基(特定基A及び特定基Bからなる群から選択される少なくとも1つの基)と、疎水性基とを有する。
 被覆層は、上述の無機粒子の一部又は全部を被覆する層である。つまり、被覆層による無機粒子の被覆は、無機粒子の全表面を被覆してもよく、無機粒子の一部の表面のみを被覆してもよい。上記被覆層による無機粒子の被覆率は、無機粒子の全表面積に対して、10%以上が好ましく、30%以上がより好ましく、50%以上が更に好ましい。上限は、無機粒子の全表面積に対して、100%以下が好ましく、80%以下がより好ましい。
 被覆層は無機粒子の表面に直接配置されていてもよく、無機粒子との間に他の層を介して配置されていてもよい。
<Coating layer>
The coating layer has a specific group (at least one group selected from the group consisting of specific group A and specific group B) and a hydrophobic group.
A coating layer is a layer which coat|covers some or all of the above-mentioned inorganic particles. That is, the coating of the inorganic particles with the coating layer may cover the entire surfaces of the inorganic particles, or may cover only a part of the surfaces of the inorganic particles. The coverage of the inorganic particles by the coating layer is preferably 10% or more, more preferably 30% or more, and still more preferably 50% or more, relative to the total surface area of the inorganic particles. The upper limit is preferably 100% or less, more preferably 80% or less, relative to the total surface area of the inorganic particles.
The coating layer may be arranged directly on the surface of the inorganic particles, or may be arranged via another layer between the inorganic particles.
 特定基としては、後述する実施例欄の保存安定性(粘度)の評価がより優れる点から、特定基B(アルカリの作用により極性が増大する基)が好ましい。
 また、特定基としては、後述する実施例欄の保存安定性(反射率)の評価がより優れる点から、特定基B(アルカリの作用により極性が増大する基)、又は、カルボン酸基以外のアルカリの作用により塩を形成する基が好ましい。
As the specific group, the specific group B (a group whose polarity is increased by the action of an alkali) is preferable because the evaluation of storage stability (viscosity) in the Examples section described later is superior.
Further, as the specific group, the specific group B (a group whose polarity increases due to the action of alkali), or a group other than a carboxylic acid group, from the viewpoint of better evaluation of storage stability (reflectance) in the Examples section described later. Groups which form salts under the action of alkali are preferred.
(疎水性基)
 疎水性基としては、疎水性を示す基であれば特に制限されない。
 疎水性基としては、例えば、ケイ素原子を含有する基、フッ素原子を含有する基、置換基を含有していてもよいアルキル基、置換基を含有していてもよいアリール基、(メタ)アクリロイル基、グリシドキシ基、及び、アミノ基が挙げられる。
 中でも、疎水性基は、フッ素原子及びケイ素原子からなる群から選択される少なくとも1種を含有することが好ましく、ケイ素原子を含有することがより好ましい。
 ケイ素原子を含有する基としては、シロキサン基、又は、シリル基が好ましく、シロキサン基がより好ましく、ジアルキルシロキサン基が更に好ましい。ケイ素原子を含む基は、鎖状、分岐鎖状、及び、環状のいずれであってもよい。
 フッ素原子を含有する基としては、フルオロアルキル基が好ましく、パーフルオロアルキル基がより好ましい。フッ素原子を含有する基は、鎖状、分岐鎖状、及び、環状のいずれであってもよい。
(Hydrophobic group)
The hydrophobic group is not particularly limited as long as it is a group exhibiting hydrophobicity.
Examples of the hydrophobic group include a silicon atom-containing group, a fluorine atom-containing group, an optionally substituted alkyl group, an optionally substituted aryl group, (meth)acryloyl groups, glycidoxy groups, and amino groups.
Among them, the hydrophobic group preferably contains at least one selected from the group consisting of a fluorine atom and a silicon atom, and more preferably contains a silicon atom.
The group containing a silicon atom is preferably a siloxane group or a silyl group, more preferably a siloxane group, and still more preferably a dialkylsiloxane group. The silicon atom-containing group may be chain, branched, or cyclic.
As a group containing a fluorine atom, a fluoroalkyl group is preferred, and a perfluoroalkyl group is more preferred. A fluorine atom-containing group may be chain, branched, or cyclic.
 なお、上記におけるケイ素原子は、修飾無機粒子を作製するためにシランカップリング剤を使用した場合において、無機粒子と直接結合した加水分解性シリル基に由来するケイ素は含まない。
 例えば、シリカに対して、3-メタクリロキシプロピルトリメトキシシランのトリメトキシシリル基を反応させて、メタクリロイル基を有する修飾シリカを作製した場合であっても、シリカと反応した上記トリメトキシシリル基に由来するケイ素原子は、被覆層が有するケイ素原子には該当しない。
The silicon atoms mentioned above do not include silicon derived from hydrolyzable silyl groups directly bonded to the inorganic particles when a silane coupling agent is used to produce the modified inorganic particles.
For example, even when a modified silica having a methacryloyl group is produced by reacting a trimethoxysilyl group of 3-methacryloxypropyltrimethoxysilane with silica, the trimethoxysilyl group reacted with silica The derived silicon atoms do not correspond to the silicon atoms possessed by the coating layer.
 疎水性基としては、後述する式(A1)で表される繰り返し単位に含まれる基(好ましくは、式(A1)におけるSS1で表される基)であるのが好ましい。換言すれば、被覆層は、式(A1)で表される繰り返し単位を含有する重合体を含有するのが好ましい。
 被覆層は、上記重合体を一部に含んでいてもよいし、被覆層が上記重合体そのものであってもよい。上記重合体の含有量は、被覆層の全質量に対して、10~100質量%が好ましく、70~100質量%が好ましく、95~100質量%が更に好ましい。
The hydrophobic group is preferably a group contained in a repeating unit represented by formula (A1) described later (preferably a group represented by SS1 in formula (A1)). In other words, the coating layer preferably contains a polymer containing repeating units represented by formula (A1).
The coating layer may partially contain the polymer, or may be the polymer itself. The content of the polymer is preferably 10 to 100% by mass, preferably 70 to 100% by mass, more preferably 95 to 100% by mass, relative to the total mass of the coating layer.
 上記重合体が含有する式(A1)で表される繰り返し単位は、以下に示される。 The repeating unit represented by formula (A1) contained in the polymer is shown below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
 式(A1)中、RS1は、置換基を含有してもよいアルキル基、又は、水素原子を表す。
 上記アルキル基は、直鎖状及び分岐鎖状のいずれであってもよい。また、上記アルキル基は、全体が環状構造であってもよく、部分的に環状構造を含有してもよい。
 上記アルキル基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましく、1~3がより好ましい。ここでいう好ましい炭素数は、上記アルキル基が置換基を含有する場合において、置換基中に存在し得る炭素原子の数をも計上した炭素数を意図する。
 中でも、RS1は、水素原子又はメチル基が好ましい。
In formula (A1), R S1 represents an optionally substituted alkyl group or a hydrogen atom.
The alkyl group may be linear or branched. Moreover, the alkyl group may have a cyclic structure as a whole or may contain a cyclic structure partially.
The number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group is preferably 1-10, more preferably 1-3. The preferable number of carbon atoms referred to herein means the number of carbon atoms including the number of carbon atoms that may be present in the substituent when the alkyl group contains a substituent.
Among them, R S1 is preferably a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
 式(A1)中、LS1は、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。
 上記2価の連結基としては、例えば、エーテル基(-O-)、カルボニル基(-CO-)、エステル基(-COO-)、チオエーテル基(-S-)、-SO-、-NR-(Rは、水素原子、又は、アルキル基を表す)、2価の炭化水素基(アルキレン基、アルケニレン基(例:-CH=CH-)、又は、アルキニレン基(例:-C≡C-等)、及びアリーレン基)、-SiRSX -(RSXは、水素原子、又は、置換基を表す)並びに、これらを組み合わせた基が挙げられる。
 上記2価の連結基は、可能な場合、置換基を有してもよく、上記2価の連結基の置換基が、後述するSS1で表される基であってもよく、後述するSS1で表される基を一部に含有する基であってもよい。
 中でも、上記2価の連結基は、エステル基、及び、アルキレン基(好ましくは炭素数1~10のアルキレン基)からなる群から選択される基を組み合わせた基であるのが好ましい。
In formula (A1), L S1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
Examples of the divalent linking group include ether group (--O--), carbonyl group (--CO--), ester group (--COO--), thioether group (--S--), --SO 2 --, --NR N- (R N represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group), a divalent hydrocarbon group (alkylene group, alkenylene group (eg -CH=CH-), or an alkynylene group (eg -C≡ C—, etc.), and an arylene group), —SiR SX 2 — (R SX represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent), and groups in which these are combined.
If possible, the divalent linking group may have a substituent, and the substituent of the divalent linking group may be a group represented by S S1 described later, or may be a group represented by S S1 described later. It may be a group partially containing the group represented by S1 .
Among them, the divalent linking group is preferably a combination of groups selected from the group consisting of an ester group and an alkylene group (preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms).
 中でも、上記2価の連結基は、*A-CO-O-*B、又は、*A-CO-O-アルキレン基-*Bで表される基が好ましい。
 *Bは、式(A1)中のSS1との結合位置を表し、*Aは、*Bとは反対側の結合位置を表す。
 上記アルキレン基は、直鎖状及び分岐鎖状のいずれであってもよい。また、上記アルキレン基は、全体が環状構造であってもよく、部分的に環状構造を含有してもよい。上記アルキレン基は、直鎖状であるのが好ましい。
 上記アルキレン基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましく、1~3がより好ましい。ここでいう好ましい炭素数は、上記アルキレン基が置換基を含有する場合において、置換基中に存在し得る炭素原子の数をも計上した炭素数を意図する。上記アルキレン基は無置換であるのが好ましい。
Among them, the divalent linking group is preferably a group represented by *A-CO-O-*B or *A-CO-O-alkylene group-*B.
*B represents the bonding position with S S1 in formula (A1), and *A represents the bonding position on the opposite side to *B.
The alkylene group may be linear or branched. Moreover, the alkylene group may have a cyclic structure as a whole, or may partially contain a cyclic structure. The alkylene group is preferably linear.
The alkylene group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms. The preferable number of carbon atoms referred to herein means the number of carbon atoms including the number of carbon atoms that may exist in the substituent when the alkylene group contains a substituent. The alkylene group is preferably unsubstituted.
 SS1は、疎水性基を表す。
 上記疎水性基は、ケイ素原子又はフッ素原子を含有するのが好ましい。
 上記疎水性基としては、無置換のアルキル基、フルオロアルキル基、又は、後述する式(SS1)で表される基が好ましく、フルオロアルキル基、又は、後述する式(SS1)で表される基がより好ましく、ジアルキルシロキサン基、又は、フルオロアルキル基が更に好ましい。
S S1 represents a hydrophobic group.
The hydrophobic group preferably contains a silicon atom or a fluorine atom.
The hydrophobic group is preferably an unsubstituted alkyl group, a fluoroalkyl group, or a group represented by the formula (SS1) described later, and a fluoroalkyl group or a group represented by the formula (SS1) described later. is more preferred, and a dialkylsiloxane group or a fluoroalkyl group is even more preferred.
 SS1で表される上記無置換のアルキル基は、直鎖状及び分岐鎖状のいずれであってもよい。また、上記無置換のアルキル基は、全体が環状構造であってもよく、部分的に環状構造を含有してもよい。
 上記無置換のアルキル基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましく、1~5がより好ましい。
The unsubstituted alkyl group represented by S S1 may be linear or branched. Moreover, the unsubstituted alkyl group may have a cyclic structure as a whole, or may partially contain a cyclic structure.
The unsubstituted alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
 SS1で表される上記フルオロアルキル基のアルキル基部分は、直鎖状及び分岐鎖状であってもよい。また、上記アルキル基部分は、全体が環状構造であってもよく、部分的に環状構造を含有してもよい。
 上記アルキル基部分の炭素数は、1~15が好ましく、1~10がより好ましい。
 上記アルキル基部分は、フッ素原子以外の置換基を含有しないのも好ましい。
 上記フルオロアルキル基が有するフッ素原子の数は、1~30個が好ましく、5~20個がより好ましい。
 上記フルオロアルキル基は、その全体又は一部が、パーフルオロアルキル基になっているのも好ましい。
The alkyl group portion of the fluoroalkyl group represented by S S1 may be linear or branched. Moreover, the alkyl group portion may have a cyclic structure as a whole, or may partially contain a cyclic structure.
The number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group portion is preferably 1-15, more preferably 1-10.
It is also preferable that the alkyl group portion does not contain any substituents other than fluorine atoms.
The number of fluorine atoms in the fluoroalkyl group is preferably 1-30, more preferably 5-20.
It is also preferable that all or part of the fluoroalkyl group is a perfluoroalkyl group.
 SS1としては、式(SS1)で表される基が好ましい。
   *-LS2-O-SiRS2    (SS1)
 式(SS1)中、RS2は、置換基を含有してもよい炭素数1~20の炭化水素基を表す。*は結合位置を表す。
 上記炭化水素基の炭素数は、1~20が好ましく、1~10がより好ましく、1~5が更に好ましい。ここでいう炭素数は、上記炭化水素基が置換基を含有する場合において、置換基中に存在し得る炭素原子の数をも計上した炭素数を意図する。
 上記炭化水素基は、アルキル基であるのが好ましい。
 上記アルキル基は、直鎖状及び分岐鎖状のいずれであってもよい。また、上記アルキル基は、全体が環状構造であってもよく、部分的に環状構造を含有してもよい。
 複数存在するRS2は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
S S1 is preferably a group represented by formula (SS1).
*-L S2 -O-SiR S2 3 (SS1)
In formula (SS1), R 2 S2 represents a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may contain a substituent. * represents a binding position.
The number of carbon atoms in the hydrocarbon group is preferably 1-20, more preferably 1-10, and even more preferably 1-5. The number of carbon atoms here means the number of carbon atoms including the number of carbon atoms that can exist in the substituents when the above hydrocarbon group contains substituents.
The hydrocarbon group is preferably an alkyl group.
The alkyl group may be linear or branched. Moreover, the alkyl group may have a cyclic structure as a whole or may contain a cyclic structure partially.
A plurality of R S2 may be the same or different.
 LS2は、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。
 LS2における2価の連結基としては、例えば、式(A1)中のLS1における2価の連結基の例として挙げた基が同様に挙げられる。
 また、LS2における2価の連結基が、1個以上(例えば1~1000個)の-SiRS2 -O-を含有してもよい。なお、上記-SiRS2 -O-におけるRS2は、上述したRS2と同様である。
L S2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
Examples of the divalent linking group for L S2 include the same groups as the divalent linking groups for L S1 in formula (A1).
In addition, the divalent linking group in L S2 may contain one or more (eg, 1 to 1000) -SiR S2 2 -O-. R s2 in -SiR S2 2 -O- is the same as R s2 described above.
 SS1としては、式(A2)で表される基がより好ましい。 S S1 is more preferably a group represented by formula (A2).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
 式(A2)中、*は、結合位置を表す。saは、1~1000の整数を表す。RS3は、それぞれ独立に、置換基を含有してもよい炭素数1~20の炭化水素基、又は、後述する式(A3)で表される基を表す。
 式(A2)中、複数存在するRS3は、それぞれ同一でも、異なっていてもよい。
 RS3で表され得る上記炭化水素基としては、例えば、上述したRS2で表され得る置換基を有してもよい炭化水素基が挙げられる。
 中でも、式(A2)中の、右端のSiと結合するRS3は、それぞれ独立に、上記炭化水素基であるのが好ましい。
 式(A2)中のsaが1の場合、「-(-SiRS3 -O-)sa-」中のRS3は、それぞれ独立に、後述する式(A3)で表される基であるのが好ましい。
 「-(-SiRS3 -O-)sa-」中の「2×sa」個存在するRS3中、式(A3)で表される基であるRS3の数は、0~1000が好ましく、0~10がより好ましく、0~2が更に好ましい。
 式(A3)で表される基を以下に示す。
In formula (A2), * represents a binding position. sa represents an integer from 1 to 1,000. Each R S3 independently represents an optionally substituted hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or a group represented by formula (A3) described later.
In formula (A2), multiple R 3 S3 may be the same or different.
Examples of the hydrocarbon group that can be represented by R 2 S3 include the hydrocarbon groups that may have a substituent that can be represented by R 2 S2 described above.
Among them, it is preferable that each R 3 S3 bonded to Si on the right end in formula (A2) is independently the above hydrocarbon group.
When sa in formula (A2) is 1, each R S3 in "-(-SiR S3 2 -O-) sa -" is independently a group represented by formula (A3) described later. is preferred.
The number of R S3 groups represented by formula (A3) among the “2×sa” R S3 groups in “—(—SiR S3 2 —O—) sa —” is preferably 0 to 1,000. , more preferably 0 to 10, and even more preferably 0 to 2.
Groups represented by formula (A3) are shown below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
 式(A3)中、*は、結合位置を表す。sbは、0~300の整数を表す。RS4は、置換基を含有してもよい炭素数1~20の炭化水素基を表す。
 式(A3)中、複数存在するRS4は、それぞれ同一でも、異なっていてもよい。
 RS4で表され得る上記炭化水素基としては、例えば、上述したRS2で表され得る置換基を有してもよい炭化水素基が挙げられる。
In formula (A3), * represents a binding position. sb represents an integer from 0 to 300; R S4 represents an optionally substituted hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
In formula (A3), multiple R 2 S4 may be the same or different.
Examples of the hydrocarbon group that can be represented by R 2 S4 include the hydrocarbon groups that may have a substituent that can be represented by R 2 S2 described above.
 式(A1)で表される繰り返し単位を含有する重合体は、式(A1)で表される繰り返し単位以外のその他の繰り返し単位を含有してもよい。
 上記その他の繰り返し単位としては、(メタ)アクリルに由来する繰り返し単位、又は、ケイ素原子を含有しない繰り返し単位が好ましい。
 上記その他の繰り返し単位の分子量は、86~1000が好ましく、100~500がより好ましい。
The polymer containing the repeating unit represented by formula (A1) may contain repeating units other than the repeating unit represented by formula (A1).
As the other repeating units, a repeating unit derived from (meth)acryl or a repeating unit containing no silicon atom is preferable.
The molecular weight of the other repeating unit is preferably 86-1000, more preferably 100-500.
 被覆層が含有する重合体中、式(A1)で表される繰り返し単位の含有量は、本発明の効果がより優れる点から、全繰り返し単位に対して、10~100質量%が好ましく、60~100質量%より好ましく、90~100質量%が更に好ましい。 In the polymer contained in the coating layer, the content of the repeating unit represented by formula (A1) is preferably 10 to 100% by mass with respect to all repeating units, and 60 ~100% by mass is more preferable, and 90 to 100% by mass is more preferable.
(特定基)
 特定基A(アルカリの作用により塩を形成する基)としては、アルカリと塩を形成する基であれば特に制限されない。特定基Aとしては、例えば、酸基が挙げられ、カルボン酸基、スルホン酸基、リン酸基、硝酸基、又は、フェノール性水酸基が好ましく、カルボン酸基、又は、フェノール性水酸基がより好ましい。
(specific group)
The specific group A (group that forms a salt by the action of an alkali) is not particularly limited as long as it is a group that forms a salt with an alkali. Examples of the specific group A include an acid group, preferably a carboxylic acid group, a sulfonic acid group, a phosphoric acid group, a nitric acid group, or a phenolic hydroxyl group, more preferably a carboxylic acid group or a phenolic hydroxyl group.
 特定基B(アルカリの作用により極性が増大する基)とは、アルカリの作用により分解等をすることで、極性基を形成して極性が増大する基を意味する。
 特定基Bとしては、例えば、ラクトン基、カルボン酸エステル基(-COO-)、カルボン酸無水物基等の酸無水物基(-C(O)OC(O)-)、酸イミド基(-NHCONH-)、カルボン酸チオエステル基(-COS-)、炭酸エステル基(-OC(O)O-)、硫酸エステル基(-OSOO-)、及び、スルホン酸エステル基(-SOO-)が挙げられる。
 中でも、カルボン酸エステル基、又は、酸無水物基が好ましく、カルボン酸無水物基がより好ましい。
 カルボン酸無水物基は、鎖状、及び環状のいずれであってもよく、環状が好ましい。
 環状のカルボン酸無水物基の環としては、5~7員環が好ましく、5員環又は6員環がより好ましく、5員環が更に好ましい。
The specific group B (group whose polarity is increased by the action of an alkali) means a group whose polarity is increased by forming a polar group through decomposition or the like by the action of an alkali.
Examples of the specific group B include, for example, a lactone group, a carboxylic acid ester group (-COO-), an acid anhydride group such as a carboxylic acid anhydride group (-C(O)OC(O)-), an acid imide group (- NHCONH-), carboxylic acid thioester group (-COS-), carbonate group (-OC(O)O-), sulfate group (-OSO 2 O-), and sulfonate group (-SO 2 O- ).
Among them, a carboxylic acid ester group or an acid anhydride group is preferable, and a carboxylic acid anhydride group is more preferable.
The carboxylic anhydride group may be linear or cyclic, preferably cyclic.
The ring of the cyclic carboxylic acid anhydride group is preferably a 5- to 7-membered ring, more preferably a 5- or 6-membered ring, and still more preferably a 5-membered ring.
 特定基Bとしては、式(P-1)で表される化合物から水素原子を1つ又は2つ除いた基が好ましく、式(P-1)で表される化合物から水素原子を1つ除いた基がより好ましい。 The specific group B is preferably a group obtained by removing one or two hydrogen atoms from the compound represented by the formula (P-1), and removing one hydrogen atom from the compound represented by the formula (P-1). group is more preferred.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
 式(P-1)中、RA1aは、置換基を表す。n1aは、0以上の整数を表す。Z1aは、式中の-C(=O)-O-C(=O)-を含む環を形成する2価の基を表す。 In formula (P-1), R A1a represents a substituent. n1a represents an integer of 0 or more. Z 1a represents a divalent group forming a ring containing -C(=O)-OC(=O)- in the formula.
 RA1aで表される置換基としては、例えば、アルキル基が挙げられる。 Examples of the substituent represented by RA1a include an alkyl group.
 Z1aは、-C(=O)-O-C(=O)-を含む環を形成する2価の基を表す。
 Z1aとしては、アルキレン基、アルケニレン基、又は、これらを組み合わせた基が好ましく、アルキレン基又はアルケニレン基がより好ましい。
 上記アルキレン基又はアルケニル基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましく、2~5がより好ましく、2~3が更に好ましい。
Z 1a represents a divalent group forming a ring containing -C(=O)-OC(=O)-.
Z 1a is preferably an alkylene group, an alkenylene group, or a group combining these, more preferably an alkylene group or an alkenylene group.
The number of carbon atoms in the alkylene group or alkenyl group is preferably 1-10, more preferably 2-5, and even more preferably 2-3.
 n1aは、0以上の整数を表す。n1aとしては、0~4の整数が好ましく、0~2の整数がより好ましく、0~1が更に好ましい。
 n1aが2以上の整数を表す場合、複数存在するRA1aは、同一でも異なっていてもよい。また、複数存在するRA1aは、互いに結合して環を形成してもよいが、互いに結合して環を形成していないことが好ましい。
n1a represents an integer of 0 or more. n 1a is preferably an integer of 0 to 4, more preferably an integer of 0 to 2, and even more preferably 0 to 1.
When n1a represents an integer of 2 or more, multiple R A1a may be the same or different. In addition, two or more RA1a groups may combine with each other to form a ring, but preferably do not combine with each other to form a ring.
 特定基Bを含有する基としては、式(p-1)~(p-12)のいずれかで表される基が好ましい。
 なお、Rは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又は置換基を表す。Rは、それぞれ独立に、置換基を表し、pは、それぞれ独立に、0~9の整数を表す。*は結合位置を表す。
As the group containing the specific group B, a group represented by any one of formulas (p-1) to (p-12) is preferable.
Each R independently represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent. Each R p independently represents a substituent, and each p independently represents an integer of 0-9. * represents a binding position.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
 被覆層は、特定基を有する繰り返し単位を含有する、重合体を含有していてもよい。
 特定基を有する繰り返し単位としては、式(D)~(F)で表される繰り返し単位からなる群から選択される少なくとも1種を含有することが好ましく、式(E)又は(F)で表される繰り返し単位を含有することがより好ましい。
The coating layer may contain a polymer containing a repeating unit having a specific group.
The repeating unit having a specific group preferably contains at least one selected from the group consisting of repeating units represented by formulas (D) to (F), represented by formula (E) or (F) It is more preferable to contain repeating units having
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
 式(D)中、「cylic」は、酸無水物基を導入した環状基を表す。
 酸無水物基としては、特定基Bが有する酸無水物基が好ましい。
 環状基に含まれる原子数は特に制限されない。
In formula (D), "cylic" represents a cyclic group into which an acid anhydride group has been introduced.
As the acid anhydride group, the acid anhydride group possessed by the specific group B is preferable.
The number of atoms contained in the cyclic group is not particularly limited.
 式(D)で表される繰り返し単位としては、式(d-1)~(d-4)のいずれかで表される繰り返し単位が好ましい。Rは、それぞれ独立に、置換基を表し、pは、それぞれ独立に、0~4の整数を表す。 Repeating units represented by formula (D) are preferably repeating units represented by formulas (d-1) to (d-4). Each R p independently represents a substituent, and each p independently represents an integer of 0-4.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
 式(E)中、Reは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又は有機基を表す。
 有機基としては、置換機を含有してもよい、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、アラルキル基、及び、アルケニル基が挙げられる。
 「cylic」は、酸無水物基を導入した環状基を表す。
 酸無水物基としては、特定基Bが有する酸無水物基が好ましい。
 環状基に含まれる原子数は特に制限されない。
In formula (E), each Re independently represents a hydrogen atom or an organic group.
Organic groups include alkyl groups, cycloalkyl groups, aryl groups, aralkyl groups, and alkenyl groups, which may contain substituents.
"cylic" represents a cyclic group into which an acid anhydride group has been introduced.
As the acid anhydride group, the acid anhydride group possessed by the specific group B is preferable.
The number of atoms contained in the cyclic group is not particularly limited.
 式(E)で表される繰り返し単位としては、式(e-1)~(e-4)のいずれかで表される繰り返し単位が好ましい。Rは水素原子又は置換基を表す。Rは、それぞれ独立に、置換基を表し、pは、それぞれ独立に、0~8の整数を表す。Reは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又は有機基を表す。 As the repeating unit represented by formula (E), a repeating unit represented by any one of formulas (e-1) to (e-4) is preferable. R represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent. Each R p independently represents a substituent, and each p independently represents an integer of 0 to 8. Each Re independently represents a hydrogen atom or an organic group.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
 式(F)中、Rは、置換基を含有してもよいアルキル基、又は、水素原子を表す。
 上記アルキル基は、直鎖状及び分岐鎖状のいずれであってもよい。また、上記アルキル基は、全体が環状構造であってもよく、部分的に環状構造を含有してもよい。
 上記アルキル基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましく、1~3がより好ましい。ここでいう好ましい炭素数は、上記アルキル基が置換基を含有する場合において、置換基中に存在し得る炭素原子の数をも計上した炭素数を意図する。
 中でも、Rは、水素原子又はメチル基が好ましい。
In formula ( F ), RF represents an optionally substituted alkyl group or a hydrogen atom.
The alkyl group may be linear or branched. Moreover, the alkyl group may have a cyclic structure as a whole or may contain a cyclic structure partially.
The number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group is preferably 1-10, more preferably 1-3. The preferable number of carbon atoms referred to herein means the number of carbon atoms including the number of carbon atoms that may be present in the substituent when the alkyl group contains a substituent.
Among them, RF is preferably a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
 式(F)中、Lは、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。
 上記2価の連結基としては、例えば、エーテル基(-O-)、カルボニル基(-CO-)、エステル基(-COO-)、チオエーテル基(-S-)、-SO-、-NR-(Rは、水素原子、又は、アルキル基を表す)、2価の炭化水素基(アルキレン基、アルケニレン基(例:-CH=CH-)、アルキニレン基(例:-C≡C-等)、及びアリーレン基)、並びに、これらを組み合わせた基が挙げられる。
 中でも、上記2価の連結基は、アルキレン基、エステル基、及び、アルキレン基(好ましくは炭素数1~10のアルキレン基)からなる群から選択される基を組み合わせた基であるのが好ましい。
 上記アルキレン基は、直鎖状及び分岐鎖状のいずれであってもよい。また、上記アルキレン基は、全体が環状構造であってもよく、部分的に環状構造を含有してもよい。上記アルキレン基は、直鎖状であるのが好ましい。
 上記アルキレン基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましく、1~3がより好ましい。ここでいう好ましい炭素数は、上記アルキレン基が置換基を含有する場合において、置換基中に存在し得る炭素原子の数をも計上した炭素数を意図する。上記アルキレン基は無置換であるのが好ましい。
In formula ( F ), LF represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
Examples of the divalent linking group include ether group (--O--), carbonyl group (--CO--), ester group (--COO--), thioether group (--S--), --SO 2 --, --NR N- (R N represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group), divalent hydrocarbon group (alkylene group, alkenylene group (eg -CH=CH-), alkynylene group (eg -C≡C- etc.), and arylene groups), and combinations thereof.
Among them, the divalent linking group is preferably a combination of groups selected from the group consisting of an alkylene group, an ester group, and an alkylene group (preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms).
The alkylene group may be linear or branched. Moreover, the alkylene group may have a cyclic structure as a whole, or may partially contain a cyclic structure. The alkylene group is preferably linear.
The alkylene group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms. The preferable number of carbon atoms referred to herein means the number of carbon atoms including the number of carbon atoms that may exist in the substituent when the alkylene group contains a substituent. The alkylene group is preferably unsubstituted.
 Sは、酸無水物基を表す。上記酸無水物基としては、特定基Bが有する酸無水物基が好ましい。 SF represents an acid anhydride group. As the acid anhydride group, the acid anhydride group possessed by the specific group B is preferable.
 式(F)で表される繰り返し単位としては、式(f-1)~(f-6)のいずれかで表される繰り返し単位が好ましい。Rは、それぞれ独立に、置換基を含有してもよいアルキル基、又は、水素原子を表す。Rは、それぞれ独立に、置換基を表し、pは、それぞれ独立に、0~8の整数を表す。Reは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又は有機基を表す。Lは、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。Rは、水素原子又は置換基を表す。 As the repeating unit represented by formula (F), a repeating unit represented by any one of formulas (f-1) to (f-6) is preferable. R F each independently represents an optionally substituted alkyl group or a hydrogen atom. Each R p independently represents a substituent, and each p independently represents an integer of 0 to 8. Each Re independently represents a hydrogen atom or an organic group. LF represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. R represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
 特定基を有する繰り返し単位を形成するためのモノマーとしては、例えば、イタコン酸無水物、マレイン酸無水物、アリルコハク酸無水物、(2-メチル-2-プロペニル)コハク酸無水物、2-オクテニルコハク酸無水物、2,3-ジメチルマレイン酸無水物、2-ドデセン-1-イルコハク酸無水物、5-(2,5-ジオキソテトラヒドロフリル)-3-メチル-3-シクロヘキセン-1,2-ジカルボン酸無水物、ビシクロ[2.2.2]オクト-5-エン-2,3-ジカルボン酸無水物、2-ブテン-1-イルコハク酸無水物、1-シクロヘキセン-1,2-ジカルボン酸無水物、シトラコン酸無水物、5-ノルボルネン-2,3-ジカルボン酸無水物、フェニルマレイン酸無水物、及び、cis-4-シクロヘキセン-1,2-ジカルボン酸無水物が挙げられる。
 中でも、上記モノマーとしては、イタコン酸無水物、マレイン酸無水物、又は、アリルコハク酸無水物が好ましい。
Examples of monomers for forming repeating units having a specific group include itaconic anhydride, maleic anhydride, allylsuccinic anhydride, (2-methyl-2-propenyl)succinic anhydride, and 2-octenylsuccinic acid. anhydride, 2,3-dimethylmaleic anhydride, 2-dodecen-1-ylsuccinic anhydride, 5-(2,5-dioxotetrahydrofuryl)-3-methyl-3-cyclohexene-1,2-dicarboxylic anhydride Acid anhydrides, bicyclo[2.2.2]oct-5-ene-2,3-dicarboxylic anhydride, 2-butene-1-ylsuccinic anhydride, 1-cyclohexene-1,2-dicarboxylic anhydride , citraconic anhydride, 5-norbornene-2,3-dicarboxylic anhydride, phenylmaleic anhydride, and cis-4-cyclohexene-1,2-dicarboxylic anhydride.
Among them, itaconic anhydride, maleic anhydride, or allylsuccinic anhydride is preferable as the monomer.
 被覆層が含有する重合体は、加水分解性シリル基を有する繰り返し単位を、実質的に含有しないのが好ましい。
 上記繰り返し単位を実質的に含有しないとは、被覆層が含有する重合体中、加水分解性シリル基を有する繰り返し単位の含有量が、全繰り返し単位に対して、1.0質量%以下を意味し、0.1質量%以下が好ましい。上限は、0質量%が好ましい。
The polymer contained in the coating layer preferably does not substantially contain repeating units having a hydrolyzable silyl group.
The term “substantially free of repeating units” means that the content of repeating units having a hydrolyzable silyl group in the polymer contained in the coating layer is 1.0% by mass or less with respect to all repeating units. However, 0.1% by mass or less is preferable. The upper limit is preferably 0% by mass.
<修飾無機粒子の特徴>
 修飾無機粒子の粒子径(数平均粒子径)は、本発明の効果がより優れる点から、1~500nmが好ましく、20~200nmがより好ましく、30~160nmが更に好ましく、30~100nmが特に好ましい。
 上記修飾無機粒子の粒子径は、TEM等を用いて測定する上述した無機粒子の粒子径(数平均粒子径)と同様の方法で測定できる。
<Characteristics of modified inorganic particles>
The particle diameter (number average particle diameter) of the modified inorganic particles is preferably 1 to 500 nm, more preferably 20 to 200 nm, still more preferably 30 to 160 nm, and particularly preferably 30 to 100 nm, from the viewpoint that the effects of the present invention are more excellent. .
The particle diameter of the modified inorganic particles can be measured by the same method as the particle diameter (number average particle diameter) of the inorganic particles described above, which is measured using a TEM or the like.
 修飾無機粒子において、被覆層の含有量は、本発明の効果がより優れる点から、修飾無機粒子の全質量に対して、2質量%以上が好ましく、6質量%以上がより好ましく、8質量%以上が更に好ましい。上限は、修飾無機粒子の全質量に対して、30質量%以下が好ましく、20質量%以下がより好ましく、15質量%以下が更に好ましい。 In the modified inorganic particles, the content of the coating layer is preferably 2% by mass or more, more preferably 6% by mass or more, more preferably 8% by mass, based on the total mass of the modified inorganic particles, from the viewpoint that the effects of the present invention are more excellent. The above is more preferable. The upper limit is preferably 30% by mass or less, more preferably 20% by mass or less, and even more preferably 15% by mass or less, relative to the total mass of the modified inorganic particles.
 修飾無機粒子は、1種を単独で用いても、2種以上を使用してもよい。
 中でも、修飾無機粒子は、1種を単独で用いること、又は、2種の混合で用いることが好ましい。
 2種以上の修飾無機粒子を使用する場合には、合計含有量が下記範囲内であることが好ましい。
 修飾無機粒子の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対して、0.1~30.0質量%が好ましく、0.5~20.0質量%がより好ましく、本発明の効果がより優れる点から、1.0~20.0質量%が更に好ましく、2.5~16.0質量%が特に好ましい。
 本明細書における組成物の「固形分」とは、硬化膜を形成する成分を意味し、組成物が溶剤(有機溶剤、水等)を含有する場合、溶剤を除いた全ての成分を意味する。また、硬化膜を形成する成分であれば、液体状の成分も固形分とみなす。
Modified inorganic particles may be used singly or in combination of two or more.
Among them, the modified inorganic particles are preferably used singly or in combination of two.
When using two or more modified inorganic particles, the total content is preferably within the following range.
The content of the modified inorganic particles is preferably 0.1 to 30.0% by mass, more preferably 0.5 to 20.0% by mass, relative to the total solid content of the composition, and the effects of the present invention are more excellent. From the point of view, 1.0 to 20.0% by mass is more preferable, and 2.5 to 16.0% by mass is particularly preferable.
The "solid content" of the composition herein means a component that forms a cured film, and when the composition contains a solvent (organic solvent, water, etc.), it means all components excluding the solvent. . In addition, as long as it is a component that forms a cured film, a liquid component is also regarded as a solid content.
<修飾無機粒子の製造方法>
 修飾無機粒子の製造方法としては、特に制限されないが、例えば、以下の製造方法Aが挙げられる。
 無機粒子及び無機粒子を被覆してエチレン性不飽和基を含有する被覆前駆体層を含有する修飾無機粒子前駆体における被覆前駆体層の上記エチレン性不飽和基と、後述する式(1b)で表される化合物におけるエチレン性不飽和基と、上述した特定基を含有し、かつ、エチレン不飽和基を有する化合物(好ましくは、式(P-1)で表される化合物)におけるエチレン不飽和基とを重合して、重合体を含有する被覆層を無機粒子の表面上に形成し、無機粒子を被覆する工程(被覆層形成工程)を有する、修飾無機粒子の製造方法Aが挙げられる。
<Method for producing modified inorganic particles>
The method for producing the modified inorganic particles is not particularly limited, and for example, the following production method A can be mentioned.
The ethylenically unsaturated group of the coating precursor layer in the modified inorganic particle precursor containing the inorganic particles and the coating precursor layer containing the ethylenically unsaturated group by coating the inorganic particles, and the formula (1b) described later Ethylenically unsaturated group in the represented compound and a compound containing the above-described specific group and having an ethylenically unsaturated group (preferably the compound represented by formula (P-1)) in the ethylenically unsaturated group is polymerized to form a coating layer containing the polymer on the surfaces of the inorganic particles to coat the inorganic particles (coating layer forming step).
 上記修飾無機粒子の製造方法Aにおける修飾無機粒子前駆体は、無機粒子と、無機粒子を被覆する被覆前駆体層と、を含有する。
 修飾無機粒子前駆体における無機粒子としては、例えば、修飾無機粒子の無機粒子の例として挙げた無機粒子が挙げられる。
 修飾無機粒子前駆体における被覆前駆体層は、エチレン性不飽和基(例えば、(メタ)アクリロイル基、ビニル基、及び、スチリル基等)を含有する。
 修飾無機粒子前駆体は、市販品を購入して使用してもよいし、製造して使用してもよい。
 修飾無機粒子前駆体を製造する方法としては、例えば、無機粒子に、エチレン性不飽和基を含有するシランカップリング剤(例えば、3-メタクリロキシプロピルトリメトキシシラン等)を反応させて、無機粒子の表面上に被覆前駆体層を形成して、修飾無機粒子前駆体を製造する方法が挙げられる。
The modified inorganic particle precursor in the modified inorganic particle manufacturing method A contains inorganic particles and a coating precursor layer that coats the inorganic particles.
The inorganic particles in the modified inorganic particle precursor include, for example, the inorganic particles exemplified as the inorganic particles of the modified inorganic particles.
The coating precursor layer in the modified inorganic particle precursor contains ethylenically unsaturated groups (eg, (meth)acryloyl groups, vinyl groups, styryl groups, etc.).
The modified inorganic particle precursor may be used after purchasing a commercially available product, or may be used after being manufactured.
As a method for producing the modified inorganic particle precursor, for example, inorganic particles are reacted with a silane coupling agent containing an ethylenically unsaturated group (e.g., 3-methacryloxypropyltrimethoxysilane, etc.) to obtain inorganic particles. and forming a coating precursor layer on the surface of to produce a modified inorganic particle precursor.
 式(1b)で表される化合物を以下に示す。 The compounds represented by formula (1b) are shown below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
 式(1b)中、RS1は、置換基を含有してもよいアルキル基、又は、水素原子を表す。
 LS1は、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。
 SS1は、-SiRS2 -O-を含有する基を表す。
 RS2は、置換基を含有してもよい炭素数1~20の炭化水素基を表す。
 複数存在するRS2は、それぞれ同一でも、異なっていてもよい。
 式(1b)中の各符号で表される基は、それぞれ、式(A1)中の対応する符号で表される基とそれぞれ同様である。
 つまり、式(1b)で表される化合物は、式(A1)で表される繰り返し単位に相当するモノマーである。
In formula (1b), R S1 represents an optionally substituted alkyl group or a hydrogen atom.
L S1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
S S1 represents a group containing -SiR S2 2 -O-.
R S2 represents an optionally substituted hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
A plurality of R S2 may be the same or different.
Each group represented by each symbol in formula (1b) is the same as the group represented by the corresponding symbol in formula (A1).
That is, the compound represented by formula (1b) is a monomer corresponding to the repeating unit represented by formula (A1).
 被覆層形成工程は、上記修飾無機粒子前駆体の被覆前駆体層におけるエチレン性不飽和基と、式(1b)で表される化合物におけるエチレン性不飽和基(好ましくは、式(1b)で表される化合物における、式(1b)中に明示されるエチレン性不飽和基)と、特定基を含有し、かつ、エチレン不飽和基を含有する化合物(好ましくは、式(P-1)で表される化合物)におけるエチレン不飽和基とを重合(通常、ラジカル重合)させて、重合体を含有する被覆層を無機粒子の表面上に形成し、無機粒子を被覆する。
 被覆層形成工程を実施する際、重合系には、式(1b)で表される化合物、及び、特定基Aを含有し、かつ、エチレン不飽和基を含有する化合物(好ましくは、式(P-1)で表される化合物)以外にも、その他のエチレン性不飽和基を含有する化合物(以下、「その他の化合物」ともいう。)が存在していてもよい。
 上記その他の化合物は、ケイ素原子を含有しない化合物であるのが好ましい。
 上記その他の化合物としては、(メタ)アクリル系化合物が好ましい。上記その他の化合物の分子量は、86~1000が好ましく、100~700がより好ましい。
 被覆層形成工程を実施する際の重合系において、式(1b)で表される化合物、及び、特定基を含有し、かつ、エチレン不飽和基を含有する化合物(好ましくは、式(P-1)で表される化合物)の合計含有量は、式(1b)で表される化合物、特定基を含有し、かつ、エチレン不飽和基を含有する化合物(好ましくは、式(P-1)で表される化合物)、及び、その他の化合物(好ましくは、ケイ素原子を含有しない化合物)の合計含有量に対して、10~100質量%が好ましく、60~100質量%がより好ましく、90~100質量%が更に好ましい。
In the coating layer forming step, the ethylenically unsaturated groups in the coating precursor layer of the modified inorganic particle precursor and the ethylenically unsaturated groups in the compound represented by formula (1b) (preferably represented by formula (1b) Ethylenically unsaturated group specified in the formula (1b) in the compound obtained) and a compound containing a specific group and containing an ethylenically unsaturated group (preferably represented by formula (P-1) A polymer-containing coating layer is formed on the surfaces of the inorganic particles by polymerizing (generally, radically polymerizing) the ethylenically unsaturated groups in the compound) to cover the inorganic particles.
When carrying out the coating layer forming step, the polymerization system contains a compound represented by the formula (1b), and a compound containing a specific group A and an ethylenically unsaturated group (preferably, the formula (P -1), other compounds containing ethylenically unsaturated groups (hereinafter also referred to as "other compounds") may be present.
The above other compounds are preferably compounds containing no silicon atoms.
(Meth)acrylic compounds are preferable as the other compounds. The molecular weight of the other compound is preferably 86-1000, more preferably 100-700.
In the polymerization system for carrying out the coating layer forming step, the compound represented by formula (1b) and a compound containing a specific group and containing an ethylenically unsaturated group (preferably, formula (P-1 The total content of the compound represented by ) is the compound represented by formula (1b), a compound containing a specific group and an ethylenically unsaturated group (preferably, formula (P-1) compound represented), and other compounds (preferably silicon-free compounds), relative to the total content, preferably 10 to 100% by mass, more preferably 60 to 100% by mass, 90 to 100 % by mass is more preferred.
 被覆層形成工程の後、被覆層形成工程において被覆層の重合体に取り込まれることなく重合生成された重合生成物の一部又は全部と、得られた修飾無機粒子とを分離する、精製処理が実施されるのが好ましい。
 精製処理としては、例えば、被覆層形成工程を実施した溶液をろ過(好ましくは精密ろ過)し、修飾無機粒子をろ物として得て、上記重合生成物をろ液中に分離する処理が挙げられる。
 精製処理としては、他にも、被覆層形成工程を実施した溶液を遠心して、上記重合生成物を含有する上澄み液と、修飾無機粒子を含有する堆積物とに分離する処理が挙げられる。
 上記ろ過及び/又は上記遠心を実施するにあたって、被覆層形成工程を実施した溶液は、精製処理を効率的に行うための処理(例えば、適当な溶媒の添加、及び/又は、溶媒の一部留去等)が実施されていてもよい。
After the coating layer forming step, a purification treatment is performed to separate part or all of the polymerized product polymerized without being incorporated into the polymer of the coating layer in the coating layer forming step and the resulting modified inorganic particles. preferably implemented.
Examples of the purification treatment include a treatment of filtering (preferably microfiltration) the solution subjected to the coating layer forming step, obtaining modified inorganic particles as a filter cake, and separating the polymerization product into the filtrate. .
Other purification treatments include centrifugation of the solution subjected to the coating layer forming step to separate the supernatant containing the polymerization product and the sediment containing the modified inorganic particles.
In carrying out the filtration and / or the centrifugation, the solution that has undergone the coating layer forming step is treated for efficient purification treatment (for example, addition of a suitable solvent and / or partial distillation of the solvent etc.) may be implemented.
 また、精製処理を実施せず、被覆層形成工程を実施した溶液の溶媒を蒸発させて、表面上に上記重合生成物が付着した状態の修飾無機粒子を得てもよい。 Alternatively, the modified inorganic particles with the polymerization product adhered on the surface may be obtained by evaporating the solvent of the solution subjected to the coating layer forming step without performing the purification treatment.
 得られた修飾無機粒子は、直接他の原料と混合して組成物の製造に用いてもよい。また、別の溶剤に修飾無機粒子を再分散させ、得られた分散液を組成物の製造のために使用し、他の原料と混合してもよい。
 被覆層形成工程を実施した修飾無機粒子を含有する溶液をそのまま他の原料と混合して組成物の製造に用いてもよい。
The modified inorganic particles thus obtained may be directly mixed with other raw materials and used to produce a composition. Alternatively, the modified inorganic particles may be redispersed in another solvent and the resulting dispersion used to prepare the composition and mixed with other raw materials.
The solution containing the modified inorganic particles subjected to the coating layer forming step may be mixed with other raw materials as it is for use in the production of the composition.
 また、修飾無機粒子の製造方法としては、以下の製造方法Bも挙げられる。
 無機粒子に対して、疎水性基を含有するシランカップリング剤と、特定基を含有するシランカップリング剤とを反応させて、被覆層を無機粒子の表面上に形成し、無機粒子を被覆する工程(被覆層形成工程B)を有する、修飾無機粒子の製造方法Bも挙げられる。
 なお、上記製造方法Bにて得られた修飾無機粒子は、疎水性基を含有するシランカップリング剤と、特定基を含有するシランカップリング剤とを少なくとも含むシランカップリング剤で表面修飾された無機粒子に該当する。
Moreover, the following manufacturing method B is also mentioned as a manufacturing method of a modified inorganic particle.
The inorganic particles are reacted with a silane coupling agent containing a hydrophobic group and a silane coupling agent containing a specific group to form a coating layer on the surface of the inorganic particles to cover the inorganic particles. A method B for producing modified inorganic particles, which includes a step (coating layer forming step B), is also included.
The modified inorganic particles obtained by the production method B are surface-modified with a silane coupling agent containing at least a silane coupling agent containing a hydrophobic group and a silane coupling agent containing a specific group. It corresponds to inorganic particles.
 無機粒子としては、例えば、修飾無機粒子の無機粒子の例として挙げた無機粒子が挙げられる。
 疎水性基を含有するシランカップリング剤としては、例えば、上述した式(A1)におけるSS1で表される基を含有するシランカップリング剤が挙げられる。
Examples of the inorganic particles include the inorganic particles exemplified as the inorganic particles of the modified inorganic particles.
Silane coupling agents containing a hydrophobic group include, for example, silane coupling agents containing a group represented by SS1 in formula (A1) described above.
 特定基を含有するシランカップリング剤としては、式(2b)で表される化合物が好ましい。
  SS2-LS2-Si(X)(Y)    (2b)
 式(2b)中、Xは、水酸基又は-ORS3を表す。RS3は、置換基を含有してもよい炭素数1~20の炭化水素基を表す。Yは、置換基を含有してもよい炭素数1~20の炭化水素基を表す。LS2は、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。SS2は、特定基を表す。aは、1~3の整数を表す。bは、0~2の整数を表す。ただし、a+bは3である。
As the silane coupling agent containing a specific group, a compound represented by Formula (2b) is preferred.
S S2 -L S2 -Si(X) a (Y) b (2b)
In formula (2b), X represents a hydroxyl group or -OR S3 . R S3 represents an optionally substituted hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms. Y represents an optionally substituted hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms. L S2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. SS2 represents a specific group. a represents an integer of 1 to 3; b represents an integer of 0 to 2; However, a+b is 3.
 Xは、水酸基又は-ORS3を表す。
 RS3は、置換基を含有してもよい炭素数1~20の炭化水素基を表す。
 RS3としては、置換基を含有してもよい炭素数1~10の炭化水素基が好ましく、無置換の炭素数1~10の炭化水素基がより好ましく、無置換の炭素数1~5の炭化水素基が更に好ましく、メチル基、又は、エチル基が特に好ましい。
 複数存在するRS3は、それぞれ同一でも、異なっていてもよい。
X represents a hydroxyl group or -OR S3 .
R S3 represents an optionally substituted hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
R S3 is preferably a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms which may contain a substituent, more preferably an unsubstituted hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and an unsubstituted hydrocarbon group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms. A hydrocarbon group is more preferred, and a methyl group or an ethyl group is particularly preferred.
A plurality of R S3 may be the same or different.
 Yは、置換基を含有してもよい炭素数1~20の炭化水素基を表す。
 Yは、RS3と同義であり、好適範囲も同じである。
Y represents an optionally substituted hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
Y has the same definition as R S3 , and the preferred range is also the same.
 LS2は、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。
 中でも、LS2としては、置換基を含有してもよいアルキレン基が好ましい。
 置換基を含有してもよいアルキレン基の炭素数は、1~20が好ましく、1~10がより好ましく、1~5が更に好ましい。
 上記アルキレン基は、直鎖状、分岐鎖状、及び、環状のいずれであってもよい。
L S2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
Among them, L S2 is preferably an optionally substituted alkylene group.
The number of carbon atoms in the alkylene group which may contain a substituent is preferably 1-20, more preferably 1-10, and even more preferably 1-5.
The alkylene group may be linear, branched, or cyclic.
 SS2は、特定基を表す。
 SS2で表される特定基としては、上述した被覆層が有する特定基と同義であり、好適範囲も同じである。
SS2 represents a specific group.
The specific group represented by SS2 has the same meaning as the specific group possessed by the coating layer described above, and the preferred range is also the same.
 aは、1~3の整数を表す。aとしては、2~3が好ましく、3がより好ましい。
 bは、0~2の整数を表す。bとしては、0~1が好ましく、0がより好ましい。
 ただし、a+bは3である。
a represents an integer of 1 to 3; As a, 2 to 3 are preferable, and 3 is more preferable.
b represents an integer of 0 to 2; b is preferably 0 to 1, more preferably 0.
However, a+b is 3.
 上記疎水性基を含有するシランカップリング剤と、上記特定基を含有するシランカップリング剤と以外に、その他シランカップリング剤を更に用いてもよい。
 その他シランカップリング剤としては、疎水性基及び特定基A若しくは特定基Bを含有せず、アミノ基、アリール基、又は、エポキシ基を含有するシランカップリング剤が挙げられる。
In addition to the hydrophobic group-containing silane coupling agent and the specific group-containing silane coupling agent, other silane coupling agents may be used.
Other silane coupling agents include silane coupling agents that do not contain a hydrophobic group and the specific group A or the specific group B and that contain an amino group, an aryl group, or an epoxy group.
 本発明の組成物は、上記修飾無機粒子以外に、他の修飾無機粒子又は他の無機粒子を有していてもよい。
 他の修飾無機粒子としては、例えば、上述した修飾無機粒子以外であれば特に制限されないが、特定基を有さず、疎水性基を有する修飾無機粒子、疎水性基を有さず、特定基を有する修飾無機粒子、並びに、疎水性基、特定基A、及び、特定基Bをいずれも有さない修飾無機粒子が挙げられる。
 他の修飾無機粒子が含有する無機粒子としては、上述した修飾無機粒子が有する無機粒子が挙げられる。
The composition of the present invention may contain other modified inorganic particles or other inorganic particles in addition to the above modified inorganic particles.
Examples of other modified inorganic particles include, but are not limited to, modified inorganic particles other than the modified inorganic particles described above. Modified inorganic particles having no specific group and having a hydrophobic group and modified inorganic particles having none of the hydrophobic group, the specific group A, and the specific group B.
Inorganic particles contained in other modified inorganic particles include inorganic particles possessed by the modified inorganic particles described above.
 被覆層形成工程Bの後、得られた修飾無機粒子を分離する、上述した精製処理が実施されるのが好ましい。 After the coating layer forming step B, it is preferable to carry out the above-described purification treatment for separating the obtained modified inorganic particles.
〔重合性化合物〕
 本発明の組成物は、重合性化合物を含有する。
 本明細書において、「重合性化合物」とは、後述する重合開始剤等の作用を受けて重合可能な有機化合物(例えば、エチレン性不飽和基を含有する有機化合物)を意味する。
 本発明の組成物が溶媒を含有する場合、重合性化合物は溶媒に溶解して存在するのが好ましい。
[Polymerizable compound]
The composition of the invention contains a polymerizable compound.
As used herein, the term "polymerizable compound" means an organic compound (for example, an organic compound containing an ethylenically unsaturated group) that can be polymerized under the action of a polymerization initiator or the like, which will be described later.
When the composition of the present invention contains a solvent, the polymerizable compound is preferably dissolved in the solvent.
 重合性化合物は、低分子の重合性化合物であってもよいし、高分子の重合性化合物であってもよい。
 低分子の重合性化合物としては、例えば、後述する重合性低分子化合物が挙げられる。
 高分子の重合性化合物としては、例えば、後述する樹脂であって、重合開始剤の作用を受けて重合する基(エチレン性不飽和基等)を含有する樹脂が挙げられる。
 重合性化合物の含有量(低分子の重合性化合物と高分子の重合性化合物との合計含有量)は、組成物の全固形分に対して、10~90質量%が好ましい。
 中でも、本発明の組成物が、後述する色材を含有しない場合、重合性化合物の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対して、50~90質量%が好ましく、65~85質量%がより好ましい。
 また、本発明の組成物が、後述する色材を含有する場合、重合性化合物の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対して、15~55質量%が好ましく、20~50質量%がより好ましい。
 また、重合性化合物の含有量は、組成物の全非着色有機固形分に対して、20~95質量%が好ましく、50~90質量%がより好ましく、70~88質量%が更に好ましい。
 非着色有機固形分とは、固形分であって、非着色性の有機成分をいう。例えば、上述の、無機粒子は、有機成分には該当せず、非着色有機固形分に含まれない。
 また、有機成分であっても色材又は着色剤として使用される成分(有機顔料等)は着色性の成分であるため、非着色有機固形分に含まれない。
 非着色有機固形分としては、例えば、重合性化合物、後述する樹脂であって重合開始剤の作用を受けて重合する基(エチレン性不飽和基等)を含有しない樹脂、重合開始剤、界面活性剤、及び、重合禁止剤が挙げられる。
The polymerizable compound may be a low-molecular-weight polymerizable compound or a high-molecular-weight polymerizable compound.
Examples of low-molecular-weight polymerizable compounds include polymerizable low-molecular-weight compounds described later.
Examples of the high-molecular-weight polymerizable compound include resins described later that contain groups (ethylenically unsaturated groups, etc.) that polymerize under the action of a polymerization initiator.
The content of the polymerizable compound (the total content of the low-molecular-weight polymerizable compound and the high-molecular-weight polymerizable compound) is preferably 10 to 90% by mass based on the total solid content of the composition.
Among them, when the composition of the present invention does not contain a coloring material to be described later, the content of the polymerizable compound is preferably 50 to 90% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition, and 65 to 85% by mass. more preferred.
Further, when the composition of the present invention contains a coloring material to be described later, the content of the polymerizable compound is preferably 15 to 55% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition, and 20 to 50% by mass. more preferred.
The content of the polymerizable compound is preferably 20 to 95% by mass, more preferably 50 to 90% by mass, and even more preferably 70 to 88% by mass, based on the total non-colored organic solid content of the composition.
A non-coloring organic solid content is a solid content and refers to a non-coloring organic component. For example, inorganic particles, discussed above, do not fall under the organic component and are not included in non-colored organic solids.
In addition, even if it is an organic component, since a component used as a coloring material or a coloring agent (organic pigment, etc.) is a coloring component, it is not included in the non-colored organic solid content.
Non-colored organic solids include, for example, a polymerizable compound, a resin described later that does not contain a group that polymerizes under the action of a polymerization initiator (ethylenically unsaturated group, etc.), a polymerization initiator, a surfactant agents and polymerization inhibitors.
〔重合性低分子化合物〕
 重合性低分子化合物は、重合性化合物の一形態である。
 組成物中における重合性低分子化合物の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対して、5~60質量%が好ましい。
 中でも、本発明の組成物が、後述する色材を含有しない場合、重合性低分子化合物の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対して、20~50質量%が好ましく、25~40質量%がより好ましい。
 また、本発明の組成物が、後述する色材を含有する場合、重合性低分子化合物の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対して、7~30質量%が好ましく、10~20質量%がより好ましい。
 また、重合性低分子化合物の含有量は、組成物の全非着色有機固形分に対して、10~70質量%が好ましく、20~60質量%がより好ましく、30~50質量%が更に好ましい。
 重合性低分子化合物は、1種を単独で用いても、2種以上を使用してもよい。2種以上の重合性低分子化合物を使用する場合には、合計含有量が上記範囲内であることが好ましい。
 重合性低分子化合物の分子量(又は、重量平均分子量)は、特に制限されないが、2500以下が好ましい。下限は、100以上が好ましい。
[Polymerizable low-molecular-weight compound]
A polymerizable low-molecular-weight compound is one form of a polymerizable compound.
The content of the polymerizable low-molecular-weight compound in the composition is preferably 5-60% by mass based on the total solid content of the composition.
Among them, when the composition of the present invention does not contain a coloring material described later, the content of the polymerizable low-molecular-weight compound is preferably 20 to 50% by mass, more preferably 25 to 40% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition. % is more preferred.
In addition, when the composition of the present invention contains a coloring material to be described later, the content of the polymerizable low-molecular-weight compound is preferably 7 to 30% by mass, more preferably 10 to 20% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition. % is more preferred.
The content of the polymerizable low-molecular-weight compound is preferably 10 to 70% by mass, more preferably 20 to 60% by mass, and even more preferably 30 to 50% by mass, based on the total non-colored organic solid content of the composition. .
The polymerizable low-molecular-weight compounds may be used singly or in combination of two or more. When two or more polymerizable low-molecular-weight compounds are used, the total content is preferably within the above range.
The molecular weight (or weight-average molecular weight) of the polymerizable low-molecular-weight compound is not particularly limited, but is preferably 2500 or less. The lower limit is preferably 100 or more.
 重合性低分子化合物は、エチレン性不飽和基(エチレン性不飽和結合を含有する基)を含有する化合物が好ましい。
 つまり、本発明の組成物は、エチレン性不飽和基を含有する低分子化合物を、重合性低分子化合物として含有することが好ましい。
 重合性低分子化合物は、エチレン性不飽和結合を1個以上含有する化合物が好ましく、2個以上含有する化合物がより好ましく、3個以上含有する化合物が更に好ましく、4個以上含有する化合物が特に好ましい。上限は、例えば、15個以下である。エチレン性不飽和基としては、例えば、ビニル基、(メタ)アリル基、及び、(メタ)アクリロイル基が挙げられる。
The polymerizable low-molecular-weight compound is preferably a compound containing an ethylenically unsaturated group (a group containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond).
That is, the composition of the present invention preferably contains an ethylenically unsaturated group-containing low-molecular-weight compound as a polymerizable low-molecular-weight compound.
The polymerizable low-molecular-weight compound is preferably a compound containing one or more ethylenically unsaturated bonds, more preferably a compound containing two or more, still more preferably a compound containing three or more, and particularly a compound containing four or more. preferable. The upper limit is, for example, 15 or less. Ethylenically unsaturated groups include, for example, vinyl groups, (meth)allyl groups, and (meth)acryloyl groups.
 重合性低分子化合物としては、例えば、特開2008-260927号公報の段落[0050]、及び、特開2015-68893号公報の段落[0040]に記載されている化合物を援用でき、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 As the polymerizable low-molecular-weight compound, for example, the compounds described in paragraph [0050] of JP-A-2008-260927 and paragraph [0040] of JP-A-2015-68893 can be used. is incorporated herein.
 重合性低分子化合物は、例えば、モノマー、プレポリマー、オリゴマー、及び、これらの混合物、並びに、これらの多量体等の化学的形態のいずれであってもよい。
 重合性低分子化合物は、3~15官能の(メタ)アクリレート化合物が好ましく、3~6官能の(メタ)アクリレート化合物がより好ましい。
Polymerizable low-molecular-weight compounds may be in any chemical form such as monomers, prepolymers, oligomers, mixtures thereof, and polymers thereof.
The polymerizable low-molecular compound is preferably a 3- to 15-functional (meth)acrylate compound, more preferably a 3- to 6-functional (meth)acrylate compound.
 重合性低分子化合物は、エチレン性不飽和基を1個以上含有する、常圧下で100℃以上の沸点を持つ化合物も好ましい。例えば、特開2013-29760号公報の段落[0227]、及び、特開2008-292970号公報の段落[0254]~[0257]に記載の化合物を援用でき、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 The polymerizable low-molecular-weight compound is also preferably a compound containing one or more ethylenically unsaturated groups and having a boiling point of 100°C or higher under normal pressure. For example, the compounds described in paragraph [0227] of JP-A-2013-29760 and paragraphs [0254] to [0257] of JP-A-2008-292970 can be used, and the contents thereof are incorporated herein. be
 重合性低分子化合物は、ジペンタエリスリトールトリアクリレート(市販品としては、例えば、KAYARAD D-330;日本化薬株式会社製)、ジペンタエリスリトールテトラアクリレート(市販品としては、例えば、KAYARAD D-320;日本化薬株式会社製)、ジペンタエリスリトールペンタ(メタ)アクリレート(市販品としては、例えば、KAYARAD D-310;日本化薬株式会社製)、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサ(メタ)アクリレート(市販品としては、例えば、KAYARAD DPHA;日本化薬株式会社製、A-DPH-12E;新中村化学株式会社製)、及び、これらの(メタ)アクリロイル基がエチレングリコール残基又はプロピレングリコール残基を介している構造(例えば、サートマー社から市販されている、SR454、SR499)が好ましい。これらのオリゴマータイプも使用できる。また、NKエステルA-TMMT(ペンタエリスリトールテトラアクリレート、新中村化学株式会社製)、KAYARAD RP-1040、KAYARAD DPEA-12LT、KAYARAD DPHA LT、KAYARAD RP-3060、及び、KAYARAD DPEA-12(いずれも商品名、日本化薬株式会社製)を使用してもよい。また、重合性低分子化合物は、化合物中に(メタ)アクリロイル基とウレタン結合との両方を有する、ウレタン(メタ)アクリレート系化合物を使用してもよく、例えば、KAYARAD DPHA-40H(商品名、日本化薬株式会社製)を使用してもよい。
 以下に好ましい重合性低分子化合物の態様を示す。
Polymerizable low-molecular-weight compounds include dipentaerythritol triacrylate (commercially available, for example, KAYARAD D-330; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol tetraacrylate (commercially available, for example, KAYARAD D-320 Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate (commercially available, for example, KAYARAD D-310; Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate (commercially available , for example, KAYARAD DPHA; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., A-DPH-12E; manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), and these (meth)acryloyl groups are via ethylene glycol residues or propylene glycol residues (eg, SR454, SR499, commercially available from Sartomer) are preferred. These oligomeric types can also be used. In addition, NK ester A-TMMT (pentaerythritol tetraacrylate, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), KAYARAD RP-1040, KAYARAD DPEA-12LT, KAYARAD DPHA LT, KAYARAD RP-3060, and KAYARAD DPEA-12 (all products (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) may also be used. In addition, the polymerizable low-molecular-weight compound may be a urethane (meth)acrylate compound having both a (meth)acryloyl group and a urethane bond in the compound. manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) may be used.
Preferred embodiments of the polymerizable low-molecular compound are shown below.
 重合性低分子化合物は、カルボン酸基、スルホン酸基、及び、リン酸基等の酸基を有していてもよい。酸基を含有する重合性低分子化合物は、脂肪族ポリヒドロキシ化合物と不飽和カルボン酸とのエステルが好ましく、脂肪族ポリヒドロキシ化合物の未反応の水酸基に非芳香族カルボン酸無水物を反応させて酸基を持たせた重合性低分子化合物がより好ましく、このエステルにおいて、脂肪族ポリヒドロキシ化合物がペンタエリスリトール及び/又はジペンタエリスリトールである化合物が更に好ましい。市販品としては、例えば、東亞合成社製の、アロニックスTO-2349、M-305、M-510、及び、M-520が挙げられる。 The polymerizable low-molecular-weight compound may have acid groups such as carboxylic acid groups, sulfonic acid groups, and phosphoric acid groups. The polymerizable low-molecular-weight compound containing an acid group is preferably an ester of an aliphatic polyhydroxy compound and an unsaturated carboxylic acid. A polymerizable low-molecular-weight compound having an acid group is more preferable, and in this ester, a compound in which the aliphatic polyhydroxy compound is pentaerythritol and/or dipentaerythritol is more preferable. Commercially available products include, for example, Aronix TO-2349, M-305, M-510 and M-520 manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.
 酸基を含有する重合性低分子化合物の酸価は、0.1~40mgKOH/gが好ましく、5~30mgKOH/gがより好ましい。重合性低分子化合物の酸価が0.1mgKOH/g以上であれば、現像溶解特性が良好であり、40mgKOH/g以下であれば、製造及び/又は取扱い上、有利である。更には、光重合性能が良好で、硬化性に優れる。 The acid value of the polymerizable low-molecular compound containing an acid group is preferably 0.1-40 mgKOH/g, more preferably 5-30 mgKOH/g. When the acid value of the polymerizable low-molecular-weight compound is 0.1 mgKOH/g or more, the development dissolution property is good, and when it is 40 mgKOH/g or less, it is advantageous in terms of production and/or handling. Furthermore, the photopolymerization performance is good and the curability is excellent.
 重合性低分子化合物は、カプロラクトン構造を含有する化合物も好ましい態様である。
 カプロラクトン構造を含有する化合物としては、例えば、分子内にカプロラクトン構造を含有する限り特に制限されないが、例えば、トリメチロールエタン、ジトリメチロールエタン、トリメチロールプロパン、ジトリメチロールプロパン、ペンタエリスリトール、ジペンタエリスリトール、トリペンタエリスリトール、グリセリン、ジグリセロール、及び、トリメチロールメラミン等の多価アルコールと、(メタ)アクリル酸及びε-カプロラクトンとをエステル化して得られる、ε-カプロラクトン変性多官能(メタ)アクリレートが挙げられる。中でも、下記式(Z-1)で表されるカプロラクトン構造を含有する化合物が好ましい。
A preferred embodiment of the polymerizable low-molecular-weight compound is a compound containing a caprolactone structure.
Examples of compounds containing a caprolactone structure are not particularly limited as long as they contain a caprolactone structure in the molecule. Examples include trimethylolethane, ditrimethylolethane, trimethylolpropane, ditrimethylolpropane, pentaerythritol, dipentaerythritol, Examples include ε-caprolactone-modified polyfunctional (meth)acrylates obtained by esterifying polyhydric alcohols such as tripentaerythritol, glycerin, diglycerol, and trimethylolmelamine with (meth)acrylic acid and ε-caprolactone. be done. Among them, a compound containing a caprolactone structure represented by the following formula (Z-1) is preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
 式(Z-1)中、6個のRは全てが下記式(Z-2)で表される基であるか、又は6個のRのうち1~5個が下記式(Z-2)で表される基であり、残余が下記式(Z-3)で表される基である。 In formula (Z-1), all six R are groups represented by the following formula (Z-2), or 1 to 5 of the six R are the following formula (Z-2) and the remainder is a group represented by the following formula (Z-3).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
 式(Z-2)中、Rは水素原子又はメチル基を表し、mは1又は2の数を表し、*は結合位置を表す。 In formula (Z-2), R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, m represents the number of 1 or 2, and * represents a bonding position.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
 式(Z-3)中、Rは水素原子又はメチル基を表し、「*」は結合位置を表す。 In formula (Z-3), R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and "*" represents a bonding position.
 カプロラクトン構造を含有する重合性低分子化合物は、例えば、日本化薬からKAYARAD DPCAシリーズとして市販されており、DPCA-20(上記式(Z-1)~(Z-3)においてm=1、式(Z-2)で表される基の数=2、Rが全て水素原子である化合物)、DPCA-30(同式、m=1、式(Z-2)で表される基の数=3、Rが全て水素原子である化合物)、DPCA-60(同式、m=1、式(Z-2)で表される基の数=6、Rが全て水素原子である化合物)、及び、DPCA-120(同式においてm=2、式(Z-2)で表される基の数=6、Rが全て水素原子である化合物)が挙げられる。また、カプロラクトン構造を含有する重合性低分子化合物の市販品としては、例えば、東亞合成株式会社製M-350(商品名)(トリメチロールプロパントリアクリレート)も挙げられる。 Polymerizable low-molecular-weight compounds containing a caprolactone structure, for example, are commercially available from Nippon Kayaku as KAYARAD DPCA series, DPCA-20 (m = 1 in the above formulas (Z-1) to (Z-3), formula Number of groups represented by (Z-2) = 2, compound in which all R 1 are hydrogen atoms), DPCA-30 (same formula, m = 1, number of groups represented by formula (Z-2) = 3, a compound in which all R 1 are hydrogen atoms), DPCA-60 (the same formula, m = 1, the number of groups represented by formula (Z-2) = 6, a compound in which all R 1 are hydrogen atoms ), and DPCA-120 (a compound in which m = 2, the number of groups represented by formula (Z-2) = 6, and all R 1 are hydrogen atoms). Commercially available polymerizable low-molecular-weight compounds containing a caprolactone structure include, for example, M-350 (trade name) (trimethylolpropane triacrylate) manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.
 重合性低分子化合物は、下記式(Z-4)又は式(Z-5)で表される化合物も使用できる。 A compound represented by the following formula (Z-4) or (Z-5) can also be used as the polymerizable low-molecular compound.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
 式(Z-4)及び式(Z-5)中、Eは、-((CHCHO)-、又は((CHCH(CH)O)-を表し、yは、0~10の整数を表し、Xは、(メタ)アクリロイル基、水素原子、又はカルボン酸基を表す。
 式(Z-4)中、(メタ)アクリロイル基の合計は3個又は4個であり、mは0~10の整数を表し、各mの合計は0~40の整数である。
 式(Z-5)中、(メタ)アクリロイル基の合計は5個又は6個であり、nは0~10の整数を表し、各nの合計は0~60の整数である。
In formulas (Z-4) and (Z-5), E represents -((CH 2 ) y CH 2 O)- or ((CH 2 ) y CH(CH 3 )O)-, and y represents an integer of 0 to 10, and X represents a (meth)acryloyl group, a hydrogen atom, or a carboxylic acid group.
In formula (Z-4), the total number of (meth)acryloyl groups is 3 or 4, m represents an integer of 0-10, and the sum of m is an integer of 0-40.
In formula (Z-5), the total number of (meth)acryloyl groups is 5 or 6, n represents an integer of 0-10, and the sum of each n is an integer of 0-60.
 式(Z-4)中、mは、0~6の整数が好ましく、0~4の整数がより好ましい。
 また、各mの合計は、2~40の整数が好ましく、2~16の整数がより好ましく、4~8の整数が更に好ましい。
 式(Z-5)中、nは、0~6の整数が好ましく、0~4の整数がより好ましい。
 また、各nの合計は、3~60の整数が好ましく、3~24の整数がより好ましく、6~12の整数が更に好ましい。
 また、式(Z-4)又は式(Z-5)中の-((CHCHO)-又は-((CHCH(CH)O)-は、酸素原子側の末端がXに結合する形態が好ましい。
In formula (Z-4), m is preferably an integer of 0-6, more preferably an integer of 0-4.
The sum of m is preferably an integer of 2 to 40, more preferably an integer of 2 to 16, and even more preferably an integer of 4 to 8.
In formula (Z-5), n is preferably an integer of 0-6, more preferably an integer of 0-4.
The sum of n is preferably an integer of 3-60, more preferably an integer of 3-24, and even more preferably an integer of 6-12.
-((CH 2 ) y CH 2 O)- or -((CH 2 ) y CH(CH 3 )O)- in formula (Z-4) or formula (Z-5) is on the oxygen atom side is preferably bound to X.
 式(Z-4)又は式(Z-5)で表される化合物は1種単独で用いてもよいし、2種以上併用してもよい。特に、式(Z-5)において、6個のX全てがアクリロイル基である形態、式(Z-5)において、6個のX全てがアクリロイル基である化合物と、6個のXのうち、少なくとも1個が水素原子ある化合物との混合物である態様が好ましい。このような構成として、現像性をより向上できる。 The compounds represented by formula (Z-4) or formula (Z-5) may be used singly or in combination of two or more. In particular, in formula (Z-5), a form in which all six X are acryloyl groups, a compound in which all six X are acryloyl groups in formula (Z-5), and among six X, A preferred embodiment is a mixture with a compound having at least one hydrogen atom. With such a configuration, the developability can be further improved.
 また、式(Z-4)又は式(Z-5)で表される化合物の重合性低分子化合物中における全含有量は、20質量%以上が好ましく、50質量%以上がより好ましい。
 式(Z-4)又は式(Z-5)で表される化合物の中でも、ペンタエリスリトール誘導体及び/又はジペンタエリスリトール誘導体がより好ましい。
Further, the total content of the compound represented by formula (Z-4) or formula (Z-5) in the polymerizable low-molecular-weight compound is preferably 20% by mass or more, more preferably 50% by mass or more.
Among the compounds represented by formula (Z-4) or formula (Z-5), pentaerythritol derivatives and/or dipentaerythritol derivatives are more preferred.
 また、重合性低分子化合物は、カルド骨格を含有してもよい。
 カルド骨格を含有する重合性低分子化合物は、9,9-ビスアリールフルオレン骨格を含有する重合性低分子化合物が好ましい。
 カルド骨格を含有する重合性低分子化合物としては、例えば、オンコートEXシリーズ(長瀬産業社製)及びオグソール(大阪ガスケミカル社製)が挙げられる。
 重合性低分子化合物は、イソシアヌル酸骨格を中心核として含有する化合物も好ましい。このような重合性低分子化合物としては、例えば、NKエステルA-9300(新中村化学株式会社製)が挙げられる。
 重合性低分子化合物のエチレン性不飽和基の含有量(重合性低分子化合物中のエチレン性不飽和基の数を、重合性低分子化合物の分子量(g/mol)で除した値を意味する)は5.0mmol/g以上が好ましい。上限は、20.0mmol/g以下が好ましい。
Moreover, the polymerizable low-molecular-weight compound may contain a cardo skeleton.
A polymerizable low-molecular-weight compound containing a cardo skeleton is preferably a polymerizable low-molecular-weight compound containing a 9,9-bisarylfluorene skeleton.
Examples of polymerizable low-molecular-weight compounds containing a cardo skeleton include Oncoat EX series (manufactured by Nagase & Co., Ltd.) and Ogsol (manufactured by Osaka Gas Chemicals Co., Ltd.).
The polymerizable low-molecular-weight compound is also preferably a compound containing an isocyanuric acid skeleton as a central nucleus. Examples of such polymerizable low-molecular-weight compounds include NK Ester A-9300 (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.).
The content of ethylenically unsaturated groups in the polymerizable low-molecular-weight compound (meaning the value obtained by dividing the number of ethylenically unsaturated groups in the polymerizable low-molecular-weight compound by the molecular weight (g/mol) of the polymerizable low-molecular-weight compound ) is preferably 5.0 mmol/g or more. The upper limit is preferably 20.0 mmol/g or less.
〔色材〕
 本発明の組成物は、色材を含有することが好ましい。
 なお、色材は、上述した無機粒子とは異なる材料である。
 色材としては、例えば、有彩色着色剤、無彩色着色剤及び赤外線吸収剤が挙げられる。本発明において、有彩色着色剤とは、白色着色剤及び黒色着色剤以外の着色剤を意味する。有彩色着色剤は、波長400nm以上650nm未満の範囲に吸収を有する着色剤が好ましい。
 色材は、有彩色着色剤及び無彩色着色剤からなる群から選択される少なくとも1種を含むことが好ましく、有彩色着色剤及び黒色着色剤からなる群から選択される少なくとも1種を含むことがより好ましく、引き置いた際のパターン形状がより優れる点から、有機顔料の有彩色着色剤及び無機顔料の黒色着色剤からなる群から選択される少なくとも1種を含むことが更に好ましく、カーボンブラック以外の無機顔料の黒色着色剤を含むことが特に好ましい。
[Color material]
The composition of the invention preferably contains a coloring material.
Note that the coloring material is a material different from the inorganic particles described above.
Colorants include, for example, chromatic colorants, achromatic colorants, and infrared absorbers. In the present invention, a chromatic colorant means a colorant other than a white colorant and a black colorant. The chromatic colorant is preferably a colorant that absorbs in a wavelength range of 400 nm or more and less than 650 nm.
The colorant preferably contains at least one selected from the group consisting of chromatic colorants and achromatic colorants, and contains at least one selected from the group consisting of chromatic colorants and black colorants. is more preferable, and from the viewpoint that the pattern shape when placed is more excellent, it is more preferable to contain at least one selected from the group consisting of a chromatic colorant of an organic pigment and a black colorant of an inorganic pigment, and carbon black It is particularly preferred to include black colorants other than inorganic pigments.
 色材は、1種単独で使用してもよく、2種以上を使用してもよい。
 色材の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対して、30~80質量%が好ましい。下限値としては、色分離性がより優れる点から、40質量%以上がより好ましく、44質量%以上が更に好ましく、48質量%以上が特に好ましい。上限値としては、パターン形状の精度がより向上する点から、70質量%未満がより好ましく、65質量%以下が更に好ましい。色材を2種以上含む場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
One type of colorant may be used alone, or two or more types may be used.
The content of the coloring material is preferably 30 to 80% by mass based on the total solid content of the composition. The lower limit is more preferably 40% by mass or more, still more preferably 44% by mass or more, and particularly preferably 48% by mass or more, from the viewpoint of better color separation. The upper limit is more preferably less than 70% by mass, and even more preferably 65% by mass or less, from the viewpoint of further improving the accuracy of the pattern shape. When two or more coloring materials are included, the total amount thereof preferably falls within the above range.
 組成物中において、修飾無機粒子の含有量に対する色材の含有量の質量比(色材の含有量/修飾無機粒子の含有量)の下限値は、色分離がより優れる点から、1以上が好ましく、2以上がより好ましく、3以上が更に好ましく、5以上が特に好ましい。上限値は、透過率がより優れる点から、16以下が好ましく、14以下がより好ましく、13以下が更に好ましく、12以下が特に好ましい。特に、上記質量比が2~14の範囲にあれば、耐湿試験後の剥がれの発生をより抑制できる。 In the composition, the lower limit of the mass ratio of the content of the coloring material to the content of the modified inorganic particles (content of the coloring material/content of the modified inorganic particles) is 1 or more from the viewpoint of better color separation. It is preferably 2 or more, more preferably 3 or more, and particularly preferably 5 or more. The upper limit is preferably 16 or less, more preferably 14 or less, even more preferably 13 or less, and particularly preferably 12 or less, from the viewpoint of better transmittance. In particular, if the mass ratio is in the range of 2 to 14, the occurrence of peeling after the moisture resistance test can be further suppressed.
 色材の含有量に対する、修飾無機粒子、樹脂、重合開始剤及び重合性化合物の合計含有量の質量比(修飾無機粒子、樹脂、重合開始剤及び重合性化合物の合計含有量/色材の含有量)は、0.01~2.00が好ましく、0.10~1.80がより好ましく、0.20~1.00が更に好ましい。 Mass ratio of the total content of modified inorganic particles, resin, polymerization initiator and polymerizable compound to the content of coloring material (total content of modified inorganic particles, resin, polymerization initiator and polymerizable compound / content of coloring material amount) is preferably 0.01 to 2.00, more preferably 0.10 to 1.80, even more preferably 0.20 to 1.00.
<有彩色着色剤>
 有彩色着色剤としては、赤色着色剤、緑色着色剤、青色着色剤、黄色着色剤、紫色着色剤及びオレンジ色着色剤が挙げられる。有彩色着色剤は、顔料であってもよく、染料であってもよい。顔料と染料とを併用してもよい。また、顔料は、無機顔料及び有機顔料のいずれでもよく、無機顔料が好ましい。
 また、顔料には、無機顔料又は有機-無機顔料の一部を有機発色団で置換した材料を用いることもできる。無機顔料又は有機-無機顔料を有機発色団で置換することで、色相設計をしやすくできる。
<Chromatic coloring agent>
Chromatic colorants include red colorants, green colorants, blue colorants, yellow colorants, violet colorants and orange colorants. A chromatic colorant may be a pigment or a dye. A pigment and a dye may be used in combination. Moreover, the pigment may be either an inorganic pigment or an organic pigment, and an inorganic pigment is preferable.
As the pigment, an inorganic pigment or a material in which a part of an organic-inorganic pigment is replaced with an organic chromophore can also be used. By replacing an inorganic pigment or an organic-inorganic pigment with an organic chromophore, hue design can be facilitated.
 顔料の平均一次粒子径は、1~200nmが好ましい。下限は5nm以上がより好ましく、10nm以上が更に好ましい。上限は、180nm以下がより好ましく、150nm以下が更に好ましく、100nm以下が特に好ましい。顔料の平均一次粒子径が上記範囲であれば、組成物中における顔料の分散安定性が良好である。なお、本発明において、顔料の一次粒子径は、顔料の一次粒子を透過型電子顕微鏡により観察し、得られた画像写真から求めることができる。具体的には、顔料の一次粒子の投影面積を求め、それに対応する円相当径を顔料の一次粒子径として算出する。また、本発明における平均一次粒子径は、400個の顔料の一次粒子についての一次粒子径の算術平均値とする。また、顔料の一次粒子とは、凝集のない独立した粒子をいう。 The average primary particle size of the pigment is preferably 1 to 200 nm. The lower limit is more preferably 5 nm or more, and even more preferably 10 nm or more. The upper limit is more preferably 180 nm or less, still more preferably 150 nm or less, and particularly preferably 100 nm or less. When the average primary particle size of the pigment is within the above range, the dispersion stability of the pigment in the composition is good. In the present invention, the primary particle diameter of the pigment can be determined from the image photograph obtained by observing the primary particles of the pigment with a transmission electron microscope. Specifically, the projected area of the primary particles of the pigment is obtained, and the corresponding circle equivalent diameter is calculated as the primary particle diameter of the pigment. Further, the average primary particle size in the present invention is the arithmetic mean value of the primary particle sizes of 400 primary particles of the pigment. Further, the primary particles of the pigment refer to independent particles without agglomeration.
 有彩色着色剤は、顔料を含むものであることが好ましい。
 有彩色着色剤中における顔料の含有量は、50質量%以上であることが好ましく、70質量%以上であることがより好ましく、80質量%以上であることが更に好ましく、90質量%以上であることが特に好ましい。上限は、100質量%以下であることが好ましい。
 顔料としては、以下に示すものが挙げられる。
The chromatic colorant preferably contains a pigment.
The content of the pigment in the chromatic colorant is preferably 50% by mass or more, more preferably 70% by mass or more, still more preferably 80% by mass or more, and 90% by mass or more. is particularly preferred. The upper limit is preferably 100% by mass or less.
Examples of pigments include those shown below.
 カラーインデックス(C.I.)Pigment(ピグメント) Yellow 1,2,3,4,5,6,10,11,12,13,14,15,16,17,18,20,24,31,32,34,35,35:1,36,36:1,37,37:1,40,42,43,53,55,60,61,62,63,65,73,74,77,81,83,86,93,94,95,97,98,100,101,104,106,108,109,110,113,114,115,116,117,118,119,120,123,125,126,127,128,129,137,138,139,147,148,150,151,152,153,154,155,156,161,162,164,166,167,168,169,170,171,172,173,174,175,176,177,179,180,181,182,185,187,188,193,194,199,213,214,215,228,231,232(メチン系),233(キノリン系),234(アミノケトン系),235(アミノケトン系),236(アミノケトン系)等(以上、黄色顔料)、
 C.I.Pigment Orange 2,5,13,16,17:1,31,34,36,38,43,46,48,49,51,52,55,59,60,61,62,64,71,73等(以上、オレンジ色顔料);
 C.I.Pigment Red 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,9,10,14,17,22,23,31,38,41,48:1,48:2,48:3,48:4,49,49:1,49:2,52:1,52:2,53:1,57:1,60:1,63:1,66,67,81:1,81:2,81:3,83,88,90,105,112,119,122,123,144,146,149,150,155,166,168,169,170,171,172,175,176,177,178,179,184,185,187,188,190,200,202,206,207,208,209,210,216,220,224,226,242,246,254,255,264,269,270,272,279,294(キサンテン系、Organo Ultramarine、Bluish Red),295(アゾ系),296(アゾ系),297(アミノケトン系)等(以上、赤色顔料);
 C.I.Pigment Green 7,10,36,37,58,59,62,63,64(フタロシアニン系),65(フタロシアニン系),66(フタロシアニン系)等(以上、緑色顔料);
 C.I.Pigment Violet 1,19,23,27,32,37,42,60(トリアリールメタン系),61(キサンテン系)等(以上、紫色顔料);
 C.I.Pigment Blue 1,2,15,15:1,15:2,15:3,15:4,15:6,16,22,29,60,64,66,79,80,87(モノアゾ系),88(メチン系)等(以上、青色顔料)。
Color Index (C.I.) Pigment Yellow 1,2,3,4,5,6,10,11,12,13,14,15,16,17,18,20,24,31,32 , 34, 35, 35: 1, 36, 36: 1, 37, 37: 1, 40, 42, 43, 53, 55, 60, 61, 62, 63, 65, 73, 74, 77, 81, 83 , 86, 93, 94, 95, 97, 98, 100, 101, 104, 106, 108, 109, 110, 113, 114, 115, 116, 117, 118, 119, 120, 123, 125, 126, 127 , 128, 129, 137, 138, 139, 147, 148, 150, 151, 152, 153, 154, 155, 156, 161, 162, 164, 166, 167, 168, 169, 170, 171, 172, 173 , 174, 175, 176, 177, 179, 180, 181, 182, 185, 187, 188, 193, 194, 199, 213, 214, 215, 228, 231, 232 (methine), 233 (quinoline) , 234 (aminoketone-based), 235 (aminoketone-based), 236 (aminoketone-based), etc. (above, yellow pigment),
C. I. Pigment Orange 2, 5, 13, 16, 17: 1, 31, 34, 36, 38, 43, 46, 48, 49, 51, 52, 55, 59, 60, 61, 62, 64, 71, 73, etc. (above, orange pigment);
C. I. Pigment Red 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 14, 17, 22, 23, 31, 38, 41, 48: 1, 48: 2, 48: 3, 48: 4, 49, 49:1, 49:2, 52:1, 52:2, 53:1, 57:1, 60:1, 63:1, 66, 67, 81:1, 81:2, 81:3, 83,88,90,105,112,119,122,123,144,146,149,150,155,166,168,169,170,171,172,175,176,177,178,179,184, 185,187,188,190,200,202,206,207,208,209,210,216,220,224,226,242,246,254,255,264,269,270,272,279,294 ( xanthene-based, Organo Ultramarine, Bluish Red), 295 (azo-based), 296 (azo-based), 297 (aminoketone-based), etc. (all red pigments);
C. I. Pigment Green 7, 10, 36, 37, 58, 59, 62, 63, 64 (phthalocyanine), 65 (phthalocyanine), 66 (phthalocyanine), etc. (green pigments);
C. I. Pigment Violet 1, 19, 23, 27, 32, 37, 42, 60 (triarylmethane-based), 61 (xanthene-based), etc. (above, purple pigment);
C. I. Pigment Blue 1,2,15,15:1,15:2,15:3,15:4,15:6,16,22,29,60,64,66,79,80,87 (monoazo), 88 (methine-based), etc. (above, blue pigments);
 また、緑色顔料として、1分子中のハロゲン原子数が平均10~14個であり、臭素原子数が平均8~12個であり、塩素原子数が平均2~5個であるハロゲン化亜鉛フタロシアニン顔料を用いることもできる。具体例としては、国際公開第2015/118720号に記載の化合物が挙げられる。また、緑色顔料として中国特許出願第106909027号明細書に記載の化合物、国際公開第2012/102395号に記載のリン酸エステルを配位子として有するフタロシアニン化合物等を用いることもできる。 Further, as a green pigment, a halogenated zinc phthalocyanine pigment having an average number of halogen atoms of 10 to 14, an average number of bromine atoms of 8 to 12, and an average number of chlorine atoms of 2 to 5 per molecule. can also be used. Specific examples include compounds described in International Publication No. 2015/118720. In addition, as green pigments, compounds described in Chinese Patent Application No. 106909027, phthalocyanine compounds having phosphoric acid esters as ligands described in WO 2012/102395, and the like can also be used.
 また、青色顔料として、リン原子を有するアルミニウムフタロシアニン化合物を用いることもできる。具体例としては、特開2012-247591号公報の段落[0022]~[0030]、特開2011-157478号公報の段落[0047]に記載の化合物が挙げられる。 An aluminum phthalocyanine compound having a phosphorus atom can also be used as a blue pigment. Specific examples include compounds described in paragraphs [0022] to [0030] of JP-A-2012-247591 and paragraph [0047] of JP-A-2011-157478.
 また、黄色顔料として、特開2008-074985号公報に記載されている顔料、特開2008-074987号公報に記載されている化合物、特開2013-061622号公報に記載されているキノフタロン化合物、特開2013-181015号公報に記載されているキノフタロン化合物、特開2014-085565号公報に記載されている着色剤、特開2016-145282号公報に記載されている顔料、特開2017-201003号公報に記載されている顔料、特開2017-197719号公報に記載されている顔料、特開2017-171912号公報の段落[0011]~[0062]、[0137]~[0276]に記載されている顔料、特開2017-171913号公報の段落[0010]~[0062]、[0138]~[0295]に記載されている顔料、特開2017-171914号公報の段落[0011]~[0062]、[0139]~[0190]に記載されている顔料、特開2017-171915号公報の段落[0010]~[0065]、[0142]~[0222]に記載されている顔料、特開2017-197640号公報に記載されているキノフタロン化合物、特開2018-040835号公報に記載されているキノフタロン系顔料、特開2018-203798号公報に記載されている顔料、特開2018-062578号公報に記載されている顔料、特開2018-155881号公報に記載されているキノフタロン系黄色顔料、特開2018-062644号公報に記載されている化合物、特許6432077号公報に記載されているキノフタロン化合物、及び、特許6443711号公報に記載されている顔料、を用いることもできる。 Further, as the yellow pigment, pigments described in JP-A-2008-074985, compounds described in JP-A-2008-074987, quinophthalone compounds described in JP-A-2013-061622, particularly A quinophthalone compound described in JP-A-2013-181015, a coloring agent described in JP-A-2014-085565, a pigment described in JP-A-2016-145282, JP-A-2017-201003. The pigments described in JP-A-2017-197719, the pigments described in JP-A-2017-171912, paragraphs [0011] to [0062], [0137] to [0276] pigments, pigments described in paragraphs [0010] to [0062] and [0138] to [0295] of JP-A-2017-171913, paragraphs [0011] to [0062] of JP-A-2017-171914, Pigments described in [0139] to [0190], paragraphs [0010] to [0065], [0142] to [0222] of JP-A-2017-171915, JP-A-2017-197640 A quinophthalone compound described in JP-A-2018-040835, a quinophthalone-based pigment described in JP-A-2018-040835, a pigment described in JP-A-2018-203798, and a JP-A-2018-062578. pigments, quinophthalone-based yellow pigments described in JP-A-2018-155881, compounds described in JP-A-2018-062644, quinophthalone compounds described in JP 6432077, and patents Pigments described in JP-A-6443711 can also be used.
 また、黄色顔料として、特開2018-062644号公報に記載の化合物を用いることもできる。この化合物は顔料誘導体としても使用可能である。 In addition, the compound described in JP-A-2018-062644 can also be used as the yellow pigment. This compound can also be used as a pigment derivative.
 赤色顔料として、特開2017-201384号公報に記載の構造中に少なくとも1つ臭素原子が置換したジケトピロロピロール化合物、特許第6248838号の段落[0016]~[0022]に記載のジケトピロロピロール化合物、国際公開第2012/102399号に記載のジケトピロロピロール化合物、国際公開第2012/117965号に記載のジケトピロロピロール化合物、特開2012-229344号公報に記載のナフトールアゾ化合物等を用いることもできる。また、赤色顔料として、芳香族環に対して、酸素原子、硫黄原子又は窒素原子が結合した基が導入された芳香族環基がジケトピロロピロール骨格に結合した構造を有する化合物を用いることもできる。 As a red pigment, a diketopyrrolopyrrole compound in which at least one bromine atom is substituted in the structure described in JP-A-2017-201384, a diketopyrrolo described in paragraphs [0016] to [0022] of Japanese Patent No. 6248838 Pyrrole compounds, diketopyrrolopyrrole compounds described in WO 2012/102399, diketopyrrolopyrrole compounds described in WO 2012/117965, naphthol azo compounds described in JP 2012-229344, etc. can also be used. In addition, as a red pigment, a compound having a structure in which an aromatic ring group in which a group having an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom or a nitrogen atom is bonded to an aromatic ring is bonded to a diketopyrrolopyrrole skeleton may also be used. can.
 また、赤色顔料として、特許第6516119号及び特許第6525101号に記載の化合物を用いることもできる。この化合物は顔料誘導体としても使用可能である。 In addition, the compounds described in Japanese Patent Nos. 6516119 and 6525101 can also be used as red pigments. This compound can also be used as a pigment derivative.
 本発明において、有彩色着色剤には染料を用いることもできる。染料としては特に制限はなく、公知の染料が使用できる。例えば、ピラゾールアゾ系、アニリノアゾ系、トリアリールメタン系、アントラキノン系、アントラピリドン系、ベンジリデン系、オキソノール系、ピラゾロトリアゾールアゾ系、ピリドンアゾ系、シアニン系、フェノチアジン系、ピロロピラゾールアゾメチン系、キサンテン系、フタロシアニン系、ベンゾピラン系、インジゴ系、及び、ピロメテン系等の染料が挙げられる。また、特開2012-158649号公報に記載のチアゾール化合物、特開2011-184493号公報に記載のアゾ化合物、特開2011-145540号公報に記載のアゾ化合物も好ましく用いることができる。また、黄色染料として、例えば、特開2013-054339号公報の段落[0011]~[0034]に記載のキノフタロン化合物及び特開2014-026228号公報の段落[0013]~[0058]に記載のキノフタロン化合物を用いることもできる。 In the present invention, dyes can also be used as chromatic colorants. The dye is not particularly limited, and known dyes can be used. For example, pyrazole azo, anilinoazo, triarylmethane, anthraquinone, anthrapyridone, benzylidene, oxonol, pyrazolotriazole azo, pyridone azo, cyanine, phenothiazine, pyrrolopyrazole azomethine, xanthene, Phthalocyanine-based, benzopyran-based, indigo-based, and pyrromethene-based dyes can be used. Further, thiazole compounds described in JP-A-2012-158649, azo compounds described in JP-A-2011-184493, and azo compounds described in JP-A-2011-145540 can also be preferably used. Further, as yellow dyes, for example, quinophthalone compounds described in paragraphs [0011] to [0034] of JP-A-2013-054339 and quinophthalones described in paragraphs [0013] to [0058] of JP-A-2014-026228 Compounds can also be used.
<無彩色着色剤>
 無彩色着色剤としては、例えば、黒色着色剤及び白色着色剤が挙げられ、黒色着色剤が好ましい。
<Achromatic colorant>
Examples of achromatic colorants include black colorants and white colorants, with black colorants being preferred.
(黒色着色剤)
 黒色着色剤としては、黒色顔料及び黒色染料からなる群から選択される1種以上が挙げられる。
 また、単独では黒色着色剤として使用できない着色剤を複数組み合わせ、全体として黒色になるように調整して黒色着色剤としてもよい。
 例えば、単独では黒色以外の色を有する顔料を複数組み合わせて黒色顔料として使用してもよい。同様に、単独では黒色以外の色を有する染料を複数組み合わせて黒色染料として使用してもよく、単独では黒色以外の色を有する顔料と単独では黒色以外の色を有する染料とを組み合わせて黒色染料として使用してもよい。
(black colorant)
Examples of black colorants include one or more selected from the group consisting of black pigments and black dyes.
In addition, a plurality of coloring agents that cannot be used alone as a black coloring agent may be combined and adjusted so as to be black as a whole, and used as a black coloring agent.
For example, a plurality of pigments having a color other than black alone may be used in combination as a black pigment. Similarly, a plurality of dyes having a color other than black alone may be used in combination as a black dye, and a pigment having a color alone other than black and a dye alone having a color other than black may be combined to form a black dye. may be used as
 本明細書において、黒色着色剤とは、波長400~700nmの全ての範囲にわたって吸収がある色材を意味する。
 より具体的には、例えば、以下に説明する評価基準Zに適合する黒色着色剤が好ましい。
 まず、色材と、透明な樹脂マトリックス(アクリル樹脂等)と、溶剤とを含有し、全固形分に対する色材の含有量が60質量%である組成物を調製する。得られた組成物を、ガラス基板上に、乾燥後の硬化膜の膜厚が1μmになるように塗布し、硬化膜を形成する。乾燥後の硬化膜の遮光性を、分光光度計(日立株式会社製UV-3600等)を用いて評価する。乾燥後の硬化膜の波長400~700nmにおける透過率の最大値が10%未満であれば、上記色材は評価基準Zに適合する黒色着色剤であると判断できる。黒色着色剤は、評価基準Zにおいて、乾燥後の硬化膜の波長400~700nmにおける透過率の最大値が8%未満であることがより好ましく、5%未満であることが更に好ましい。
As used herein, a black colorant means a colorant that absorbs over the entire wavelength range of 400 to 700 nm.
More specifically, for example, a black colorant that meets the evaluation criteria Z described below is preferred.
First, a composition containing a coloring material, a transparent resin matrix (acrylic resin or the like), and a solvent, and having a coloring material content of 60% by mass relative to the total solid content is prepared. The resulting composition is applied onto a glass substrate so that the thickness of the cured film after drying is 1 μm to form a cured film. The light-shielding property of the cured film after drying is evaluated using a spectrophotometer (UV-3600 manufactured by Hitachi, Ltd., etc.). If the maximum transmittance of the dried cured film at a wavelength of 400 to 700 nm is less than 10%, the coloring material can be judged to be a black coloring material that meets the evaluation criteria Z. Regarding the black colorant, the maximum value of the transmittance of the cured film after drying at a wavelength of 400 to 700 nm is more preferably less than 8%, more preferably less than 5%, in the evaluation criteria Z.
・黒色顔料
 黒色顔料としては、各種公知の黒色顔料を使用できる。黒色顔料は、無機顔料であっても有機顔料であってもよい。
 黒色着色剤は、遮光膜の耐光性がより優れる点から、黒色顔料が好ましく、無機顔料がより好ましい。
- Black pigment Various known black pigments can be used as the black pigment. The black pigment may be an inorganic pigment or an organic pigment.
The black colorant is preferably a black pigment, more preferably an inorganic pigment, from the viewpoint that the light resistance of the light shielding film is more excellent.
 黒色顔料としては、単独で黒色を発現する顔料が好ましく、単独で黒色を発現し、かつ、赤外線を吸収する顔料がより好ましい。
 ここで、赤外線を吸収する黒色顔料は、例えば、赤外領域(好ましくは、波長650~1300nm)の波長領域に吸収を有する。波長675~900nmの波長領域に極大吸収波長を有する黒色顔料も好ましい。
As the black pigment, a pigment that expresses black color by itself is preferable, and a pigment that expresses black color by itself and absorbs infrared rays is more preferable.
Here, the black pigment that absorbs infrared rays has absorption in, for example, the wavelength region of the infrared region (preferably wavelength of 650 to 1300 nm). A black pigment having a maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 675 to 900 nm is also preferred.
 黒色顔料の粒子径は、特に制限されないが、ハンドリング性と組成物の経時安定性(黒色顔料が沈降しない)とのバランスがより優れる点から、5~100nmが好ましく、5~50nmがより好ましく、5~30nmが更に好ましい。 The particle size of the black pigment is not particularly limited, but is preferably 5 to 100 nm, more preferably 5 to 50 nm, from the viewpoint of better balance between handling properties and the stability of the composition over time (black pigment does not settle). 5 to 30 nm is more preferred.
 なお、本明細書において黒色顔料の粒子径は、以下の方法により測定した粒子の平均一次粒子径を意味する。平均一次粒子径は、透過型電子顕微鏡(Transmission Electron Microscope、TEM)を用いて測定できる。透過型電子顕微鏡としては、例えば、日立ハイテクノロジーズ社製の透過型顕微鏡HT7700を使用できる。
 透過型電子顕微鏡を用いて得た粒子像の最大長(Dmax:粒子画像の輪郭上の2点における最大長さ)、及び最大長垂直長(DV-max:最大長に平行な2本の直線で画像を挟んだ時、2直線間を垂直に結ぶ最短の長さ)を測長し、その相乗平均値(Dmax×DV-max)1/2を粒子径とした。この方法で100個の粒子の粒子径を測定し、その算術平均値を粒子の平均一次粒子径とした。
In this specification, the particle size of the black pigment means the average primary particle size of particles measured by the following method. The average primary particle size can be measured using a transmission electron microscope (TEM). As a transmission electron microscope, for example, a transmission microscope HT7700 manufactured by Hitachi High-Technologies Corporation can be used.
The maximum length of the particle image obtained using a transmission electron microscope (Dmax: the maximum length at two points on the contour of the particle image) and the maximum vertical length (DV-max: two straight lines parallel to the maximum length The shortest length vertically connecting two straight lines when an image is sandwiched between two straight lines was measured, and the geometric mean value (Dmax×DV-max) 1/2 was taken as the particle diameter. The particle diameters of 100 particles were measured by this method, and the arithmetic average value was taken as the average primary particle diameter of the particles.
・黒色着色剤として使用される無機顔料
 黒色着色剤として使用される無機顔料としては、遮光性を有し、無機化合物を含有する粒子であれば、特に制限されないが、公知の無機顔料が使用できる。
 遮光膜の低反射性及び遮光性がより優れる点から、黒色着色剤としては、無機顔料が好ましい。
Inorganic pigment used as black colorant The inorganic pigment used as the black colorant is not particularly limited as long as it has a light-shielding property and contains an inorganic compound, but known inorganic pigments can be used. .
Inorganic pigments are preferable as the black colorant because the light-shielding film has better low reflectivity and light-shielding properties.
 無機顔料としては、チタン(Ti)及びジルコニウム(Zr)等の第4族の金属元素、バナジウム(V)及びニオブ(Nb)等の第5族の金属元素、イットリウム(Y)、アルミニウム(Al)、コバルト(Co)、クロム(Cr)、銅(Cu)、マンガン(Mn)、ルテニウム(Ru)、鉄(Fe)、ニッケル(Ni)、錫(Sn)、並びに、銀(Ag)からなる群から選択される1種又は2種以上の金属元素を含有する、金属酸化物、金属窒化物及び金属酸窒化物が挙げられる。
 なかでも、チタン(Ti)、ジルコニウム(Zr)、バナジウム(V)、イットリウム(Y)、アルミニウム(Al)及び鉄(Fe))からなる群から選択される1種又は2種以上の金属元素を含有する、金属酸化物、金属窒化物及び金属酸窒化物が好ましい。つまり、無機顔料は、2種以上の金属原子を含有してもよい。
 上記金属酸化物、金属窒化物及び金属酸窒化物としては、更に他の金属原子が混在した粒子を使用してもよい。上記としては、例えば、更に周期表13~17族元素から選択される原子(好ましくは酸素原子、及び/又は、硫黄原子)を含有する金属窒化物含有粒子が使用できる。
 また、上記金属酸化物、金属窒化物及び金属酸窒化物は、無機物及び/又は有機物で被覆していてもよい。
 上記無機物としては、上記無機顔料に含まれる金属原子が挙げられる。
 上記有機物としては、上記疎水性基を有する有機物が挙げられ、シラン化合物が好ましい。
Examples of inorganic pigments include Group 4 metal elements such as titanium (Ti) and zirconium (Zr), Group 5 metal elements such as vanadium (V) and niobium (Nb), yttrium (Y), and aluminum (Al). , cobalt (Co), chromium (Cr), copper (Cu), manganese (Mn), ruthenium (Ru), iron (Fe), nickel (Ni), tin (Sn), and silver (Ag) metal oxides, metal nitrides and metal oxynitrides containing one or more metal elements selected from
Among them, one or more metal elements selected from the group consisting of titanium (Ti), zirconium (Zr), vanadium (V), yttrium (Y), aluminum (Al) and iron (Fe) Containing metal oxides, metal nitrides and metal oxynitrides are preferred. That is, the inorganic pigment may contain two or more metal atoms.
As the metal oxides, metal nitrides and metal oxynitrides, particles in which other metal atoms are mixed may be used. As the above, for example, metal nitride-containing particles further containing atoms (preferably oxygen atoms and/or sulfur atoms) selected from elements of groups 13 to 17 of the periodic table can be used.
Moreover, the metal oxide, metal nitride and metal oxynitride may be coated with an inorganic substance and/or an organic substance.
Examples of the inorganic substance include metal atoms contained in the inorganic pigment.
Examples of the organic substance include organic substances having the hydrophobic group described above, and silane compounds are preferable.
 上記の金属窒化物、金属酸化物又は金属酸窒化物の製造方法としては、所望とする物性を有する黒色顔料が得られるものであれば、特に制限されないが、気相反応法等の公知の製造方法を使用できる。気相反応法としては、電気炉法、及び、熱プラズマ法等が挙げられるが、不純物の混入が少なく、粒子径が揃いやすく、また、生産性が高い点から、熱プラズマ法が好ましい。
 上記の金属窒化物、金属酸化物又は金属酸窒化物には、表面修飾処理が施されていてもよい。例えば、シリコーン基とアルキル基とを併せ持つ表面処理剤で表面修飾処理が施されていてもよい。そのような無機粒子としては、「KTP-09」シリーズ(信越化学工業社製)が挙げられる。
The method for producing the above metal nitride, metal oxide or metal oxynitride is not particularly limited as long as a black pigment having desired physical properties can be obtained. You can use the method. The vapor phase reaction method includes an electric furnace method, a thermal plasma method, and the like, but the thermal plasma method is preferable from the viewpoints of less impurity contamination, easier particle diameter uniformity, and higher productivity.
The metal nitride, metal oxide or metal oxynitride may be subjected to a surface modification treatment. For example, the surface may be modified with a surface treating agent having both a silicone group and an alkyl group. Examples of such inorganic particles include the "KTP-09" series (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.).
 無機顔料としては、例えば、イットリウムを含有する窒化ジルコニウムも挙げられる。
 組成物がイットリウムを含有する窒化ジルコニウムを含有する場合、i線透過率を保ちつつ、可視遮光性を向上できる。
 イットリウムを含有する窒化ジルコニウムの粒子径(平均一次粒子径)は、波長550nm(可視光)における遮光性の低下を抑制できる点から、10~100nmが好ましい。イットリウム含有の窒化ジルコニウム粉末の平均一次粒径は、比表面積の測定値からの球形換算により測定できる。
 なお、イットリウムは、窒化ジルコニウム粉末に対して、固溶した状態で含有される。
 イットリウムを含有する窒化ジルコニウム粉末の濃度を50ppmの分散液としたときの分光透過スペクトルにおいて、波長550nmの光透過率をX1とし、波長365nmの光透過率をX2とするとき、X1は、7.5%以下が好ましく、6.5%以下がより好ましい。X2は、25%以上が好ましく、26%以上がより好ましい。
 X1に対するX2の比(X2/X1)は、3.5以上が好ましく、4.0以上がより好ましい。
Inorganic pigments also include, for example, zirconium nitride containing yttrium.
When the composition contains yttrium-containing zirconium nitride, it is possible to improve the visible light shielding property while maintaining the i-line transmittance.
The particle size (average primary particle size) of the yttrium-containing zirconium nitride is preferably 10 to 100 nm from the viewpoint of suppressing a decrease in light shielding properties at a wavelength of 550 nm (visible light). The average primary particle size of the yttrium-containing zirconium nitride powder can be measured by converting the measured specific surface area into spheres.
Note that yttrium is contained in a solid solution state in the zirconium nitride powder.
In the spectral transmission spectrum when the concentration of the zirconium nitride powder containing yttrium is 50 ppm, X1 is the light transmittance at a wavelength of 550 nm, and X2 is the light transmittance at a wavelength of 365 nm. 5% or less is preferable, and 6.5% or less is more preferable. X2 is preferably 25% or more, more preferably 26% or more.
The ratio of X2 to X1 (X2/X1) is preferably 3.5 or more, more preferably 4.0 or more.
 イットリウムの含有量は、窒化ジルコニウム及びイットリウムの合計質量に対して、波長550nm(可視光)における遮光性の低下を抑制できる点から、1.0~12.0質量%が好ましく、2.0~11.0質量%がより好ましい。上記含有量は、ICP発光分光分析法により測定できる。 The content of yttrium is preferably 1.0 to 12.0% by mass, relative to the total mass of zirconium nitride and yttrium, from the viewpoint of suppressing a decrease in light shielding properties at a wavelength of 550 nm (visible light), and 2.0 to 2.0%. 11.0% by mass is more preferable. The above content can be measured by ICP emission spectrometry.
 イットリウムを含有する窒化ジルコニウム及びその製造方法としては、例えば、特開2020-180036号公報に記載のものが挙げられ、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Yttrium-containing zirconium nitride and its production method include, for example, those described in JP-A-2020-180036, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
 無機顔料としては、例えば、アルミニウムを含有する窒化ジルコニウムも挙げられる。
 アルミニウムを含有するジルコニウムとしては、アルミナで被覆された窒化ジルコニウムが好ましい。窒化ジルコニウムがアルミナで被覆されることで、耐湿性が向上する。
 アルミナで被覆された窒化ジルコニウムの体積抵抗率は、1×10Ω・cm以上が好ましく、1×10Ω・cm以上がより好ましい。
 アルミナで被覆された窒化ジルコニウムの体積抵抗率は、次のようにして求められる。
 アルミナで被覆された窒化ジルコニウムを圧力容器に入れて5~10MPaで圧縮して圧粉体とし、この圧粉体の抵抗値をデジタルマルチメーターで測定する。そして、得られた抵抗値に対し、圧粉体の厚み及び装置形状と圧粉体の厚みを元に参照される抵抗率補正係数(RCF)とを乗ずることで、粉体の体積抵抗率(Ω・cm)が得られる。
 アルミナの被覆量は、窒化ジルコニウム100質量%に対して、1.5~9質量%が好ましく、3~7質量%がより好ましい。
 アルミナで被覆された窒化ジルコニウムの等電点は、5.7以上が好ましく、5.8以上がより好ましい。
 「アルミナで被覆された窒化ジルコニウムの等電点」とは、アルミナで被覆された窒化ジルコニウムが分散した分散液のpHを変化させたとき、1個あたりの電荷が全体としてゼロになり、分散液に電圧を印加しても粉末が移動しないpHを意味する。
 換言すれば、窒化ジルコニウム粉末のような無機窒化物粉末は、pHが変わるとゼータ電位が大きく変化し、ある特定のpHで表面電位(ゼータ電位)がゼロとなり、電気泳動を全く示さない等電点を有する。なお、「ゼータ電位」とは、分散液中で、ある極性の電荷を持つ粉末の周りに、反対極性の電荷を持つイオンが引き寄せられて形成された電気的二重構造である電気二重層に、液体流動が起こり始めるスベリ面の電位を意味する。このゼータ電位は、例えば、DispersionTechnorogy社製のゼータ電位計(型式:DT1202)を用いて次のように測定される。本装置は、コロイド振動電流法を用いて測定される。上記分散液を容器に入れて一対の電極で挟み、これらの電極に所定の電圧を印加して分散液中の粉末が移動する。その結果、荷電粒子とその周囲のカウンターイオンの分極を生じコロイド振動電位と呼ばれる電場が発生し電流として検出できる。この電流がコロイド振動電流となる。測定されたコロイド振動電流からSmoluchowskiの式と連結総理論とを用いてゼータ電位が求められる。そして、ゼータ電位がゼロになったときのpHが上記粉末の等電点である。
Inorganic pigments also include, for example, zirconium nitride containing aluminum.
Zirconium containing aluminum is preferably zirconium nitride coated with alumina. Moisture resistance is improved by coating zirconium nitride with alumina.
The zirconium nitride coated with alumina preferably has a volume resistivity of 1×10 6 Ω·cm or more, more preferably 1×10 7 Ω·cm or more.
The volume resistivity of zirconium nitride coated with alumina is obtained as follows.
Alumina-coated zirconium nitride is placed in a pressure vessel and compressed at 5 to 10 MPa to form a compact, and the resistance value of the compact is measured with a digital multimeter. Then, the obtained resistance value is multiplied by a resistivity correction factor (RCF) that is referred to based on the thickness of the green compact, the shape of the apparatus, and the thickness of the green compact, to obtain the volume resistivity of the powder ( Ω·cm) is obtained.
The coating amount of alumina is preferably 1.5 to 9% by mass, more preferably 3 to 7% by mass with respect to 100% by mass of zirconium nitride.
The isoelectric point of zirconium nitride coated with alumina is preferably 5.7 or higher, more preferably 5.8 or higher.
The “isoelectric point of alumina-coated zirconium nitride” means that when the pH of a dispersion liquid in which alumina-coated zirconium nitride is dispersed, the charge per piece becomes zero as a whole, and the dispersion liquid means the pH at which the powder does not move even if a voltage is applied to .
In other words, an inorganic nitride powder, such as a zirconium nitride powder, exhibits a large change in zeta potential when the pH changes, and at a certain pH, the surface potential (zeta potential) becomes zero, and the isoelectric potential does not exhibit any electrophoresis. have a point. In addition, "zeta potential" is an electric double layer, which is an electric double structure formed by attracting ions with opposite polar charges around powder with a certain polar charge in a dispersion liquid. , means the potential of the sliding surface at which liquid flow begins to occur. This zeta potential is measured as follows using, for example, a zeta potential meter (model: DT1202) manufactured by Dispersion Technology. The device is measured using the colloidal oscillating current method. The above dispersion is placed in a container and sandwiched between a pair of electrodes, and a predetermined voltage is applied to these electrodes to move the powder in the dispersion. As a result, the charged particles and their surrounding counter ions are polarized, generating an electric field called the colloidal oscillation potential, which can be detected as a current. This current becomes a colloidal oscillation current. The zeta potential is determined from the measured colloidal oscillatory currents using Smoluchowski's equation and coupling theory. The pH at which the zeta potential becomes zero is the isoelectric point of the powder.
 アルミナで被覆された窒化ジルコニウムのL値は、13以下が好ましい。
 「アルミナで被覆された窒化ジルコニウムのL値」とは、CIE1976L色空間(測定用光源C:色温度6774K)における明度指数である。上記CIE1976L色空間は、国際照明委員会(CIE)が1976年にCIEXYZ表色系を変換し、表色系内の一定距離がどの色の領域でもほぼ知覚的に等歩度の差をもつように定めた色空間である。また、明度指数L値、a値及びb値は、CIE1976L色空間内の直交座標系で定められる量であり、式(1)~(3)で表される。
 L=116(Y/Y1/3-16         (1)
 a=500[(X/X1/3-(Y/Y1/3]  (2)
 b=200[(Y/Y1/3-(Z/Z1/3]  (3)
 ただし、X/X、Y/Y、Z/Z>0.008856であり、X、Y、Zは、物体色の三刺激値である。また、X、Y0、は物体色を照明する光源の三刺激値であり、Y=100に基準化されている。また、アルミナで被覆された窒化ジルコニウムの明度指数L値は、例えば、日本電色工業社製の分光色差計(型式:SE7700)を用いて求める。L値が13以下である場合、黒色度が充足して黒色顔料として所定の色調が得られる。
The L * value of zirconium nitride coated with alumina is preferably 13 or less.
The “L * value of zirconium nitride coated with alumina” is the lightness index in the CIE1976 L * a * b * color space (measurement light source C: color temperature 6774K). The above CIE1976L * a * b * color space was converted from the CIEXYZ color system by the International Commission on Illumination (CIE) in 1976, and a constant distance in the color system is almost perceptually uniform in any color region. It is a color space defined to have a difference. The lightness index L * value, a * value, and b * value are quantities determined by an orthogonal coordinate system in the CIE1976L * a * b * color space, and are expressed by equations (1) to (3).
L * =116(Y/Y0) 1/ 3-16 ( 1 )
a * = 500 [(X/X 0 ) 1/3 - (Y/Y 0 ) 1/3 ] (2)
b * = 200 [(Y/Y 0 ) 1/3 - (Z/Z 0 ) 1/3 ] (3)
However, X/X 0 , Y/Y 0 , Z/Z 0 >0.008856, and X, Y, and Z are the tristimulus values of the object color. Also, X 0 , Y 0 and Z 0 are the tristimulus values of the light source that illuminates the object color, and are normalized to Y 0 =100. Further, the lightness index L * value of zirconium nitride coated with alumina is determined using, for example, a spectral color difference meter (model: SE7700) manufactured by Nippon Denshoku Industries Co., Ltd. When the L * value is 13 or less, the blackness is sufficient and a predetermined color tone can be obtained as a black pigment.
 アルミナで被覆された窒化ジルコニウムのBET比表面積としては、20m/g以上が好ましい。上限は、1000m/g以下が好ましい。
 BET比表面積は、例えば、柴田科学社製の比表面積測定装置(型式:SA1100)を用いて、上記粉末(黒色顔料)の表面に、吸着占有面積の分かったガス分子(例えば、窒素ガス等)を吸着させ、その吸着量から求められる。ただし、アルミナで被覆された窒化ジルコニウムの表面に吸着したガス分子が1層目の吸着から多層吸着に移行する過程の情報に対して、BETの式(一定温度で吸着平衡状態であるとき、吸着平衡圧とこの圧力での吸着量との関係を示す式)を適用することにより、1層だけのガス分子の量が測定され、正確な比表面積を測定できるようになっている。BET比表面積が20m/g以上である場合、着色力(発色力)の低下を抑制できる。
The BET specific surface area of zirconium nitride coated with alumina is preferably 20 m 2 /g or more. The upper limit is preferably 1000 m 2 /g or less.
The BET specific surface area is measured by using, for example, a specific surface area measuring device (model: SA1100) manufactured by Shibata Kagaku Co., Ltd., on the surface of the powder (black pigment), a gas molecule (for example, nitrogen gas, etc.) whose adsorption area is known. is adsorbed and calculated from the adsorption amount. However, for the information on the process in which the gas molecules adsorbed on the surface of the zirconium nitride coated with alumina shift from the adsorption of the first layer to the adsorption of multiple layers, the BET equation (when adsorption is in equilibrium at a constant temperature, adsorption By applying the equation showing the relationship between the equilibrium pressure and the amount of adsorption at this pressure, the amount of gas molecules in only one layer is measured, making it possible to measure the exact specific surface area. When the BET specific surface area is 20 m 2 /g or more, a decrease in coloring power (color development power) can be suppressed.
 アルミナで被覆された窒化ジルコニウム及びその製造方法としては、例えば、特開2020-158377号公報の記載の物が挙げられ、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Alumina-coated zirconium nitride and its manufacturing method include, for example, those described in JP-A-2020-158377, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
 中でも、遮光膜を形成する際のアンダーカットの発生を抑制できる点から、チタン、バナジウム、ジルコニウム、ニオブ及び鉄からなる群から選択される1種以上の金属の窒化物又は酸窒化物がより好ましい。また、遮光膜の耐湿性がより優れる点から、チタン、バナジウム、ジルコニウム及び鉄からなる群から選択される1種以上の金属の酸窒化物が更に好ましく、酸窒化ジルコニウム又は酸窒化チタン(チタンブラック)が特に好ましい。 Among them, nitrides or oxynitrides of one or more metals selected from the group consisting of titanium, vanadium, zirconium, niobium, and iron are more preferable because they can suppress the occurrence of undercuts when forming a light-shielding film. . Further, from the viewpoint of better moisture resistance of the light shielding film, one or more metal oxynitrides selected from the group consisting of titanium, vanadium, zirconium and iron are more preferable, and zirconium oxynitride or titanium oxynitride (titanium black ) is particularly preferred.
 チタンブラックは、酸窒化チタンを含有する黒色粒子である。
 チタンブラックは、分散性向上、凝集性抑制等の目的で必要に応じ、表面を修飾することが可能である。チタンブラックは、酸化ケイ素、酸化チタン、酸化ゲルマニウム、酸化アルミニウム、酸化マグネシウム、又は、酸化ジルコニウムで被覆することが可能であり、また、特開2007-302836号公報に表されるような撥水性物質での処理も可能である。
Titanium black is black particles containing titanium oxynitride.
Titanium black can be surface-modified as necessary for the purpose of improving dispersibility, suppressing cohesion, and the like. Titanium black can be coated with silicon oxide, titanium oxide, germanium oxide, aluminum oxide, magnesium oxide, or zirconium oxide. can also be processed.
 チタンブラックの製造方法としては、二酸化チタンと金属チタンの混合体を還元雰囲気で加熱し還元する方法(特開昭49-5432号公報)、四塩化チタンの高温加水分解で得られた超微細二酸化チタンを、水素を含有する還元雰囲気中で還元する方法(特開昭57-205322号公報)、二酸化チタン又は水酸化チタンをアンモニア存在下で高温還元する方法(特開昭60-65069号公報、特開昭61-201610号公報)、及び、二酸化チタン又は水酸化チタンにバナジウム化合物を付着させ、アンモニア存在下で高温還元する方法(特開昭61-201610号公報)が挙げられる。 Titanium black can be produced by heating a mixture of titanium dioxide and metallic titanium in a reducing atmosphere (JP-A-49-5432), and ultra-fine dioxide obtained by high-temperature hydrolysis of titanium tetrachloride. A method of reducing titanium in a reducing atmosphere containing hydrogen (JP-A-57-205322), a method of reducing titanium dioxide or titanium hydroxide at high temperature in the presence of ammonia (JP-A-60-65069, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 61-201610) and a method of adhering a vanadium compound to titanium dioxide or titanium hydroxide and subjecting it to high-temperature reduction in the presence of ammonia (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 61-201610).
 チタンブラックの粒子径は、特に制限されないが、10~45nmが好ましく、12~20nmがより好ましい。チタンブラックの比表面積は、特に制限されないが、撥水化剤で表面処理した後の撥水性が所定の性能となるために、BET(Brunauer,Emmett,Teller)法にて測定した値が5~150m/gであることが好ましく、20~100m/gであることがより好ましい。 The particle size of titanium black is not particularly limited, but is preferably 10 to 45 nm, more preferably 12 to 20 nm. The specific surface area of titanium black is not particularly limited, but since the water repellency after surface treatment with a water repellent agent has a predetermined performance, the value measured by the BET (Brunauer, Emmett, Teller) method is 5 to 5. It is preferably 150 m 2 /g, more preferably 20 to 100 m 2 /g.
 チタンブラックとしては、例えば、チタンブラック10S、12S、13R、13M、13M-C、13R、13R-N、13M-T(商品名、三菱マテリアル株式会社製)、ティラック(Tilack)D(商品名、赤穂化成株式会社製)、及び、MT-150A(商品名、テイカ株式会社製)が挙げられる。 As titanium black, for example, titanium black 10S, 12S, 13R, 13M, 13M-C, 13R, 13R-N, 13M-T (trade name, manufactured by Mitsubishi Materials Corporation), Tilac D (trade name) , manufactured by Ako Kasei Co., Ltd.), and MT-150A (trade name, manufactured by Teika Co., Ltd.).
 組成物は、チタンブラックを、チタンブラック及びSi原子を含有する被分散体として含有することも好ましい。この形態において、チタンブラックは、組成物中において被分散体として含有される。被分散体中のSi原子とTi原子との含有比(Si/Ti)が質量換算で0.05~0.5であることが好ましく、0.07~0.4であることがより好ましい。ここで、上記被分散体は、チタンブラックが一次粒子の状態であるもの、凝集体(二次粒子)の状態であるものの双方を包含する。
 また、被分散体のSi/Tiが所定値以上であれば、被分散体を使用した組成物層を光リソグラフィー等によりパターニングした際に、除去部に残渣が残りにくくなり、被分散体のSi/Tiは所定値以下であれば遮光能が良好になりやすい。
The composition also preferably contains titanium black as a dispersant containing titanium black and Si atoms. In this form, titanium black is contained as a dispersant in the composition. The content ratio (Si/Ti) of Si atoms and Ti atoms in the material to be dispersed is preferably 0.05 to 0.5, more preferably 0.07 to 0.4 in terms of mass. Here, the material to be dispersed includes both titanium black in the state of primary particles and titanium black in the state of aggregates (secondary particles).
Further, when the Si/Ti ratio of the substance to be dispersed is at least a predetermined value, when a composition layer using the substance to be dispersed is patterned by photolithography or the like, it is difficult for a residue to remain in the removed portion. If /Ti is equal to or less than a predetermined value, the light shielding ability tends to be good.
 被分散体のSi/Tiを変更する(例えば0.05以上とする)ためには、以下のような手段を用いることができる。まず、酸化チタンとシリカ粒子とを分散機を用いて分散することにより分散物を得て、この混合物を高温(例えば、850~1000℃)にて還元処理することにより、チタンブラック粒子を主成分とし、SiとTiとを含有する被分散体を得ることができる。Si/Tiが調整されたチタンブラックは、例えば、特開2008-266045公報の段落[0005]及び[0016]~[0021]に記載の方法により作製できる。
 なお、被分散体中のSi原子とTi原子との含有比(Si/Ti)は、例えば、国際公開第2011/049090号公報の段落[0054]~[0056]に記載の方法(2-1)又は方法(2-3)を用いて測定できる。
In order to change the Si/Ti ratio of the object to be dispersed (for example, to 0.05 or more), the following means can be used. First, titanium oxide and silica particles are dispersed using a disperser to obtain a dispersion, and this mixture is subjected to a reduction treatment at a high temperature (for example, 850 to 1000 ° C.), so that titanium black particles are the main component. Then, a dispersed material containing Si and Ti can be obtained. Titanium black in which Si/Ti is adjusted can be produced, for example, by the method described in paragraphs [0005] and [0016] to [0021] of JP-A-2008-266045.
The content ratio (Si/Ti) of Si atoms and Ti atoms in the object to be dispersed is, for example, the method described in paragraphs [0054] to [0056] of WO 2011/049090 (2-1 ) or method (2-3).
 チタンブラック及びSi原子を含有する被分散体において、チタンブラックは、上記したものを使用できる。また、この被分散体においては、チタンブラックと共に、分散性、着色性等を調整する目的で、Cu、Fe、Mn、V及びNi等から選択される複数の金属の複合酸化物、酸化コバルト、酸化鉄、カーボンブラック、並びに、アニリンブラック等からなる黒色顔料を、1種又は2種以上を組み合わせて、被分散体として併用してもよい。この場合、全被分散体中の50質量%以上をチタンブラックからなる被分散体が占めることが好ましい。 In the dispersed material containing titanium black and Si atoms, the above titanium black can be used. In addition to titanium black, for the purpose of adjusting dispersibility, colorability, etc., in this dispersion object, a composite oxide of a plurality of metals selected from Cu, Fe, Mn, V, Ni, etc., cobalt oxide, Black pigments such as iron oxide, carbon black, and aniline black may be used singly or in combination of two or more as an object to be dispersed. In this case, it is preferable that the dispersed material comprising titanium black accounts for 50% by mass or more of the total dispersed material.
 無機顔料としては、カーボンブラックも挙げられる。
 カーボンブラックとしては、例えば、ファーネスブラック、チャンネルブラック、サーマルブラック、アセチレンブラック及びランプブラックが挙げられる。
 カーボンブラックとしては、オイルファーネス法等の公知の方法で製造されたカーボンブラックを使用してもよく、市販品を使用してもよい。カーボンブラックの市販品の具体例としては、C.I.ピグメントブラック1等の有機顔料、及び、C.I.ピグメントブラック7等の無機顔料が挙げられる。
Inorganic pigments also include carbon black.
Carbon blacks include, for example, furnace black, channel black, thermal black, acetylene black and lamp black.
As the carbon black, carbon black produced by a known method such as an oil furnace method may be used, or a commercially available product may be used. Specific examples of commercial products of carbon black include C.I. I. Pigment Black 1 and other organic pigments, and C.I. I. Inorganic pigments such as Pigment Black 7 can be used.
 カーボンブラックとしては、表面処理がされたカーボンブラックが好ましい。表面処理により、カーボンブラックの粒子表面状態を改質でき、組成物中での分散安定性を向上させることができる。表面処理としては、樹脂による被覆処理、酸性基を導入する表面処理、及び、シランカップリング剤による表面処理が挙げられる。 Carbon black that has undergone surface treatment is preferable as the carbon black. The surface treatment can modify the surface state of the carbon black particles and improve the dispersion stability in the composition. Examples of the surface treatment include coating treatment with a resin, surface treatment for introducing an acidic group, and surface treatment with a silane coupling agent.
 カーボンブラックとしては、樹脂による被覆処理がされたカーボンブラックが好ましい。カーボンブラックの粒子表面を絶縁性の樹脂で被覆することにより、遮光膜の遮光性及び絶縁性を向上させることができる。また、リーク電流の低減等により、画像表示装置の信頼性等を向上させることができる。このため、遮光膜を絶縁性が要求される用途に用いる場合等に好適である。
 被覆樹脂としては、エポキシ樹脂、ポリアミド、ポリアミドイミド、ノボラック樹脂、フェノール樹脂、ウレア樹脂、メラミン樹脂、ポリウレタン、ジアリルフタレート樹脂、アルキルベンゼン樹脂、ポリスチレン、ポリカーボネート、ポリブチレンテレフタレート及び変性ポリフェニレンオキサイドが挙げられる。
 被覆樹脂の含有量は、遮光膜の遮光性及び絶縁性がより優れる点から、カーボンブラック及び被覆樹脂の合計に対して、0.1~40質量%が好ましく、0.5~30質量%がより好ましい。
As the carbon black, carbon black coated with a resin is preferable. By coating the surface of carbon black particles with an insulating resin, the light shielding properties and insulating properties of the light shielding film can be improved. In addition, the reliability of the image display device can be improved by reducing leakage current. Therefore, the light shielding film is suitable for applications that require insulation.
Coating resins include epoxy resins, polyamides, polyamideimides, novolac resins, phenolic resins, urea resins, melamine resins, polyurethanes, diallyl phthalate resins, alkylbenzene resins, polystyrene, polycarbonates, polybutylene terephthalate, and modified polyphenylene oxides.
The content of the coating resin is preferably 0.1 to 40% by mass, more preferably 0.5 to 30% by mass, based on the total amount of the carbon black and the coating resin, from the viewpoint that the light shielding film has better light shielding properties and insulating properties. more preferred.
 無機顔料の結晶子サイズは、10nm以上が好ましく、20nm以上がより好ましい。上限は、60nm以下が好ましく、50nm以下がより好ましく、40nm以下が更に好ましい。
 無機顔料の結晶子サイズを上記範囲とすることにより、着色膜の透過光はそのピーク波長が400nm以下であるような青紫色を呈し、紫外領域における光透過性を向上させることができる。従来の遮光材よりも紫外領域(特にi線(365nm))における透過性に優れるため、膜底部まで光硬化又は光溶解が十分進み、感度を向上させることができる。
 結晶子サイズが10nm未満である場合、粒子表面が酸化されやすくなり、遮光性が低下する。結晶子サイズが60nm超である場合、着色膜とした際の透過ピークが長波長へシフトして紫外領域における光透過性が低下するとともに、可視領域における遮光性が低下する。
The crystallite size of the inorganic pigment is preferably 10 nm or more, more preferably 20 nm or more. The upper limit is preferably 60 nm or less, more preferably 50 nm or less, and even more preferably 40 nm or less.
By setting the crystallite size of the inorganic pigment within the above range, the light transmitted through the colored film exhibits a blue-violet color with a peak wavelength of 400 nm or less, and the light transmittance in the ultraviolet region can be improved. Since the transmissivity in the ultraviolet region (especially i-line (365 nm)) is superior to that of conventional light-shielding materials, photocuring or photodissolution sufficiently proceeds to the bottom of the film, and sensitivity can be improved.
If the crystallite size is less than 10 nm, the particle surface is likely to be oxidized, resulting in a decrease in light shielding properties. If the crystallite size is more than 60 nm, the transmission peak of the colored film shifts to longer wavelengths, resulting in lower light transmittance in the ultraviolet region and lower light shielding properties in the visible region.
 結晶子サイズは、例えば、次の方法で求められる。
 CuKα線をX線源としたときのX線回折スペクトルにおける(111)面に由来するX線回折ピークの半値幅から計算できる。
 例えば、窒化ジルコニウム、酸化ジルコニウム及び/又は酸窒化ジルコニウムを含有するジルコニア化合物粒子の、CuKα線をX線源としたときのX線回折スペクトルは、窒化ジルコニウムの場合、(111)面に由来するピークが回折角2θ=33.5~34.0°近傍に観測される。酸化ジルコニウムの場合、(011)面に由来するピークが回折角2θ=30.3°近傍に、(-111)面に由来するピークが回折角2θ=28.2°近傍に観測される。酸窒化ジルコニウムの場合、(211)面に由来するピークが2θ=33.4°近傍に観測される。そして、これらのX線回折ピークの半値幅から、下記式(4)に示すシェラーの式により、結晶子サイズを算出することができる。
 結晶子サイズ(nm) = Kλ/βcosθ   (4)
          β = √(β -β )   (5)
 式(4)中、Kは定数0.9を表す。λは0.15406(nm)を表す。βは上記式(5)で表される値である。θは上記のとおりである。式(5)中、βは、回折ピークの半値幅を表す。βは半値幅の補正値(0.12°)を表す。ただし、β、β及びβはラジアンで計算される。
 X線回折スペクトルは、X線源をCuKα線として、広角X線回折法により測定する。
 X線回折装置としては、例えば、理学社製RU-200Rを用いることができる。測定条件は、出力は50kV/200mA、スリット系は1°-1°-0.15mm-0.45mm、測定ステップ(2θ)は0.02°、スキャン速度は2°/分とする。
 また、上記X回析ピークの値としては、例えば、特開2009-091205号公報の段落[0027]~[0028]が挙げられ、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
The crystallite size is determined, for example, by the following method.
It can be calculated from the half width of the X-ray diffraction peak derived from the (111) plane in the X-ray diffraction spectrum when CuKα rays are used as the X-ray source.
For example, the X-ray diffraction spectrum of zirconia compound particles containing zirconium nitride, zirconium oxide and/or zirconium oxynitride when CuKα rays are used as the X-ray source shows a peak derived from the (111) plane in the case of zirconium nitride. is observed near the diffraction angle 2θ=33.5 to 34.0°. In the case of zirconium oxide, a peak derived from the (011) plane is observed near the diffraction angle 2θ=30.3°, and a peak derived from the (−111) plane is observed near the diffraction angle 2θ=28.2°. In the case of zirconium oxynitride, a peak derived from the (211) plane is observed near 2θ=33.4°. Then, the crystallite size can be calculated from the half-value width of these X-ray diffraction peaks by the Scherrer's formula shown in the following formula (4).
Crystallite size (nm) = Kλ/β cos θ (4)
β = √(β e 2 - β O 2 ) (5)
In formula (4), K represents a constant of 0.9. λ represents 0.15406 (nm). β is a value represented by the above formula (5). θ is as described above. In Equation (5), β e represents the half width of the diffraction peak. β O represents the half width correction value (0.12°). where β, β e and β O are calculated in radians.
The X-ray diffraction spectrum is measured by a wide-angle X-ray diffraction method using CuKα rays as an X-ray source.
As the X-ray diffractometer, for example, RU-200R manufactured by Rigakusha can be used. The measurement conditions are an output of 50 kV/200 mA, a slit system of 1°-1°-0.15 mm-0.45 mm, a measurement step (2θ) of 0.02°, and a scan speed of 2°/min.
Further, the value of the X-diffraction peak includes, for example, paragraphs [0027] to [0028] of JP-A-2009-091205, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
 結晶子サイズを上記範囲とする方法としては、例えば、気相反応による粒子合成の際に、結晶成長条件を調整する方法が挙げられる。例えば、熱プラズマ法においては、粒子を気化した後の冷却時間及び冷却速度を調整することにより、結晶子サイズを上述の範囲に容易に調整することができる。 A method of adjusting the crystallite size within the above range includes, for example, a method of adjusting crystal growth conditions during particle synthesis by gas phase reaction. For example, in the thermal plasma method, the crystallite size can be easily adjusted within the above range by adjusting the cooling time and cooling rate after the particles are vaporized.
 黒色着色剤として使用される無機顔料としては、例えば、特開2017-222559号公報、国際公開第2019/130772号公報、国際公開第2019/059359号公報及び特開2009-091205号公報のジルコニウムが挙げられ、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Examples of inorganic pigments used as black colorants include, for example, JP-A-2017-222559, WO-A-2019/130772, WO-A-2019/059359 and JP-A-2009-091205. , the contents of which are incorporated herein.
・黒色着色剤として使用される有機顔料
 黒色着色剤として使用される有機顔料としては、遮光性を有し、有機化合物を含有する粒子であれば、特に制限されないが、公知の有機顔料が使用できる。
 本発明において、有機顔料としては、例えば、ビスベンゾフラノン化合物、アゾメチン化合物、ペリレン化合物、及び、アゾ系化合物が挙げられ、ビスベンゾフラノン化合物又はペリレン化合物が好ましい。
・Organic pigment used as a black colorant The organic pigment used as a black colorant is not particularly limited as long as it has a light-shielding property and contains an organic compound, but known organic pigments can be used. .
In the present invention, organic pigments include, for example, bisbenzofuranone compounds, azomethine compounds, perylene compounds, and azo compounds, with bisbenzofuranone compounds and perylene compounds being preferred.
 ビスベンゾフラノン化合物としては、特表2010-534726号公報、特表2012-515233号公報、及び、特表2012-515234号公報に記載された化合物が挙げられる。ビスベンゾフラノン化合物は、BASF社製の「Irgaphor Black」(商品名)として入手可能である。
 ペリレン化合物としては、特開昭62-001753号公報、及び、特公昭63-026784号公報に記載された化合物が挙げられる。ペリレン化合物は、C.I.Pigment Black 21、30、31、32、33、及び34として入手可能である。
Examples of the bisbenzofuranone compound include compounds described in JP-A-2010-534726, JP-A-2012-515233, and JP-A-2012-515234. A bisbenzofuranone compound is available as “Irgaphor Black” (trade name) manufactured by BASF.
Perylene compounds include those described in JP-A-62-001753 and JP-B-63-026784. The perylene compound is C.I. I. Pigment Black 21, 30, 31, 32, 33, and 34.
・黒色染料
 黒色染料としては、単独で黒色を発現する染料が使用でき、例えば、ピラゾールアゾ化合物、ピロメテン化合物、アニリノアゾ化合物、トリフェニルメタン化合物、アントラキノン化合物、ベンジリデン化合物、オキソノール化合物、ピラゾロトリアゾールアゾ化合物、ピリドンアゾ化合物、シアニン化合物、フェノチアジン化合物、及び、ピロロピラゾールアゾメチン化合物を使用できる。
 また、黒色染料としては、特開昭64-090403号公報、特開昭64-091102号公報、特開平1-094301号公報、特開平6-011614号公報、特許第2592207号公報、米国特許4808501号明細書、米国特許5667920号明細書、米国特許505950号明細書、米国特許5667920号明細書、特開平5-333207号公報、特開平6-035183号公報、特開平6-051115号公報、及び、特開平6-194828号公報等に記載の化合物を参照でき、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
- Black dye As the black dye, a dye that expresses black color by itself can be used. , pyridone azo compounds, cyanine compounds, phenothiazine compounds, and pyrrolopyrazole azomethine compounds can be used.
Further, as a black dye, JP-A-64-090403, JP-A-64-091102, JP-A-1-094301, JP-A-6-011614, JP-A-2592207, US Pat. No., US Pat. No. 5,667,920, US Pat. No. 505,950, US Pat. , JP-A-6-194828, etc., the contents of which are incorporated herein.
 これらの黒色染料の具体例としては、ソルベントブラック27~47のカラーインデックス(C.I.)で規定される染料が挙げられ、ソルベントブラック27、29又は34のC.I.で規定される染料が好ましい。
 また、これらの黒色染料の市販品としては、スピロン Black MH、Black BH(以上、保土谷化学工業株式会社製)、VALIFAST Black 3804、3810、3820、3830(以上、オリエント化学工業株式会社製)、Savinyl Black RLSN(以上、クラリアント社製)、KAYASET Black K-R、K-BL(以上、日本化薬株式会社製)等の染料が挙げられる。
Specific examples of these black dyes include dyes defined by the Color Index (C.I.) of Solvent Black 27 to 47, and Solvent Black 27, 29 or 34 C.I. I. A dye defined by is preferred.
Commercially available products of these black dyes include Spiron Black MH, Black BH (manufactured by Hodogaya Chemical Co., Ltd.), VALIFAST Black 3804, 3810, 3820, 3830 (manufactured by Orient Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Dyes such as Savinyl Black RLSN (manufactured by Clariant Co., Ltd.), KAYASET Black KR, K-BL (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) and the like.
 また、黒色染料としては色素多量体を用いてもよい。色素多量体としては、特開2011-213925号公報、及び、特開2013-041097号公報に記載されている化合物が挙げられる。また、分子内に重合性を有する重合性染料を用いてもよく、市販品としては、例えば、和光純薬工業社製RDWシリーズが挙げられる。
 更に、上述の通り、単独では黒色以外の色を有する染料を複数組み合わせて黒色染料として使用してもよい。このような着色染料としては、例えば、R(レッド)、G(グリーン)、及び、B(ブルー)等の有彩色系の染料(有彩色染料)の他、特開2014-042375の段落[0027]~[0200]に記載の染料も使用できる。
Moreover, you may use a pigment multimer as a black dye. Examples of dye multimers include compounds described in JP-A-2011-213925 and JP-A-2013-041097. Moreover, a polymerizable dye having polymerizability in the molecule may be used, and commercially available products thereof include, for example, the RDW series manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.
Furthermore, as described above, a plurality of dyes having a color other than black alone may be used in combination as a black dye. Examples of such colored dyes include, for example, R (red), G (green), and B (blue) chromatic dyes (chromatic dyes), and paragraph [0027 ] to [0200] can also be used.
(白色着色剤)
 白色着色剤としては、白色顔料及び白色染料からなる群から選択される1種以上が挙げられ、耐候性等の観点から、白色顔料であるのが好ましい。
 白色顔料としては、例えば、酸化チタン、チタン酸ストロンチウム、チタン酸バリウム、酸化亜鉛、酸化マグネシウム、酸化ジルコニウム、酸化アルミニウム、硫酸バリウム、シリカ、タルク、マイカ、水酸化アルミニウム、ケイ酸カルシウム、ケイ酸アルミニウム、中空樹脂粒子、及び、硫化亜鉛が挙げられる。白色顔料は、チタン原子を有する粒子が好ましく、酸化チタンがより好ましい。酸化チタンとしては「酸化チタン 物性と応用技術 清野学著 1991年6月25日発行 技報堂出版発行」に記載の酸化チタンも好適に使用できる。
 また、白色顔料としては、C.I.Pigment White 1,3,6,16,18,21を用いることができる。
(white colorant)
As the white colorant, one or more selected from the group consisting of white pigments and white dyes can be mentioned, and white pigments are preferable from the viewpoint of weather resistance and the like.
Examples of white pigments include titanium oxide, strontium titanate, barium titanate, zinc oxide, magnesium oxide, zirconium oxide, aluminum oxide, barium sulfate, silica, talc, mica, aluminum hydroxide, calcium silicate, and aluminum silicate. , hollow resin particles, and zinc sulfide. The white pigment is preferably particles containing titanium atoms, more preferably titanium oxide. Titanium oxide described in "Titanium Oxide, Physical Properties and Applied Techniques, Manabu Seino, Jun. 25, 1991, published by Gihodo Publishing" can also be suitably used as titanium oxide.
Moreover, as a white pigment, C.I. I. Pigment White 1, 3, 6, 16, 18, 21 can be used.
<赤外線吸収剤>
 赤外線吸収剤は、赤外領域(好ましくは、波長650~1300nm)の波長領域に吸収を有する化合物を意味する。赤外線吸収剤としては、波長675~900nmの波長領域に極大吸収波長を有する化合物が好ましい。
 このような分光特性を有する着色剤としては、例えば、ピロロピロール化合物、銅化合物、シアニン化合物、フタロシアニン化合物、イミニウム化合物、チオール錯体系化合物、遷移金属酸化物系化合物、スクアリリウム化合物、ナフタロシアニン化合物、クオタリレン化合物、ジチオール金属錯体系化合物、及び、クロコニウム化合物が挙げられる。
 フタロシアニン化合物、ナフタロシアニン化合物、イミニウム化合物、シアニン化合物、スクアリリウム化合物、及び、クロコニウム化合物は、特開2010-111750号公報の段落[0010]~[0081]に開示の化合物を使用してもよく、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。シアニン化合物は、例えば、「機能性色素、大河原信/松岡賢/北尾悌次郎/平嶋恒亮・著、講談社サイエンティフィック」を参酌でき、この内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。
<Infrared absorber>
An infrared absorbing agent means a compound having absorption in the wavelength region of the infrared region (preferably wavelength of 650 to 1300 nm). As the infrared absorber, a compound having a maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 675 to 900 nm is preferred.
Colorants having such spectral characteristics include, for example, pyrrolopyrrole compounds, copper compounds, cyanine compounds, phthalocyanine compounds, iminium compounds, thiol complex compounds, transition metal oxide compounds, squarylium compounds, naphthalocyanine compounds, and quatarylene. compounds, dithiol metal complex compounds, and croconium compounds.
Phthalocyanine compounds, naphthalocyanine compounds, iminium compounds, cyanine compounds, squarylium compounds, and croconium compounds may use compounds disclosed in paragraphs [0010] to [0081] of JP-A-2010-111750. The contents are incorporated herein. For the cyanine compound, for example, "Functional Dyes, Shin Okawara/Ken Matsuoka/Teijiro Kitao/Tsunesuke Hirashima, Kodansha Scientific" can be referred to, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
 上記分光特性を有する着色剤として、特開平07-164729号公報の段落[0004]~[0016]に開示の化合物及び/又は特開2002-146254号公報の段落[0027]~[0062]に開示の化合物、特開2011-164583号公報の段落[0034]~[0067]に開示のCu及び/又はPを含有する酸化物の結晶子からなり数平均凝集粒子径が5~200nmである近赤外線吸収粒子を使用することもできる。 As the colorant having the above spectral characteristics, compounds disclosed in paragraphs [0004] to [0016] of JP-A-07-164729 and/or disclosed in paragraphs [0027] to [0062] of JP-A-2002-146254 The compound of JP-A-2011-164583, paragraphs [0034] to [0067] are composed of crystallites of an oxide containing Cu and / or P, and the number average aggregate particle size is near infrared rays having a diameter of 5 to 200 nm. Absorbent particles can also be used.
 波長675~900nmの波長領域に極大吸収波長を有する化合物としては、シアニン化合物、ピロロピロール化合物、スクアリリウム化合物、フタロシアニン化合物、及び、ナフタロシアニン化合物からなる群から選択される少なくとも1種が好ましい。
 また、赤外線吸収剤は、25℃の水に1質量%以上溶解する化合物が好ましく、25℃の水に10質量%以上溶解する化合物がより好ましい。このような化合物を用いることで、耐溶剤性が良化する。
 ピロロピロール化合物は、特開2010-222557号公報の段落[0049]~[0062]を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。シアニン化合物及びスクアリリウム化合物は、国際公開第2014/088063号公報の段落[0022]~[0063]、国際公開第2014/030628号公報の段落[0053]~[0118]、特開2014-059550号公報の段落[0028]~[0074]、国際公開第2012/169447号公報の段落[0013]~[0091]、特開2015-176046号公報の段落[0019]~[0033]、特開2014-063144号公報の段落[0053]~[0099]、特開2014-052431号公報の段落[0085]~[0150]、特開2014-044301号公報の段落[0076]~[0124]、特開2012-008532号公報の段落[0045]~[0078]、特開2015-172102号公報の段落[0027]~[0067]、特開2015-172004号公報の段落[0029]~[0067]、特開2015-040895号公報の段落[0029]~[0085]、特開2014-126642号公報の段落[0022]~[0036]、特開2014-148567号公報の段落[0011]~[0017]、特開2015-157893号公報の段落[0010]~[0025]、特開2014-095007号公報の段落[0013]~[0026]、特開2014-80487号公報の段落[0013]~[0047]、及び、特開2013-227403号公報の段落[0007]~[0028]を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
The compound having a maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 675 to 900 nm is preferably at least one selected from the group consisting of cyanine compounds, pyrrolopyrrole compounds, squarylium compounds, phthalocyanine compounds, and naphthalocyanine compounds.
In addition, the infrared absorber is preferably a compound that dissolves in water at 25°C in an amount of 1% by mass or more, and more preferably a compound that dissolves in water at 25°C in an amount of 10% by mass or more. Solvent resistance is improved by using such a compound.
Pyrrolopyrrole compounds can be referred to paragraphs [0049] to [0062] of JP-A-2010-222557, the contents of which are incorporated herein. The cyanine compound and the squarylium compound are described in paragraphs [0022] to [0063] of International Publication No. 2014/088063, paragraphs [0053] to [0118] of International Publication No. 2014/030628, and JP-A-2014-059550. Paragraphs [0028] to [0074], International Publication No. 2012/169447, paragraphs [0013] to [0091], JP 2015-176046, paragraphs [0019] to [0033], JP 2014-063144 Paragraphs [0053] to [0099] of JP-A-2014-052431, paragraphs [0085]-[0150] of JP-A-2014-052431, paragraphs [0076]-[0124] of JP-A-2014-044301, JP-A-2012- 008532, paragraphs [0045] to [0078], JP 2015-172102, paragraphs [0027] to [0067], JP 2015-172004, paragraphs [0029] to [0067], JP 2015 -040895, paragraphs [0029] to [0085], JP 2014-126642, paragraphs [0022] to [0036], JP 2014-148567, paragraphs [0011] to [0017], JP Paragraphs [0010] to [0025] of 2015-157893, paragraphs [0013] to [0026] of JP 2014-095007, paragraphs [0013] to [0047] of JP 2014-80487, and , paragraphs [0007] to [0028] of JP-A-2013-227403, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
〔樹脂〕
 本発明の組成物は、樹脂を含有してもよい。
 樹脂は、例えば、顔料等の粒子を組成物中で分散させる用途及びバインダーの用途で配合される。なお、主に顔料等の粒子を分散させるために用いられる樹脂を分散剤ともいう。ただし、上記分散剤には、フッ素原子及びケイ素原子のいずれも含まれない。
 樹脂用途は一例であって、このような用途以外の目的で樹脂を使用することもできる。 
〔resin〕
The composition of the invention may contain a resin.
The resin is blended, for example, for use as a binder and for dispersing particles such as pigments in the composition. A resin that is mainly used to disperse particles such as pigments is also called a dispersant. However, the above dispersant does not contain either fluorine atoms or silicon atoms.
The use of the resin is only an example, and the resin can be used for purposes other than such uses.
 樹脂の重量平均分子量(Mw)は、2000~2000000が好ましい。上限は、1000000以下がより好ましく、500000以下が更に好ましい。下限は、3000以上がより好ましく、5000以上が更に好ましい。 The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the resin is preferably 2,000 to 2,000,000. The upper limit is more preferably 1,000,000 or less, and even more preferably 500,000 or less. The lower limit is more preferably 3000 or more, and even more preferably 5000 or more.
 樹脂としては、(メタ)アクリル樹脂、エポキシ樹脂、エン・チオール樹脂、ポリカーボネート樹脂、ポリエーテル樹脂、ポリアリレート樹脂、ポリスルホン樹脂、ポリエーテルスルホン樹脂、ポリフェニレン樹脂、ポリアリーレンエーテルホスフィンオキシド樹脂、ポリイミド樹脂、ポリアミドイミド樹脂、ポリオレフィン樹脂、環状オレフィン樹脂、ポリエステル樹脂、スチレン樹脂が挙げられる。これらの樹脂から1種を単独で使用してもよく、2種以上を混合して使用してもよい。環状オレフィン樹脂としては、耐熱性向上の観点からノルボルネン樹脂が好ましい。ノルボルネン樹脂の市販品としては、例えば、JSR(株)製のARTONシリーズ(例えば、ARTON F4520)が挙げられる。エポキシ樹脂としては、例えばフェノール化合物のグリシジルエーテル化物であるエポキシ樹脂、各種ノボラック樹脂のグリシジルエーテル化物であるエポキシ樹脂、脂環式エポキシ樹脂、脂肪族系エポキシ樹脂、複素環式エポキシ樹脂、グリシジルエステル系エポキシ樹脂、グリシジルアミン系エポキシ樹脂、ハロゲン化フェノール類をグリシジル化したエポキシ樹脂、エポキシ基を含有するケイ素化合物とそれ以外のケイ素化合物との縮合物、エポキシ基を持つ重合性不飽和化合物とそれ以外の他の重合性不飽和化合物との共重合体が挙げられる。また、エポキシ樹脂は、マープルーフG-0150M、G-0105SA、G-0130SP、G-0250SP、G-1005S、G-1005SA、G-1010S、G-2050M、G-01100、G-01758(日油(株)製、エポキシ基含有ポリマー)等を用いることもできる。また、樹脂は、国際公開第2016/088645号の実施例に記載の樹脂を用いることもできる。また、樹脂が側鎖にエチレン性不飽和基、特に(メタ)アクリロイル基を含有する場合、主鎖とエチレン性不飽和基とが脂環構造を含有する2価の連結基を介して結合していることも好ましい。 Examples of resins include (meth)acrylic resins, epoxy resins, ene-thiol resins, polycarbonate resins, polyether resins, polyarylate resins, polysulfone resins, polyethersulfone resins, polyphenylene resins, polyarylene ether phosphine oxide resins, polyimide resins, Polyamideimide resins, polyolefin resins, cyclic olefin resins, polyester resins, and styrene resins can be used. One of these resins may be used alone, or two or more may be mixed and used. As the cyclic olefin resin, norbornene resin is preferable from the viewpoint of improving heat resistance. Commercially available norbornene resins include, for example, the ARTON series manufactured by JSR Corporation (for example, ARTON F4520). Examples of epoxy resins include epoxy resins that are glycidyl etherified compounds of phenolic compounds, epoxy resins that are glycidyl etherified compounds of various novolak resins, alicyclic epoxy resins, aliphatic epoxy resins, heterocyclic epoxy resins, glycidyl ester-based Epoxy resins, glycidylamine-based epoxy resins, epoxy resins obtained by glycidylating halogenated phenols, condensation products of silicon compounds containing epoxy groups and other silicon compounds, polymerizable unsaturated compounds having epoxy groups and others with other polymerizable unsaturated compounds. Epoxy resins include Marproof G-0150M, G-0105SA, G-0130SP, G-0250SP, G-1005S, G-1005SA, G-1010S, G-2050M, G-01100, G-01758 (NOF). Co., Ltd., epoxy group-containing polymer) and the like can also be used. Also, resins described in Examples of International Publication No. 2016/088645 can be used as the resin. When the resin contains an ethylenically unsaturated group, particularly a (meth)acryloyl group, in the side chain, the main chain and the ethylenically unsaturated group are linked via a divalent linking group containing an alicyclic structure. It is also preferred that
<アルカリ可溶性樹脂>
 本発明の硬化性組成物は、アルカリ可溶性樹脂を含むことが好ましい。本発明の硬化性組成物がアルカリ可溶性樹脂を含むことにより、硬化性組成物の現像性が向上し、本発明の硬化性組成物を用いてフォトリソグラフィ法でパターン形成した際においては、現像残渣の発生などを効果的に抑制できる。アルカリ可溶性樹脂としては、酸基を有する樹脂が挙げられる。酸基としては、カルボキシル基、リン酸基、スルホ基、フェノール性ヒドロキシ基などが挙げられ、カルボキシル基が好ましい。アルカリ可溶性樹脂が有する酸基は、1種のみであってもよいし、2種以上であってもよい。なお、アルカリ可溶性樹脂は、分散剤として用いることもできる。
<Alkali-soluble resin>
The curable composition of the invention preferably contains an alkali-soluble resin. When the curable composition of the present invention contains an alkali-soluble resin, the developability of the curable composition is improved, and when a pattern is formed by photolithography using the curable composition of the present invention, development residue can effectively suppress the occurrence of Alkali-soluble resins include resins having acid groups. The acid group includes a carboxyl group, a phosphoric acid group, a sulfo group, a phenolic hydroxy group and the like, and a carboxyl group is preferred. The number of acid groups that the alkali-soluble resin has may be one, or two or more. The alkali-soluble resin can also be used as a dispersant.
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂は、酸基を側鎖に有する繰り返し単位を含むことが好ましく、酸基を側鎖に有する繰り返し単位を樹脂の全繰り返し単位中5~70モル%含むことがより好ましい。酸基を側鎖に有する繰り返し単位の含有量の上限は、50モル%以下であることが好ましく、30モル%以下であることがより好ましい。酸基を側鎖に有する繰り返し単位の含有量の下限は、10モル%以上であることが好ましく、20モル%以上であることがより好ましい。 The alkali-soluble resin preferably contains a repeating unit having an acid group on its side chain, and more preferably contains 5 to 70 mol % of repeating units having an acid group on its side chain in all repeating units of the resin. The upper limit of the content of repeating units having an acid group in a side chain is preferably 50 mol % or less, more preferably 30 mol % or less. The lower limit of the content of repeating units having an acid group in the side chain is preferably 10 mol % or more, more preferably 20 mol % or more.
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂は、重合性基を有するアルカリ可溶性樹脂であることも好ましい。重合性基としては、(メタ)アリル基(アリル基およびメタアリル基の両方を意味する)、(メタ)アクリロイル基等が挙げられる。重合性基を有するアルカリ可溶性樹脂は、側鎖に重合性基を有する繰り返し単位と、側鎖に酸基を有する繰り返し単位とを含む樹脂であることが好ましい。 The alkali-soluble resin is also preferably an alkali-soluble resin having a polymerizable group. Polymerizable groups include (meth)allyl groups (meaning both allyl groups and methallyl groups), (meth)acryloyl groups, and the like. The alkali-soluble resin having a polymerizable group is preferably a resin containing a repeating unit having a polymerizable group in its side chain and a repeating unit having an acid group in its side chain.
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂は、下記式(ED1)で示される化合物及び/又は下記式(ED2)で表される化合物(以下、これらの化合物を「エーテルダイマー」と称することもある。)を含むモノマー成分に由来する繰り返し単位を含むことも好ましい。 The alkali-soluble resin is a monomer component containing a compound represented by the following formula (ED1) and/or a compound represented by the following formula (ED2) (hereinafter, these compounds may be referred to as "ether dimer"). It is also preferred to include repeating units derived from
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
 式(ED1)中、R及びRは、それぞれ独立して、水素原子又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~25の炭化水素基を表す。 In formula (ED1), R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 25 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
 式(ED2)中、Rは、水素原子又は炭素数1~30の有機基を表す。式(ED2)の詳細については、特開2010-168539号公報の記載を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 In formula (ED2), R represents a hydrogen atom or an organic group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms. For details of the formula (ED2), the description in JP-A-2010-168539 can be referred to, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
 エーテルダイマーの具体例としては、例えば、特開2013-029760号公報の段落番号0317の記載を参酌することができ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 As a specific example of the ether dimer, for example, the description in paragraph number 0317 of JP-A-2013-029760 can be referred to, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂は、下記式(X)で示される化合物に由来する繰り返し単位を含むことも好ましい。 The alkali-soluble resin preferably contains a repeating unit derived from the compound represented by the following formula (X).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
 式(X)中、Rは、水素原子又はメチル基を表し、Rは炭素数2~10のアルキレン基を表し、Rは、水素原子又はベンゼン環を含んでもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基を表す。nは1~15の整数を表す。 In formula (X), R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, R 2 represents an alkylene group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, R 3 represents a hydrogen atom or 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may contain a benzene ring. represents an alkyl group of n represents an integer of 1-15.
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂については、特開2012-208494号公報の段落番号0558~0571(対応する米国特許出願公開第2012/0235099号明細書の段落番号0685~0700)の記載、特開2012-198408号公報の段落番号0076~0099の記載を参酌でき、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 For the alkali-soluble resin, JP 2012-208494, paragraph numbers 0558 to 0571 (corresponding US Patent Application Publication No. 2012/0235099, paragraph numbers 0685 to 0700), JP 2012-198408 can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated herein.
 樹脂(特に、アルカリ可溶性樹脂)の酸価は、10~500mgKOH/gが好ましい。下限は、30mgKOH/g以上が好ましく、50mgKOH/g以上がより好ましく、70mgKOH/g以上が更に好ましい。上限は、400mgKOH/g以下が好ましく、300mgKOH/g以下がより好ましく、200mgKOH/g以下が更に好ましく、100mgKOH/g以下が特に好ましい。
 樹脂(特に、アルカリ可溶性樹脂)のエチレン性不飽和結合当量(重合性化合物中のエチレン性不飽和基の数を、重合性化合物の分子量(g/mol)で除した値を意味する)は、0.4~2.5mmol/gが好ましい。下限は、1.0mmol/gが好ましく、1.2mmol/gがより好ましい。上限は、2.3mmol/gが好ましく、2.0mmol/gがより好ましい。
 特に、本発明の硬化性組成物が、酸価が10~100mgKOH/gであり、かつ、エチレン性不飽和結合当量が1.0~2.0mmol/gである樹脂を含む場合、耐湿試験後の剥がれの発生をより抑制できる。
The acid value of the resin (especially alkali-soluble resin) is preferably 10 to 500 mgKOH/g. The lower limit is preferably 30 mgKOH/g or more, more preferably 50 mgKOH/g or more, and even more preferably 70 mgKOH/g or more. The upper limit is preferably 400 mgKOH/g or less, more preferably 300 mgKOH/g or less, still more preferably 200 mgKOH/g or less, and particularly preferably 100 mgKOH/g or less.
The ethylenically unsaturated bond equivalent of the resin (especially the alkali-soluble resin) (meaning the value obtained by dividing the number of ethylenically unsaturated groups in the polymerizable compound by the molecular weight (g/mol) of the polymerizable compound) is 0.4 to 2.5 mmol/g is preferred. The lower limit is preferably 1.0 mmol/g, more preferably 1.2 mmol/g. The upper limit is preferably 2.3 mmol/g, more preferably 2.0 mmol/g.
In particular, if the curable composition of the present invention contains a resin having an acid value of 10 to 100 mgKOH/g and an ethylenically unsaturated bond equivalent of 1.0 to 2.0 mmol/g, after the moisture resistance test It is possible to further suppress the occurrence of peeling.
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂の具体例としては、例えば下記構造の樹脂などが挙げられる。以下の構造式中、Meはメチル基を表す。 Specific examples of alkali-soluble resins include resins with the following structures. In the following structural formulas, Me represents a methyl group.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
 本発明の硬化性組成物は、塩基性基を有する樹脂を含むことも好ましい。塩基性基としては、アミノ基、アンモニウム塩基などが挙げられる。塩基性基を有する樹脂は塩基性基の他に酸基を更に有していてもよい。なお、塩基性基を有する樹脂が更に酸基を有する場合、このような樹脂はアルカリ可溶性樹脂でもある。 The curable composition of the present invention also preferably contains a resin having a basic group. Basic groups include amino groups and ammonium bases. The resin having a basic group may further have an acid group in addition to the basic group. In addition, when the resin having a basic group further has an acid group, such a resin is also an alkali-soluble resin.
 塩基性基を有する樹脂としては、3級アミノ基と4級アンモニウム塩基とを有する樹脂が挙げられる。3級アミノ基と4級アンモニウム塩基とを有する樹脂は、3級アミノ基を有する繰り返し単位と4級アンモニウム塩基を有する繰り返し単位とを有する樹脂であることが好ましい。また、3級アミノ基と4級アンモニウム塩基とを有する樹脂は更に酸基を有する繰り返し単位を有していてもよい。3級アミノ基と4級アンモニウム塩基とを有する樹脂は、ブロック構造を有していることも好ましい。3級アミノ基と4級アンモニウム塩基とを有する樹脂は、そのアミン価が、10~250mgKOH/g、且つ4級アンモニウム塩価が10~90mgKOH/gであるものが好ましく、アミン価が50~200mgKOH/g、且つ4級アンモニウム塩価が10~50mgKOH/gであるものがより好ましい。3級アミノ基と4級アンモニウム塩基とを有する樹脂の重量平均分子量(Mw)は3000~300000であることが好ましく、5000~30000であることがより好ましい。3級アミノ基と4級アンモニウム塩基を有する樹脂は、3級アミノ基を有するエチレン性不飽和単量体、4級アンモニウム塩基を有するエチレン性不飽和単量体、及び必要に応じてその他エチレン性不飽和単量体を共重合して製造できる。3級アミノ基を有するエチレン性不飽和単量体、4級アンモニウム塩基を有するエチレン性不飽和単量体については、国際公開第2018/230486号の段落番号0150~0170に記載されたものが挙げられ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。また、特開2018-87939号公報の段落番号0079~0160に記載の酸性基を有する樹脂を併用しても良い。 Resins having a basic group include resins having a tertiary amino group and a quaternary ammonium base. The resin having a tertiary amino group and a quaternary ammonium base is preferably a resin having a repeating unit having a tertiary amino group and a repeating unit having a quaternary ammonium base. Moreover, the resin having a tertiary amino group and a quaternary ammonium base may further have a repeating unit having an acid group. The resin having a tertiary amino group and a quaternary ammonium base also preferably has a block structure. The resin having a tertiary amino group and a quaternary ammonium base preferably has an amine value of 10 to 250 mgKOH/g and a quaternary ammonium salt value of 10 to 90 mgKOH/g, and an amine value of 50 to 200 mgKOH. /g, and a quaternary ammonium salt value of 10 to 50 mgKOH/g. The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the resin having a tertiary amino group and a quaternary ammonium base is preferably 3,000 to 300,000, more preferably 5,000 to 30,000. A resin having a tertiary amino group and a quaternary ammonium group is an ethylenically unsaturated monomer having a tertiary amino group, an ethylenically unsaturated monomer having a quaternary ammonium group, and optionally other ethylenic It can be produced by copolymerizing unsaturated monomers. Examples of ethylenically unsaturated monomers having a tertiary amino group and ethylenically unsaturated monomers having a quaternary ammonium base include those described in paragraphs 0150 to 0170 of WO 2018/230486. , the contents of which are incorporated herein. Also, a resin having an acidic group described in paragraphs 0079 to 0160 of JP-A-2018-87939 may be used in combination.
 また、塩基性基を有する樹脂としては、主鎖に窒素原子を含む樹脂であることも好ましい。主鎖に窒素原子を含む樹脂(以下、オリゴイミン系樹脂ともいう)は、ポリ(低級アルキレンイミン)系繰り返し単位、ポリアリルアミン系繰り返し単位、ポリジアリルアミン系繰り返し単位、メタキシレンジアミン-エピクロルヒドリン重縮合物系繰り返し単位、及びポリビニルアミン系繰り返し単位から選択される少なくとも1種の窒素原子を有する繰り返し単位を含むことが好ましい。また、オリゴイミン系樹脂としては、pKa14以下の官能基を有する部分構造Xを有する繰り返し単位と、原子数40~10000のオリゴマー鎖又はポリマー鎖Yを含む側鎖を有する繰り返し単位とを有する樹脂であることが好ましい。オリゴイミン系樹脂は更に酸基を有する繰り返し単位を有していてもよい。オリゴイミン系樹脂については、特開2012-255128号公報の段落番号0102~0166の記載を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Also, the resin having a basic group is preferably a resin containing a nitrogen atom in its main chain. Resins containing nitrogen atoms in the main chain (hereinafter also referred to as oligoimine-based resins) include poly(lower alkyleneimine)-based repeating units, polyallylamine-based repeating units, polydiallylamine-based repeating units, metaxylenediamine-epichlorohydrin polycondensate-based It preferably contains a repeating unit having at least one nitrogen atom selected from repeating units and polyvinylamine-based repeating units. Further, the oligoimine resin is a resin having a repeating unit having a partial structure X having a functional group with a pKa of 14 or less and a repeating unit having a side chain containing an oligomer chain or polymer chain Y having 40 to 10000 atoms. is preferred. The oligoimine resin may further have a repeating unit having an acid group. Regarding the oligoimine resin, the description in paragraphs 0102 to 0166 of JP-A-2012-255128 can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated herein.
 本発明の硬化性組成物は、分散剤としての樹脂を含むこともでき、分散剤としての樹脂を含むことが好ましい。分散剤は、酸性分散剤(酸性樹脂)、塩基性分散剤(塩基性樹脂)が挙げられる。ここで、酸性分散剤(酸性樹脂)とは、酸基の量が塩基性基の量よりも多い樹脂を表す。酸性分散剤(酸性樹脂)は、酸基の量と塩基性基の量の合計量を100モル%としたときに、酸基の量が70モル%以上を占める樹脂が好ましく、実質的に酸基のみからなる樹脂がより好ましい。酸性分散剤(酸性樹脂)が有する酸基は、カルボキシル基が好ましい。また、塩基性分散剤(塩基性樹脂)とは、塩基性基の量が酸基の量よりも多い樹脂を表す。塩基性分散剤(塩基性樹脂)は、酸基の量と塩基性基の量の合計量を100モル%としたときに、塩基性基の量が50モル%を超える樹脂が好ましい。分散剤としては、塩基性基を有する樹脂であることが好ましく、塩基性分散剤であることがより好ましい。 The curable composition of the present invention can also contain a resin as a dispersant, and preferably contains a resin as a dispersant. Dispersants include acidic dispersants (acidic resins) and basic dispersants (basic resins). Here, the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) represents a resin in which the amount of acid groups is greater than the amount of basic groups. The acidic dispersant (acidic resin) is preferably a resin in which the amount of acid groups is 70 mol % or more when the total amount of acid groups and basic groups is 100 mol %. A resin consisting only of groups is more preferred. The acid group possessed by the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) is preferably a carboxyl group. Further, a basic dispersant (basic resin) represents a resin in which the amount of basic groups is greater than the amount of acid groups. The basic dispersant (basic resin) is preferably a resin in which the amount of basic groups exceeds 50 mol % when the total amount of acid groups and basic groups is 100 mol %. The dispersant is preferably a resin having a basic group, more preferably a basic dispersant.
 分散剤として用いる樹脂としては、上述した、3級アミノ基と4級アンモニウム塩基とを有する樹脂、オリゴイミン系樹脂などが挙げられる。また、分散剤として用いる樹脂は、グラフト樹脂であることも好ましい。グラフト樹脂としては、グラフト鎖を有する繰り返し単位を有する樹脂が挙げられる。グラフト樹脂は更に酸基を有する繰り返し単位を有していてもよい。グラフト樹脂の詳細は、特開2012-255128号公報の段落番号0025~0094の記載を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
 グラフト鎖と溶剤との相互作用性を向上させ、それにより色材等の分散性を高めるために、グラフト鎖は、ポリエステル構造、ポリエーテル構造、及び、ポリ(メタ)アクリレート構造からなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種を含有するグラフト鎖であることが好ましく、ポリエステル構造及びポリエーテル構造の少なくともいずれかを含有するグラフト鎖であることがより好ましい。
Examples of the resin used as the dispersant include the resin having a tertiary amino group and a quaternary ammonium base, the oligoimine resin, and the like. Also, the resin used as the dispersant is preferably a graft resin. Grafted resins include resins having repeating units with grafted chains. The graft resin may further have repeating units with acid groups. Details of the graft resin can be referred to paragraphs 0025 to 0094 of JP-A-2012-255128, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
The graft chain is selected from the group consisting of a polyester structure, a polyether structure, and a poly(meth)acrylate structure in order to improve the interaction between the graft chain and the solvent, thereby enhancing the dispersibility of the coloring material and the like. It is preferably a graft chain containing at least one kind of polyether structure, and more preferably a graft chain containing at least one of a polyester structure and a polyether structure.
 また、分散剤として用いる樹脂は、酸基を有する繰り返し単位を含む樹脂であることも好ましい。また、分散剤として用いる樹脂は、コア部に複数個のポリマー鎖が結合した構造の樹脂であることも好ましい。このような樹脂としては、例えばデンドリマー(星型ポリマーを含む)が挙げられる。また、デンドリマーの具体例としては、特開2013-043962号公報の段落番号0196~0209に記載された高分子化合物C-1~C-31などが挙げられる。また、上述したアルカリ可溶性樹脂を分散剤として用いることもできる。 Also, the resin used as the dispersant is preferably a resin containing a repeating unit having an acid group. It is also preferable that the resin used as the dispersant has a structure in which a plurality of polymer chains are bonded to the core portion. Such resins include, for example, dendrimers (including star polymers). Further, specific examples of dendrimers include polymer compounds C-1 to C-31 described in paragraphs 0196 to 0209 of JP-A-2013-043962. Moreover, the alkali-soluble resin mentioned above can also be used as a dispersing agent.
 分散剤は、市販品としても入手可能であり、そのような具体例としては、Disperbyk-111(BYKChemie社製)、ソルスパース76500(日本ルーブリゾール(株)製)などが挙げられる。また、特開2014-130338号公報の段落番号0041~0130に記載された分散剤を用いることもでき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Dispersants are also available as commercial products, and specific examples thereof include Disperbyk-111 (manufactured by BYK Chemie) and Solsperse 76500 (manufactured by Nippon Lubrizol Co., Ltd.). Dispersants described in paragraphs 0041 to 0130 of JP-A-2014-130338 can also be used, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
 特開2019-078878号公報記載の分散剤を使用することも好ましい。 It is also preferable to use the dispersant described in JP-A-2019-078878.
 樹脂の含有量は、硬化性組成物の全固形分中1~50質量%が好ましい。下限は、5質量%以上が好ましく、7質量%以上がより好ましい。上限は、40質量%以下が好ましく、30質量%以下がより好ましい。 The resin content is preferably 1 to 50% by mass based on the total solid content of the curable composition. The lower limit is preferably 5% by mass or more, more preferably 7% by mass or more. The upper limit is preferably 40% by mass or less, more preferably 30% by mass or less.
 また、本発明の硬化性組成物がアルカリ可溶性樹脂を含有する場合、アルカリ可溶性樹脂の含有量は、硬化性組成物の全固形分中1~50質量%が好ましい。下限は、5質量%以上が好ましく、7質量%以上がより好ましい。上限は、40質量%以下が好ましく、30質量%以下がより好ましい。また、硬化性組成物に含まれる樹脂中におけるアルカリ可溶性樹脂の含有量は、50~100質量%であることが好ましく、75~100質量%であることがより好ましく、90~100質量%であることが更に好ましい。 In addition, when the curable composition of the present invention contains an alkali-soluble resin, the content of the alkali-soluble resin is preferably 1 to 50% by mass based on the total solid content of the curable composition. The lower limit is preferably 5% by mass or more, more preferably 7% by mass or more. The upper limit is preferably 40% by mass or less, more preferably 30% by mass or less. Further, the content of the alkali-soluble resin in the resin contained in the curable composition is preferably 50 to 100% by mass, more preferably 75 to 100% by mass, and 90 to 100% by mass. is more preferred.
 また、本発明の硬化性組成物が分散剤としての樹脂を含有する場合、分散剤としての樹脂の含有量は、硬化性組成物の全固形分中0.1~40質量%が好ましい。上限は、20質量%以下が好ましく、10質量%以下が更に好ましい。下限は、0.5質量%以上が好ましく、1質量%以上が更に好ましい。 In addition, when the curable composition of the present invention contains a resin as a dispersant, the content of the resin as a dispersant is preferably 0.1 to 40% by mass based on the total solid content of the curable composition. The upper limit is preferably 20% by mass or less, more preferably 10% by mass or less. The lower limit is preferably 0.5% by mass or more, more preferably 1% by mass or more.
 本発明の硬化性組成物は樹脂を1種のみ含んでいてもよく、2種以上含んでいてもよい。2種以上含む場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 The curable composition of the present invention may contain only one type of resin, or may contain two or more types. When two or more kinds are included, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is within the above range.
<重合生成物>
 組成物は、上述の樹脂の他の樹脂として、例えば、修飾無機粒子の製造方法において説明した、被覆層形成工程において被覆層の重合体に取り込まれることなく重合生成された重合生成物(樹脂)を含有してもよい。
 上記重合生成物は、被覆層の重合体として取り込まれていない点以外は、修飾無機粒子の被覆層が含有する重合体として説明した重合体と同様である。
 組成物中における上記重合生成物の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対して、0~20質量%が好ましく、0~10質量%がより好ましく、0~5質量%が更に好ましい。
<Polymerization product>
The composition includes, as a resin other than the resins described above, for example, a polymerized product (resin) polymerized without being incorporated into the polymer of the coating layer in the coating layer forming step described in the manufacturing method of the modified inorganic particles. may contain.
The polymerization product is the same as the polymer described as the polymer contained in the coating layer of the modified inorganic particles, except that it is not incorporated as the polymer in the coating layer.
The content of the polymerization product in the composition is preferably 0 to 20% by mass, more preferably 0 to 10% by mass, and still more preferably 0 to 5% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition.
〔重合開始剤〕
 本発明の組成物は、重合開始剤を含有してもよい。
 重合開始剤としては、例えば、公知の重合開始剤を使用できる。重合開始剤としては、例えば、光重合開始剤、及び、熱重合開始剤等が挙げられ、光重合開始剤が好ましい。
 重合開始剤の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対して、0.5~20質量%が好ましく、1.0~10質量%がより好ましく、1.5~8質量%が更に好ましい。
 重合開始剤は、1種を単独で用いても、2種以上を併用してもよい。2種以上の重合開始剤を併用する場合には、合計含有量が上記範囲内であることが好ましい。
[Polymerization initiator]
The composition of the invention may contain a polymerization initiator.
As the polymerization initiator, for example, a known polymerization initiator can be used. Examples of polymerization initiators include photopolymerization initiators and thermal polymerization initiators, and photopolymerization initiators are preferred.
The content of the polymerization initiator is preferably 0.5 to 20% by mass, more preferably 1.0 to 10% by mass, even more preferably 1.5 to 8% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition.
A polymerization initiator may be used individually by 1 type, or may use 2 or more types together. When two or more polymerization initiators are used in combination, the total content is preferably within the above range.
<熱重合開始剤>
 熱重合開始剤としては、例えば、2,2’-アゾビスイソブチロニトリル(AIBN)、3-カルボキシプロピオニトリル、アゾビスマレノニトリル、及び、ジメチル-(2,2’)-アゾビス(2-メチルプロピオネート)[V-601]等のアゾ化合物、並びに、過酸化ベンゾイル、過酸化ラウロイル、及び、過硫酸カリウム等の有機過酸化物が挙げられる。
 熱重合開始剤の具体例としては、加藤清視著「紫外線硬化システム」(株式会社総合技術センター発行:平成元年)の第65~148頁に記載されている重合開始剤が挙げられる。
<Thermal polymerization initiator>
Examples of thermal polymerization initiators include 2,2′-azobisisobutyronitrile (AIBN), 3-carboxypropionitrile, azobismalenonitrile, and dimethyl-(2,2′)-azobis(2 -methyl propionate) [V-601], and organic peroxides such as benzoyl peroxide, lauroyl peroxide, and potassium persulfate.
Specific examples of thermal polymerization initiators include polymerization initiators described in Kiyomi Kato, "Ultraviolet Curing System" (published by Sogo Gijutsu Center Co., Ltd.: 1989), pp. 65-148.
<光重合開始剤>
 光重合開始剤としては、特に制限はなく、公知の光重合開始剤の中から適宜選択することができる。例えば、紫外線領域から可視領域の光線に対して感光性を有する化合物が好ましい。光重合開始剤は、光ラジカル重合開始剤であることが好ましい。
<Photoinitiator>
The photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited and can be appropriately selected from known photopolymerization initiators. For example, compounds having photosensitivity to light in the ultraviolet range to the visible range are preferred. The photopolymerization initiator is preferably a photoradical polymerization initiator.
 光重合開始剤としては、ハロゲン化炭化水素誘導体(例えば、トリアジン骨格を有する化合物、オキサジアゾール骨格を有する化合物等)、アシルホスフィン化合物、ヘキサアリールビイミダゾール、オキシム化合物、有機過酸化物、チオ化合物、ケトン化合物、芳香族オニウム塩、α-ヒドロキシケトン化合物、及び、α-アミノケトン化合物が挙げられる。光重合開始剤は、露光感度の観点から、トリハロメチルトリアジン化合物、ベンジルジメチルケタール化合物、α-ヒドロキシケトン化合物、α-アミノケトン化合物、アシルホスフィン化合物、ホスフィンオキサイド化合物、メタロセン化合物、オキシム化合物、トリアリールイミダゾールダイマー、オニウム化合物、ベンゾチアゾール化合物、ベンゾフェノン化合物、アセトフェノン化合物、シクロペンタジエン-ベンゼン-鉄錯体、ハロメチルオキサジアゾール化合物、又は、3-アリール置換クマリン化合物であることが好ましく、オキシム化合物、α-ヒドロキシケトン化合物、α-アミノケトン化合物、及び、アシルホスフィン化合物から選ばれる化合物であることがより好ましく、オキシム化合物であることが更に好ましい。光重合開始剤としては、特開2014-130173号公報の段落[0065]~[0111]、特許第6301489号公報に記載された化合物が挙げられ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Examples of photopolymerization initiators include halogenated hydrocarbon derivatives (e.g., compounds having a triazine skeleton, compounds having an oxadiazole skeleton, etc.), acylphosphine compounds, hexaarylbiimidazoles, oxime compounds, organic peroxides, thio compounds. , ketone compounds, aromatic onium salts, α-hydroxyketone compounds, and α-aminoketone compounds. From the viewpoint of exposure sensitivity, photopolymerization initiators include trihalomethyltriazine compounds, benzyldimethylketal compounds, α-hydroxyketone compounds, α-aminoketone compounds, acylphosphine compounds, phosphine oxide compounds, metallocene compounds, oxime compounds, and triarylimidazoles. dimers, onium compounds, benzothiazole compounds, benzophenone compounds, acetophenone compounds, cyclopentadiene-benzene-iron complexes, halomethyloxadiazole compounds, or 3-aryl-substituted coumarin compounds, oxime compounds, α-hydroxy A compound selected from a ketone compound, an α-aminoketone compound, and an acylphosphine compound is more preferred, and an oxime compound is even more preferred. Examples of the photopolymerization initiator include compounds described in paragraphs [0065] to [0111] of JP-A-2014-130173 and Japanese Patent No. 6301489, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
 α-ヒドロキシケトン化合物の市販品としては、Omnirad184、Omnirad1173、Omnirad2959、Omnirad127(以上、IGM Resins B.V.社製)等が挙げられる(順に、旧BASF社製、Irgacure184、Irgacure1173、Irgacure2959、Irgacure127)。α-アミノケトン化合物の市販品としては、Omnirad907、Omnirad369、Omnirad369E、及び、Omnirad379EG(以上、IGM Resins B.V.社製)等が挙げられる(順に、旧BASF社製、Irgacure907、Irgacure369、Irgacure369E、Irgacure379EG)。アシルホスフィン化合物の市販品としては、Omnirad819、OmniradTPO(以上、IGM Resins B.V.社製)等が挙げられる(順に、旧BASF社製、Irgacure819、IrgacureTPO)。  Commercially available α-hydroxyketone compounds include Omnirad 184, Omnirad 1173, Omnirad 2959, Omnirad 127 (manufactured by IGM Resins BV) and the like (former BASF, Irgacure 184, Irgacure 1173, Irgacure 2959, Irgacure 2959, Irgacure in that order). . Examples of commercially available α-aminoketone compounds include Omnirad 907, Omnirad 369, Omnirad 369E, and Omnirad 379EG (manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), etc. ). Commercially available acylphosphine compounds include Omnirad 819 and Omnirad TPO (manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.) and the like (former BASF, Irgacure 819 and Irgacure TPO in this order). 
 オキシム化合物としては、特開2001-233842号公報に記載の化合物、特開2000-080068号公報に記載の化合物、特開2006-342166号公報に記載の化合物、J.C.S.Perkin II(1979年、pp.1653-1660)に記載の化合物、J.C.S.Perkin II(1979年、pp.156-162)に記載の化合物、Journal of Photopolymer Science and Technology(1995年、pp.202-232)に記載の化合物、特開2000-066385号公報に記載の化合物、特開2000-080068号公報に記載の化合物、特表2004-534797号公報に記載の化合物、特開2006-342166号公報に記載の化合物、特開2017-019766号公報に記載の化合物、特許第6065596号公報に記載の化合物、国際公開第2015/152153号に記載の化合物、国際公開第2017/051680号に記載の化合物、特開2017-198865号公報に記載の化合物、国際公開第2017/164127号の段落[0025]~[0038]に記載の化合物、国際公開第2013/167515号に記載の化合物、国際公開第2019/088055号に記載の化合物が挙げられる。オキシム化合物の具体例としては、3-ベンゾイルオキシイミノブタン-2-オン、3-アセトキシイミノブタン-2-オン、3-プロピオニルオキシイミノブタン-2-オン、2-アセトキシイミノペンタン-3-オン、2-アセトキシイミノ-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オン、2-ベンゾイルオキシイミノ-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オン、3-(4-トルエンスルホニルオキシ)イミノブタン-2-オン、及び2-エトキシカルボニルオキシイミノ-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オンが挙げられる。市販品としては、IRGACURE-OXE01、IRGACURE-OXE02、IRGACURE-OXE03、IRGACURE-OXE04(以上、BASF社製)、TR-PBG-304(常州強力電子新材料有限公司製)、アデカオプトマーN-1919((株)ADEKA製、特開2012-014052号公報に記載の光重合開始剤2)が挙げられる。また、オキシム化合物としては、着色性が無い化合物、及び、透明性が高く変色し難い化合物を用いることも好ましい。市販品としては、アデカアークルズNCI-730、NCI-831、NCI-930(以上、(株)ADEKA製)が挙げられる。 Examples of oxime compounds include compounds described in JP-A-2001-233842, compounds described in JP-A-2000-080068, compounds described in JP-A-2006-342166, J. Am. C. S. Compounds described in Perkin II (1979, pp.1653-1660); C. S. Compounds described in Perkin II (1979, pp.156-162), compounds described in Journal of Photopolymer Science and Technology (1995, pp.202-232), compounds described in JP-A-2000-066385, Compounds described in JP-A-2000-080068, compounds described in JP-A-2004-534797, compounds described in JP-A-2006-342166, compounds described in JP-A-2017-019766, Patent No. Compounds described in WO 2015/152153, compounds described in WO 2017/051680, compounds described in JP 2017-198865, WO 2017/164127 Paragraphs [0025] to [0038] of No., compounds described in International Publication No. 2013/167515, and compounds described in International Publication No. 2019/088055. Specific examples of oxime compounds include 3-benzoyloxyiminobutane-2-one, 3-acetoxyiminobutane-2-one, 3-propionyloxyiminobutane-2-one, 2-acetoxyiminopentane-3-one, 2-acetoxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 2-benzoyloxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 3-(4-toluenesulfonyloxy)iminobutan-2-one, and 2-ethoxycarbonyloxy and imino-1-phenylpropan-1-one. Commercially available products include IRGACURE-OXE01, IRGACURE-OXE02, IRGACURE-OXE03, IRGACURE-OXE04 (manufactured by BASF), TR-PBG-304 (manufactured by Changzhou Yuan Electronics New Materials Co., Ltd.), and Adeka Optomer N-1919. (manufactured by ADEKA Corporation, photopolymerization initiator 2 described in JP-A-2012-014052). As the oxime compound, it is also preferable to use a compound having no coloring property and a compound having high transparency and resistance to discoloration. Commercially available products include ADEKA Arkles NCI-730, NCI-831 and NCI-930 (manufactured by ADEKA Corporation).
 本発明において、光重合開始剤として、フルオレン環を有するオキシム化合物を用いることもできる。フルオレン環を有するオキシム化合物の具体例としては、特開2014-137466号公報に記載の化合物が挙げられる。 In the present invention, an oxime compound having a fluorene ring can also be used as a photopolymerization initiator. Specific examples of oxime compounds having a fluorene ring include compounds described in JP-A-2014-137466.
 また、光重合開始剤として、カルバゾール環の少なくとも1つのベンゼン環がナフタレン環となった骨格を有するオキシム化合物を用いることもできる。そのようなオキシム化合物の具体例としては、国際公開第2013/083505号に記載の化合物が挙げられる。 Also, as a photopolymerization initiator, an oxime compound having a skeleton in which at least one benzene ring of a carbazole ring is a naphthalene ring can be used. Specific examples of such oxime compounds include compounds described in WO2013/083505.
 本発明において、光重合開始剤として、フッ素原子を有するオキシム化合物を用いることもできる。フッ素原子を有するオキシム化合物の具体例としては、特開2010-262028号公報に記載の化合物、特表2014-500852号公報に記載の化合物24、36~40、特開2013-164471号公報に記載の化合物(C-3)が挙げられる。 In the present invention, an oxime compound having a fluorine atom can also be used as a photopolymerization initiator. Specific examples of the oxime compound having a fluorine atom include compounds described in JP-A-2010-262028, compounds 24, 36 to 40 described in JP-A-2014-500852, and JP-A-2013-164471. and the compound (C-3) of
 本発明において、光重合開始剤として、ニトロ基を有するオキシム化合物を用いることができる。ニトロ基を有するオキシム化合物は、二量体とすることも好ましい。ニトロ基を有するオキシム化合物の具体例としては、特開2013-114249号公報の段落[0031]~[0047]、特開2014-137466号公報の段落[0008]~[0012]、[0070]~[0079]に記載されている化合物、特許4223071号公報の段落[0007]~[0025]に記載されている化合物、及び、アデカアークルズNCI-831((株)ADEKA製)が挙げられる。 In the present invention, an oxime compound having a nitro group can be used as a photopolymerization initiator. The oxime compound having a nitro group is also preferably a dimer. Specific examples of the oxime compound having a nitro group include paragraphs [0031] to [0047] of JP-A-2013-114249, paragraphs [0008]-[0012] and [0070]- of JP-A-2014-137466. [0079], compounds described in paragraphs [0007] to [0025] of Japanese Patent No. 4223071, and ADEKA Arkles NCI-831 (manufactured by ADEKA Corporation).
 本発明における光重合開始剤として、ベンゾフラン骨格を有するオキシム化合物を用いることもできる。具体例としては、国際公開第2015/036910号に記載されるOE-01~OE-75が挙げられる。 An oxime compound having a benzofuran skeleton can also be used as the photopolymerization initiator in the present invention. Specific examples include OE-01 to OE-75 described in WO 2015/036910.
 本発明における好ましく使用されるオキシム化合物の具体例を以下に示すが、本発明はこれらに限定されるものではない。 Specific examples of oxime compounds preferably used in the present invention are shown below, but the present invention is not limited to these.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
 オキシム化合物は、波長350~500nmの範囲に極大吸収波長を有する化合物が好ましく、波長360~480nmの範囲に極大吸収波長を有する化合物がより好ましい。また、オキシム化合物の波長365nm又は波長405nmにおけるモル吸光係数は、感度の観点から、高いことが好ましく、1000~300000であることがより好ましく、2000~300000であることが更に好ましく、5000~200000であることが特に好ましい。化合物のモル吸光係数は、公知の方法を用いて測定することができる。例えば、分光光度計(Varian社製Cary-5 spectrophotometer)にて、酢酸エチル溶媒を用い、0.01g/Lの濃度で測定することが好ましい。 The oxime compound is preferably a compound having a maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 350 to 500 nm, more preferably a compound having a maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 360 to 480 nm. Further, the molar extinction coefficient of the oxime compound at a wavelength of 365 nm or a wavelength of 405 nm is preferably high from the viewpoint of sensitivity, more preferably 1000 to 300000, further preferably 2000 to 300000, even more preferably 5000 to 200000. It is particularly preferred to have The molar extinction coefficient of a compound can be measured using known methods. For example, it is preferably measured at a concentration of 0.01 g/L using an ethyl acetate solvent with a spectrophotometer (Cary-5 spectrophotometer manufactured by Varian).
 光重合開始剤としては、2官能又は3官能以上の光ラジカル重合開始剤を用いてもよい。そのような光ラジカル重合開始剤を用いることにより、光ラジカル重合開始剤の1分子から2つ以上のラジカルが発生するため、良好な感度が得られる。また、非対称構造の化合物を用いた場合においては、結晶性が低下して溶剤等への溶解性が向上して、経時で析出しにくくなり、組成物の経時安定性を向上させることができる。2官能又は3官能以上の光ラジカル重合開始剤の具体例としては、例えば、特表2010-527339号公報、特表2011-524436号公報、国際公開第2015/004565号、特表2016-532675号公報の段落[0407]~[0412]、国際公開第2017/033680号の段落[0039]~[0055]に記載されているオキシム化合物の2量体、特表2013-522445号公報に記載されている化合物(E)及び化合物(G)、国際公開第2016/034963号に記載されているCmpd1~7、特表2017-523465号公報の段落[0007]に記載されているオキシムエステル類光開始剤、特開2017-167399号公報の段落[0020]~[0033]に記載されている光開始剤、特開2017-151342号公報の段落[0017]~[0026]に記載されている光重合開始剤(A)が挙げられる。 As the photopolymerization initiator, a bifunctional or trifunctional or higher functional radical photopolymerization initiator may be used. By using such a radical photopolymerization initiator, two or more radicals are generated from one molecule of the radical photopolymerization initiator, so good sensitivity can be obtained. In addition, when a compound having an asymmetric structure is used, the crystallinity is lowered, the solubility in a solvent or the like is improved, the precipitation becomes difficult over time, and the stability over time of the composition can be improved. Specific examples of bifunctional or trifunctional or higher photoradical polymerization initiators include, for example, Japanese Patent Publication No. 2010-527339, Japanese Patent Publication No. 2011-524436, International Publication No. 2015/004565, Japanese Patent Publication No. 2016-532675. Dimers of oxime compounds described in paragraphs [0407] to [0412] of the publication and paragraphs [0039] to [0055] of WO 2017/033680, described in JP 2013-522445 compound (E) and compound (G), Cmpd 1 to 7 described in International Publication No. 2016/034963, oxime ester photoinitiator described in paragraph [0007] of JP 2017-523465 , Photoinitiators described in paragraphs [0020] to [0033] of JP-A-2017-167399, paragraphs [0017] to [0026] of JP-A-2017-151342 Photopolymerization initiation described agent (A).
 光重合開始剤は、オキシム化合物とα-アミノケトン化合物とを含むことも好ましい。両者を併用することで、現像性が向上し、矩形性に優れたパターンを形成しやすい。オキシム化合物とα-アミノケトン化合物とを併用する場合、オキシム化合物100質量部に対して、α-アミノケトン化合物が50~600質量部が好ましく、150~400質量部がより好ましい。 The photopolymerization initiator preferably contains an oxime compound and an α-aminoketone compound. By using both together, the developability is improved, and it is easy to form a pattern excellent in rectangularity. When an oxime compound and an α-aminoketone compound are used together, the α-aminoketone compound is preferably 50 to 600 parts by mass, more preferably 150 to 400 parts by mass, per 100 parts by mass of the oxime compound.
 光重合開始剤の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対して、0.1~40質量%が好ましく、0.5~30質量%がより好ましく、1~20質量%が更に好ましい。組成物は光重合開始剤を1種のみ含んでいてもよく、2種以上含んでいてもよい。2種以上含む場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 The content of the photopolymerization initiator is preferably 0.1 to 40% by mass, more preferably 0.5 to 30% by mass, still more preferably 1 to 20% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition. The composition may contain only one type of photopolymerization initiator, or may contain two or more types. When two or more kinds are included, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is within the above range.
〔重合禁止剤〕
 組成物は、重合禁止剤を含有してもよい。
 重合禁止剤としては、例えば、公知の重合禁止剤を使用できる。重合禁止剤としては、例えば、フェノール系重合禁止剤(例えば、p-メトキシフェノール、2,5-ジ-tert-ブチル-4-メチルフェノール、2,6-ジtert-ブチル-4-メチルフェノール、4,4’-チオビス(3-メチル-6-t-ブチルフェノール)、2,2’-メチレンビス(4-メチル-6-t-ブチルフェノール)、4-メトキシナフトール等);ハイドロキノン系重合禁止剤(例えば、ハイドロキノン、2,6-ジ-tert-ブチルハイロドロキノン等);キノン系重合禁止剤(例えば、ベンゾキノン等);フリーラジカル系重合禁止剤(例えば、2,2,6,6-テトラメチルピペリジン1-オキシルフリーラジカル、4-ヒドロキシ-2,2,6,6-テトラメチルピペリジン1-オキシルフリーラジカル等);ニトロベンゼン系重合禁止剤(例えば、ニトロベンゼン、4-ニトロトルエン等);及び、フェノチアジン系重合禁止剤(例えば、フェノチアジン、2-メトキシフェノチアジン等);が挙げられる。
 中でも、本発明の効果がより優れる点から、フェノール系重合禁止剤、又は、フリーラジカル系重合禁止剤が好ましい。
[Polymerization inhibitor]
The composition may contain a polymerization inhibitor.
As the polymerization inhibitor, for example, a known polymerization inhibitor can be used. Examples of polymerization inhibitors include phenol-based polymerization inhibitors (e.g., p-methoxyphenol, 2,5-di-tert-butyl-4-methylphenol, 2,6-di-tert-butyl-4-methylphenol, 4,4'-thiobis(3-methyl-6-t-butylphenol), 2,2'-methylenebis(4-methyl-6-t-butylphenol), 4-methoxynaphthol, etc.); hydroquinone-based polymerization inhibitors (e.g. , hydroquinone, 2,6-di-tert-butyl hydroquinone, etc.); quinone polymerization inhibitors (e.g., benzoquinone, etc.); free radical polymerization inhibitors (e.g., 2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine 1-oxyl free radical, 4-hydroxy-2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine 1-oxyl free radical, etc.); nitrobenzene-based polymerization inhibitors (e.g., nitrobenzene, 4-nitrotoluene, etc.); and phenothiazine-based polymerization inhibitors (eg, phenothiazine, 2-methoxyphenothiazine, etc.);
Among them, a phenol-based polymerization inhibitor or a free-radical polymerization inhibitor is preferable because the effects of the present invention are more excellent.
 重合禁止剤の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対して、0.0001~0.5質量%が好ましく、0.001~0.2質量%がより好ましく、0.008~0.05質量%が更に好ましい。重合禁止剤は、1種を単独で用いても、2種以上を併用してもよい。2種以上の重合禁止剤を併用する場合には、合計含有量が上記範囲内であることが好ましい。
 また、組成物中の重合性化合物の含有量に対する、重合禁止剤の含有量の比(重合禁止剤の含有量/重合性化合物の含有量(質量比))は、0.00005~0.02が好ましく、0.0001~0.005がより好ましい。
The content of the polymerization inhibitor is preferably 0.0001 to 0.5 mass%, more preferably 0.001 to 0.2 mass%, and 0.008 to 0.05, based on the total solid content of the composition. % by mass is more preferred. A polymerization inhibitor may be used individually by 1 type, or may use 2 or more types together. When two or more polymerization inhibitors are used in combination, the total content is preferably within the above range.
In addition, the ratio of the content of the polymerization inhibitor to the content of the polymerizable compound in the composition (content of the polymerization inhibitor/content of the polymerizable compound (mass ratio)) is 0.00005 to 0.02. is preferred, and 0.0001 to 0.005 is more preferred.
〔溶剤〕
 本発明の組成物は、溶剤を含有することが好ましい。溶剤としては有機溶剤が好ましい。有機溶剤としては、エステル系溶剤、ケトン系溶剤、アルコール系溶剤、アミド系溶剤、エーテル系溶剤、及び、炭化水素系溶剤が挙げられる。これらの詳細については、国際公開第2015/166779号の段落[0223]を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。また、環状アルキル基が置換したエステル系溶剤、環状アルキル基が置換したケトン系溶剤も好ましく用いることもできる。有機溶剤の具体例としては、ポリエチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、ジクロロメタン、3-エトキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル、エチルセロソルブアセテート、乳酸エチル、ジエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、酢酸ブチル、3-メトキシプロピオン酸メチル、2-ヘプタノン、シクロヘキサノン、酢酸シクロヘキシル、シクロペンタノン、エチルカルビトールアセテート、ブチルカルビトールアセテート、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、及び、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテートが挙げられる。ただし、有機溶剤としての芳香族炭化水素類(ベンゼン、トルエン、キシレン、及び、エチルベンゼン等)は、環境面等の理由により低減したほうがよい場合がある(例えば、有機溶剤全量に対して、50質量ppm(parts per million)以下とすることもでき、10質量ppm以下とすることもでき、1質量ppm以下とすることもできる)。
〔solvent〕
The composition of the invention preferably contains a solvent. An organic solvent is preferable as the solvent. Organic solvents include ester-based solvents, ketone-based solvents, alcohol-based solvents, amide-based solvents, ether-based solvents, and hydrocarbon-based solvents. For these details, reference can be made to paragraph [0223] of WO2015/166779, the content of which is incorporated herein. Ester-based solvents substituted with cyclic alkyl groups and ketone-based solvents substituted with cyclic alkyl groups can also be preferably used. Specific examples of organic solvents include polyethylene glycol monomethyl ether, dichloromethane, methyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl lactate, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, butyl acetate, methyl 3-methoxypropionate, 2 - heptanone, cyclohexanone, cyclohexyl acetate, cyclopentanone, ethyl carbitol acetate, butyl carbitol acetate, propylene glycol monomethyl ether and propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate. However, aromatic hydrocarbons (benzene, toluene, xylene, ethylbenzene, etc.) as organic solvents may be reduced for environmental reasons (for example, 50 mass ppm (parts per million) or less, 10 mass ppm or less, or 1 mass ppm or less).
 本発明においては、金属含有量の少ない有機溶剤を用いることが好ましく、有機溶剤の金属含有量は、例えば10質量ppb(parts per billion)以下であることが好ましい。必要に応じて質量ppt(parts per trillion)レベルの有機溶剤を用いてもよく、そのような有機溶剤は例えば東洋合成社が提供している(化学工業日報、2015年11月13日)。 In the present invention, it is preferable to use an organic solvent with a low metal content, and the metal content of the organic solvent is preferably, for example, 10 mass ppb (parts per billion) or less. If necessary, an organic solvent with a ppt (parts per trillion) mass level may be used, and such an organic solvent is provided by, for example, Toyo Gosei Co., Ltd. (Chemical Daily, November 13, 2015).
 有機溶剤から金属等の不純物を除去する方法としては、例えば、蒸留(分子蒸留や薄膜蒸留等)やフィルタを用いたろ過を挙げることができる。ろ過に用いるフィルタのフィルタ孔径としては、10μm以下が好ましく、5μm以下がより好ましく、3μm以下が更に好ましい。下限は、1nm以上が好ましい。フィルタの材質は、ポリテトラフロロエチレン、ポリエチレン又はナイロンが好ましい。 Examples of methods for removing impurities such as metals from organic solvents include distillation (molecular distillation, thin film distillation, etc.) and filtration using a filter. The filter pore size of the filter used for filtration is preferably 10 μm or less, more preferably 5 μm or less, and even more preferably 3 μm or less. The lower limit is preferably 1 nm or more. The material of the filter is preferably polytetrafluoroethylene, polyethylene or nylon.
 有機溶剤は、異性体(原子数が同じであるが構造が異なる化合物)が含まれていてもよい。また、異性体は、1種のみが含まれていてもよいし、複数種含まれていてもよい。 The organic solvent may contain isomers (compounds with the same number of atoms but different structures). Moreover, only one isomer may be contained, or a plurality of isomers may be contained.
 有機溶剤中の過酸化物の含有率が0.8mmol/L以下であることが好ましく、過酸化物を実質的に含まないことがより好ましい。 The content of peroxide in the organic solvent is preferably 0.8 mmol/L or less, and more preferably substantially free of peroxide.
 溶剤の含有量は、組成物の全量に対して、10~97質量%が好ましい。下限は、30質量%以上がより好ましく、40質量%以上が更に好ましく、50質量%以上が特に好ましく、60質量%以上がより一層好ましく、70質量%以上が最も好ましい。上限は、96質量%以下がより好ましく、95質量%以下が更に好ましい。組成物は溶剤を1種のみ含んでいてもよく、2種以上含んでいてもよい。2種以上含む場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 The content of the solvent is preferably 10-97% by mass with respect to the total amount of the composition. The lower limit is more preferably 30% by mass or more, still more preferably 40% by mass or more, particularly preferably 50% by mass or more, even more preferably 60% by mass or more, and most preferably 70% by mass or more. The upper limit is more preferably 96% by mass or less, and even more preferably 95% by mass or less. The composition may contain only one type of solvent, or may contain two or more types. When two or more kinds are included, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is within the above range.
〔その他の任意成分〕
 組成物は、上述した成分以外のその他の任意成分を更に含有してもよい。
 例えば、上述した以外の粒子性成分、紫外線吸収剤、シランカップリング剤、界面活性剤、増感剤、共増感剤、架橋剤、硬化促進剤、熱硬化促進剤、可塑剤、希釈剤、及び、感脂化剤等が挙げられ、更に、基板表面への密着促進剤及びその他の助剤類(例えば、導電性粒子、充填剤、消泡剤、難燃剤、レベリング剤、剥離促進剤、酸化防止剤、香料、表面張力調整剤、及び、連鎖移動剤等)等の公知の添加剤を必要に応じて加えてもよい。
 これらの成分は、例えば、特開2012-003225号公報の段落[0183]~[0228](対応する米国特許出願公開第2013/0034812号明細書の段落[0237]~[0309])、特開2008-250074号公報の段落[0101]~[0102]、段落[0103]~[0104]、段落[0107]~[0109]、及び、特開2013-195480号公報の段落[0159]~[0184]等の記載を参酌でき、これらの内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。
 界面活性剤としては、例えば、フッ素原子を含有する界面活性剤及びフッ素原子を含有しない界面活性剤が挙げられ、フッ素原子を含有しない界面活性剤が好ましく、反射率がより優れる点から、シリコーン系界面活性剤がより好ましい。
[Other optional ingredients]
The composition may further contain other optional ingredients than those mentioned above.
For example, particulate components other than those mentioned above, ultraviolet absorbers, silane coupling agents, surfactants, sensitizers, co-sensitizers, cross-linking agents, curing accelerators, thermosetting accelerators, plasticizers, diluents, and oil sensitizers, etc., and adhesion promoters to the substrate surface and other aids (e.g., conductive particles, fillers, antifoaming agents, flame retardants, leveling agents, release accelerators, Antioxidants, perfumes, surface tension modifiers, chain transfer agents, etc.) may be added as necessary.
These components are, for example, paragraphs [0183] to [0228] of JP 2012-003225 (paragraphs [0237] to [0309] of corresponding US Patent Application Publication No. 2013/0034812), JP 2008-250074, paragraphs [0101] to [0102], paragraphs [0103] to [0104], paragraphs [0107] to [0109], and paragraphs [0159] to [0184 of JP 2013-195480 ] etc. can be taken into consideration, and these contents are incorporated in this specification.
Examples of surfactants include surfactants containing fluorine atoms and surfactants containing no fluorine atoms. Surfactants containing no fluorine atoms are preferred. Surfactants are more preferred.
 本発明の組成物の別の好適態様としては、修飾無機粒子と、重合性化合物とを含有し、修飾無機粒子が、無機粒子と、無機粒子の一部又は全部を被覆する被覆層とを含有し、被覆層が、カルボン酸基、スルホン酸基、リン酸基、硝酸基、フェノール性水酸基、及び、酸無水物基からなる群から選択される少なくとも1種と、疎水性基とを含有することが挙げられる。
 上記組成物に含まれる各成分については、上述した各成分と同義であり、好適範囲も同じである。
Another preferred embodiment of the composition of the present invention contains modified inorganic particles and a polymerizable compound, and the modified inorganic particles contain inorganic particles and a coating layer covering part or all of the inorganic particles. and the coating layer contains at least one selected from the group consisting of a carboxylic acid group, a sulfonic acid group, a phosphoric acid group, a nitric acid group, a phenolic hydroxyl group, and an acid anhydride group, and a hydrophobic group. Things are mentioned.
Each component contained in the above composition is synonymous with each component described above, and the preferred ranges are also the same.
〔組成物の製造方法〕
 組成物は、修飾無機粒子の分散液を製造し、得られた組成物を更にその他の成分と混合して組成物とすることが好ましい。
 また、組成物が色材を含有する場合、色材を含有する組成物(分散液)を製造し、得られた組成物を更にその他の成分と混合して組成物とすることが好ましい。
 組成物は、色材、樹脂、及び、溶剤を混合して調製することが好ましい。また、上記組成物に、更に、重合禁止剤を含有させることも好ましい。
[Method for producing composition]
The composition is preferably prepared by preparing a dispersion liquid of the modified inorganic particles and further mixing the obtained composition with other components to form a composition.
Moreover, when the composition contains a coloring material, it is preferable to prepare a composition (dispersion) containing the coloring material, and mix the resulting composition with other components to obtain a composition.
The composition is preferably prepared by mixing a coloring material, a resin and a solvent. Moreover, it is also preferable that the composition further contains a polymerization inhibitor.
 上記組成物は、上記の各成分を公知の混合方法(例えば、撹拌機、ホモジナイザー、高圧乳化装置、湿式粉砕機、又は、湿式分散機等を用いた混合方法)により混合して調製できる。 The above composition can be prepared by mixing each of the above components by a known mixing method (for example, a mixing method using a stirrer, homogenizer, high-pressure emulsifier, wet pulverizer, or wet disperser).
 組成物の調製に際しては、各成分を一括配合してもよいし、各成分をそれぞれ、溶剤に溶解又は分散した後に逐次配合してもよい。また、配合する際の投入順序及び作業条件は特に制限されない。 When preparing the composition, each component may be blended all at once, or each component may be dissolved or dispersed in a solvent and then blended sequentially. In addition, there are no particular restrictions on the order of addition and working conditions when blending.
 組成物は、異物の除去及び欠陥の低減等の目的で、フィルタでろ過することが好ましい。フィルタとしては、例えば、従来からろ過用途等に用いられているフィルタであれば特に制限されずに使用できる。例えば、PTFE(ポリテトラフルオロエチレン)等のフッ素樹脂、ナイロン等のポリアミド系樹脂、並びに、ポリエチレン及びポリプロピレン(PP)等のポリオレフィン系樹脂(高密度、超高分子量を含む)等によるフィルタが挙げられる。中でも、ポリプロピレン(高密度ポリプロピレンを含む)又はナイロンが好ましい。
 フィルタの孔径は、0.1~7.0μmが好ましく、0.2~2.5μmがより好ましく、0.2~1.5μmが更に好ましく、0.3~0.7μmが特に好ましい。この範囲とすれば、顔料(黒色顔料を含む)のろ過詰まりを抑えつつ、顔料に含まれる不純物及び凝集物等、微細な異物を確実に除去できるようになる。
 フィルタを使用する際、異なるフィルタを組み合わせてもよい。その際、第1のフィルタでのフィルタリングは、1回のみでもよいし、2回以上行ってもよい。異なるフィルタを組み合わせて2回以上フィルタリングを行う場合は1回目のフィルタリングの孔径より2回目以降の孔径が同じ、又は、大きい方が好ましい。また、上述した範囲内で異なる孔径の第1のフィルタを組み合わせてもよい。ここでの孔径は、フィルタメーカーの公称値を参照できる。市販のフィルタとしては、例えば、日本ポール株式会社、アドバンテック東洋株式会社、日本インテグリス株式会社(旧日本マイクロリス株式会社)、及び、株式会社キッツマイクロフィルタ等が提供する各種フィルタの中から選択できる。
 第2のフィルタは、上述した第1のフィルタと同様の材料等で形成されたフィルタを使用できる。第2のフィルタの孔径は、0.2~10.0μmが好ましく、0.2~7.0μmがより好ましく、0.3~6.0μmが更に好ましい。
 組成物は、金属、ハロゲンを含有する金属塩、酸、アルカリ等の不純物を含まないことが好ましい。これら材料に含まれる不純物の含有量は、1質量ppm以下が好ましく、1質量ppb以下がより好ましく、100質量ppt以下が更に好ましく、10質量ppt以下が特に好ましく、実質的に含まないこと(測定装置の検出限界以下であること)が最も好ましい。
 なお、上記不純物は、誘導結合プラズマ質量分析装置(横河アナリティカルシステムズ製、Agilent 7500cs型)により測定できる。
The composition is preferably filtered with a filter for purposes such as removing foreign substances and reducing defects. As the filter, for example, any filter that has been used for filtering purposes can be used without particular limitation. Examples include filters made of fluororesins such as PTFE (polytetrafluoroethylene), polyamide resins such as nylon, and polyolefin resins (including high density and ultrahigh molecular weight) such as polyethylene and polypropylene (PP). . Among them, polypropylene (including high-density polypropylene) or nylon is preferred.
The pore size of the filter is preferably 0.1-7.0 μm, more preferably 0.2-2.5 μm, even more preferably 0.2-1.5 μm, and particularly preferably 0.3-0.7 μm. Within this range, it is possible to reliably remove fine foreign matters such as impurities and aggregates contained in the pigment while suppressing filter clogging of the pigment (including black pigment).
When using filters, different filters may be combined. At that time, the filtering by the first filter may be performed only once, or may be performed twice or more. When filtering is performed twice or more by combining different filters, it is preferable that the pore size of the second and subsequent filtering is the same as or larger than the pore size of the first filtering. Also, the first filters having different pore diameters within the range described above may be combined. The pore size here can refer to the nominal value of the filter manufacturer. Commercially available filters can be selected from various filters provided by Nihon Pall Co., Ltd., Advantech Toyo Co., Ltd., Nihon Entegris Co., Ltd. (formerly Nihon Microlith Co., Ltd.), and Kitz Micro Filter Co., Ltd., for example.
As the second filter, a filter made of the same material as the first filter described above can be used. The pore size of the second filter is preferably 0.2-10.0 μm, more preferably 0.2-7.0 μm, even more preferably 0.3-6.0 μm.
The composition preferably does not contain impurities such as metals, halogen-containing metal salts, acids and alkalis. The content of impurities contained in these materials is preferably 1 mass ppm or less, more preferably 1 mass ppb or less, still more preferably 100 mass ppt or less, and particularly preferably 10 mass ppt or less. below the detection limit of the instrument) is most preferred.
The above impurities can be measured by an inductively coupled plasma mass spectrometer (manufactured by Yokogawa Analytical Systems, Agilent 7500cs).
[硬化膜の製造]
 本発明の組成物を用いて形成された組成物層を硬化して、硬化膜(パターン状の硬化膜を含む)を得られる。
 硬化膜の製造方法は、特に制限されないが、以下の工程を含有するが好ましい。
・組成物層形成工程
・露光工程
・現像工程
 以下、各工程について説明する。
[Production of cured film]
A composition layer formed using the composition of the present invention is cured to obtain a cured film (including a patterned cured film).
A method for producing a cured film is not particularly limited, but preferably includes the following steps.
- Composition layer formation process - exposure process - development process Hereinafter, each process is demonstrated.
〔組成物層形成工程〕
 組成物層形成工程においては、露光に先立ち、支持体等の上に、組成物を付与して組成物の層(組成物層)を形成する。支持体としては、例えば、基板(例えば、シリコン基板)上にCCD(Charge Coupled Device)又はCMOS(Complementary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor)等の撮像素子(受光素子)が設けられた固体撮像素子用基板を使用できる。また、支持体上には、必要により、上部の層との密着改良、物質の拡散防止及び基板表面の平坦化等のために下塗り層を設けてもよい。
[Composition layer forming step]
In the composition layer forming step, prior to exposure, the composition is applied onto a support or the like to form a composition layer (composition layer). As the support, for example, a substrate for a solid-state imaging device provided with an imaging device (light receiving device) such as CCD (Charge Coupled Device) or CMOS (Complementary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor) on a substrate (eg, silicon substrate) is used. can. Further, if necessary, an undercoat layer may be provided on the support for improving adhesion to the upper layer, preventing diffusion of substances, flattening the surface of the substrate, and the like.
 支持体上への組成物の適用方法としては、例えば、スリット塗布法、インクジェット法、回転塗布法、流延塗布法、ロール塗布法、及び、スクリーン印刷法等の各種の塗布方法を適用できる。組成物層の膜厚は、0.1~10μmが好ましく、0.2~5μmがより好ましく、0.2~3μmが更に好ましい。支持体上に塗布された組成物層の乾燥(プリベーク)は、例えば、ホットプレート、オーブン等で50~140℃の温度で10~300秒間で行える。 As a method for applying the composition onto the support, for example, various coating methods such as a slit coating method, an inkjet method, a spin coating method, a cast coating method, a roll coating method, and a screen printing method can be applied. The film thickness of the composition layer is preferably 0.1 to 10 μm, more preferably 0.2 to 5 μm, even more preferably 0.2 to 3 μm. Drying (pre-baking) of the composition layer coated on the support can be carried out, for example, by using a hot plate, an oven or the like at a temperature of 50 to 140° C. for 10 to 300 seconds.
〔露光工程〕
 露光工程では、組成物層形成工程において形成された組成物層に活性光線又は放射線を照射して露光し、光照射された組成物層を硬化させる。
 光照射の方法は、パターン状の開口部を有するフォトマスクを介して光照射することが好ましい。
 露光は放射線の照射により行うことが好ましい。露光に際して使用できる放射線は、g線、h線、又は、i線等の紫外線が好ましく、光源は高圧水銀灯が好ましい。照射強度は5~1500mJ/cmが好ましく、10~1000mJ/cmがより好ましい。
 なお、組成物が熱重合開始剤を含有する場合、上記露光工程において、組成物層を加熱してもよい。加熱の温度として特に制限されないが、80~250℃が好ましい。また、加熱の時間は、30~300秒間が好ましい。
 なお、露光工程において、組成物層を加熱する場合、後述する後加熱工程を兼ねてもよい。言い換えれば、露光工程において、組成物層を加熱する場合、硬化膜の製造方法は後加熱工程を含有しなくてもよい。
[Exposure process]
In the exposure step, the composition layer formed in the composition layer forming step is exposed to actinic rays or radiation, and the irradiated composition layer is cured.
As for the method of light irradiation, light irradiation is preferably performed through a photomask having patterned openings.
Exposure is preferably carried out by irradiation with radiation. Radiation that can be used for exposure is preferably ultraviolet such as g-line, h-line or i-line, and the light source is preferably a high-pressure mercury lamp. The irradiation intensity is preferably 5-1500 mJ/cm 2 , more preferably 10-1000 mJ/cm 2 .
When the composition contains a thermal polymerization initiator, the composition layer may be heated in the exposure step. Although the heating temperature is not particularly limited, it is preferably 80 to 250°C. Also, the heating time is preferably 30 to 300 seconds.
In addition, in the case where the composition layer is heated in the exposure step, the post-heating step described below may also be performed. In other words, when the composition layer is heated in the exposure step, the method for producing a cured film does not need to include a post-heating step.
〔現像工程〕
 現像工程は、露光後の上記組成物層を現像して硬化膜を形成する工程である。本工程により、露光工程における光未照射部分の組成物層が溶出し、光硬化した部分だけが残り、パターン状の硬化膜が得られる。
 現像工程で使用される現像液の種類は特に制限されないが、下地の撮像素子及び回路等にダメージを起こさない、アルカリ現像液が望ましい。
 現像温度としては、例えば、20~30℃である。
 現像時間としては、例えば、20~90秒間である。残渣をよりよく除去するため、近年では120~180秒間実施する場合もある。更には、残渣除去性をより向上するため、現像液を60秒ごとに振り切り、更に新たに現像液を供給する工程を数回繰り返す場合もある。
[Development process]
The developing step is a step of developing the exposed composition layer to form a cured film. In this step, the composition layer in the portion not irradiated with light in the exposure step is eluted, leaving only the photocured portion to obtain a patterned cured film.
The type of developer used in the development process is not particularly limited, but an alkaline developer that does not cause damage to the underlying imaging device, circuits, and the like is desirable.
The developing temperature is, for example, 20 to 30.degree.
The development time is, for example, 20 to 90 seconds. In order to remove the residue better, in recent years, it may be carried out for 120 to 180 seconds. Furthermore, in order to further improve the residue removability, the process of shaking off the developer every 60 seconds and then supplying new developer may be repeated several times.
 アルカリ現像液は、アルカリ性化合物を濃度が0.001~10質量%(好ましくは0.01~5質量%)となるように水に溶解して調製されたアルカリ性水溶液が好ましい。
 アルカリ性化合物は、例えば、水酸化ナトリウム、水酸化カリウム、炭酸ナトリウム,硅酸ナトリウム、メタ硅酸ナトリウム、アンモニア水、エチルアミン、ジエチルアミン、ジメチルエタノールアミン、テトラメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラエチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラプロピルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラブチルアンモニウムヒドロキシ、ベンジルトリメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、コリン、ピロール、ピペリジン、及び、1,8-ジアザビシクロ[5.4.0]-7-ウンデセンが挙げられる(このうち、有機アルカリが好ましい。)。
 なお、アルカリ現像液として用いた場合は、一般に現像後に水で洗浄処理が施される。
The alkaline developer is preferably an alkaline aqueous solution prepared by dissolving an alkaline compound in water to a concentration of 0.001 to 10% by mass (preferably 0.01 to 5% by mass).
Alkaline compounds include, for example, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, sodium silicate, sodium metasilicate, aqueous ammonia, ethylamine, diethylamine, dimethylethanolamine, tetramethylammonium hydroxide, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, tetrapropyl ammonium hydroxide, tetrabutylammonium hydroxy, benzyltrimethylammonium hydroxide, choline, pyrrole, piperidine, and 1,8-diazabicyclo[5.4.0]-7-undecene (of which organic alkali is preferred). .).
In addition, when it is used as an alkaline developer, it is generally washed with water after development.
〔ポストベーク〕
 露光工程の後、加熱処理(ポストベーク)を行うことが好ましい。ポストベークは、硬化を完全にするための現像後の加熱処理である。その加熱温度は、240℃以下が好ましく、220℃以下がより好ましい。下限は特にないが、効率的かつ効果的な処理を考慮すると、50℃以上が好ましく、100℃以上がより好ましい。
 ポストベークは、ホットプレート、コンベクションオーブン(熱風循環式乾燥機)、及び、高周波加熱機等の加熱手段を用いて、連続式又はバッチ式で行える。
[Post-bake]
Heat treatment (post-baking) is preferably performed after the exposure step. A post-bake is a heat treatment after development to complete curing. The heating temperature is preferably 240° C. or lower, more preferably 220° C. or lower. Although there is no lower limit, it is preferably 50° C. or higher, more preferably 100° C. or higher, in consideration of efficient and effective treatment.
Post-baking can be performed continuously or batchwise using heating means such as a hot plate, a convection oven (hot air circulation dryer), and a high-frequency heater.
 上記のポストベークは、低酸素濃度の雰囲気下で行うことが好ましい。その酸素濃度は、19体積%以下が好ましく、15体積%以下がより好ましく、10体積%以下が更に好ましく、7体積%以下が特に好ましく、3体積%以下が最も好ましい。下限は特にないが、10体積ppm以上が好ましい。 The above post-baking is preferably performed in an atmosphere with a low oxygen concentration. The oxygen concentration is preferably 19% by volume or less, more preferably 15% by volume or less, even more preferably 10% by volume or less, particularly preferably 7% by volume or less, and most preferably 3% by volume or less. Although there is no particular lower limit, 10 ppm by volume or more is preferable.
 また、上記の加熱によるポストベークに変え、UV(紫外線)照射によって硬化を完遂させてもよい。
 この場合、上述した組成物は、更にUV硬化剤を含有することが好ましい。UV硬化剤は、通常のi線露光によるリソグラフィー工程のために添加する重合開始剤の露光波長である365nmより短波の波長で硬化できるUV硬化剤が好ましい。UV硬化剤としては、例えば、チバ イルガキュア 2959(商品名)が挙げられる。UV照射を行う場合においては、組成物層が波長340nm以下で硬化する材料であることが好ましい。波長の下限値は特に制限されないが、220nm以上が好ましい。また、UV照射の露光量は、100~5000mJが好ましく、300~4000mJがより好ましく、800~3500mJが更に好ましい。このUV硬化工程は、露光工程の後に行うことが、低温硬化をより効果的に行うために、好ましい。露光光源はオゾンレス水銀ランプを使用することが好ましい。
Curing may be completed by UV (ultraviolet) irradiation instead of post-baking by heating.
In this case, the composition described above preferably further contains a UV curing agent. The UV curing agent is preferably a UV curing agent capable of curing at a wavelength shorter than 365 nm, which is the exposure wavelength of the polymerization initiator added for the lithography process by ordinary i-line exposure. Examples of UV curing agents include Ciba Irgacure 2959 (trade name). When UV irradiation is performed, the composition layer is preferably made of a material that cures at a wavelength of 340 nm or less. Although the lower limit of the wavelength is not particularly limited, it is preferably 220 nm or more. Further, the exposure amount of UV irradiation is preferably 100 to 5000 mJ, more preferably 300 to 4000 mJ, even more preferably 800 to 3500 mJ. This UV curing step is preferably performed after the exposure step in order to perform low-temperature curing more effectively. It is preferable to use an ozoneless mercury lamp as an exposure light source.
[硬化膜の物性、及び、硬化膜の用途]
〔硬化膜の物性〕
 本発明の組成物(特に、黒色色材を含有する本発明の組成物)を用いて形成される硬化膜は、優れた遮光性を有する点で、400~1100nmの波長領域における膜厚1.5μmあたりの光学濃度(OD:Optical Density)が、2.5以上が好ましく、3.0以上がより好ましい。なお、上限値は特に制限されないが、一般に10以下が好ましい。上記硬化膜は、遮光膜として好ましく使用できる。
 なお、本明細書において、400~1100nmの波長領域における膜厚1.5μmあたりの光学濃度が2.5以上であるとは、波長400~1100nmの全域において、膜厚1.5μmあたりの光学濃度が2.5以上であることを意味する。
 なお、本明細書において、硬化膜の光学濃度の測定方法としては、まず、ガラス基板上硬化膜を形成して、分光光度計U-4100(商品名、日立ハイテクノロジーズ製)積分球型受光ユニットを用いて測定し、測定箇所の膜厚も測定し、所定の膜厚あたりの光学濃度を算出する。
 硬化膜の膜厚は、例えば、0.1~4.0μmが好ましく、1.0~2.5μmがより好ましい。また、硬化膜は、用途にあわせてこの範囲よりも薄膜としてもよいし、厚膜としてもよい。
 また、硬化膜を光減衰膜として使用する場合、上記範囲よりも薄膜(例えば、0.1~0.5μm)として遮光性を調整してもよい。この場合、400~1200nmの波長領域における膜厚1.0μmあたりの光学濃度は、0.1~1.5が好ましく、0.2~1.0がより好ましい。
[Physical properties of cured film and use of cured film]
[Physical properties of cured film]
A cured film formed using the composition of the present invention (particularly, the composition of the present invention containing a black colorant) has excellent light-shielding properties, and the film thickness in the wavelength region of 400 to 1100 nm is 1.5. The optical density (OD) per 5 µm is preferably 2.5 or more, more preferably 3.0 or more. Although the upper limit is not particularly limited, generally 10 or less is preferable. The above cured film can be preferably used as a light shielding film.
In this specification, the optical density per 1.5 μm film thickness in the wavelength region of 400 to 1100 nm is 2.5 or more, which means that the optical density per 1.5 μm film thickness is 2.5 or more in the entire wavelength range of 400 to 1100 nm. is 2.5 or more.
In this specification, as a method for measuring the optical density of a cured film, first, a cured film is formed on a glass substrate, and a spectrophotometer U-4100 (trade name, manufactured by Hitachi High-Technologies Corporation) integrating sphere type light receiving unit. is used to measure the film thickness at the measurement point, and the optical density per predetermined film thickness is calculated.
The thickness of the cured film is, for example, preferably 0.1 to 4.0 μm, more preferably 1.0 to 2.5 μm. The cured film may be thinner or thicker than this range depending on the application.
When the cured film is used as the light attenuation film, the light shielding property may be adjusted by making the film thinner than the above range (for example, 0.1 to 0.5 μm). In this case, the optical density per 1.0 μm film thickness in the wavelength range of 400 to 1200 nm is preferably 0.1 to 1.5, more preferably 0.2 to 1.0.
 硬化膜の反射率は、8%未満が好ましく、6%未満がより好ましく、4%未満が更に好ましい。下限は、0%以上が好ましい。
 反射率とは、日本分光株式会社製分光器V7200(商品名)VARユニットを用いて角度5°の入射角で波長400~1100nmの光を入射し、得られた反射率スペクトルより求められる。具体的には、波長400~1100nmの範囲で最大反射率を示した波長の光の反射率を、硬化膜の反射率とする。
The reflectance of the cured film is preferably less than 8%, more preferably less than 6%, and even more preferably less than 4%. The lower limit is preferably 0% or more.
The reflectance is determined from the reflectance spectrum obtained by using a spectroscope V7200 (trade name) VAR unit manufactured by JASCO Corporation to irradiate light with a wavelength of 400 to 1100 nm at an incident angle of 5°. Specifically, the reflectance of the cured film is defined as the reflectance of the light having the maximum reflectance in the wavelength range of 400 to 1100 nm.
 また、上記硬化膜は、パーソナルコンピュータ、タブレット、携帯電話、スマートフォン、及び、デジタルカメラ等のポータブル機器;プリンタ複合機、及び、スキャナ等のOA(Office Automation)機器;監視カメラ、バーコードリーダ、現金自動預け払い機(ATM:automated teller machine)、ハイスピードカメラ、及び、顔画像認証又は生体認証を使用した本人認証機能を有する機器等の産業用機器;車載用カメラ機器;内視鏡、カプセル内視鏡、及び、カテーテル等の医療用カメラ機器;並びに、生体センサ、バイオセンサ、軍事偵察用カメラ、立体地図用カメラ、気象及び海洋観測カメラ、陸地資源探査カメラ、及び、宇宙の天文及び深宇宙ターゲット用の探査カメラ等の宇宙用機器;等に使用される光学フィルタ及びモジュールの遮光部材及び遮光膜、更には反射防止部材及び反射防止膜に好適である。 In addition, the above cured film can be used for personal computers, tablets, mobile phones, smartphones, portable devices such as digital cameras; OA (Office Automation) devices such as printer multifunction devices and scanners; surveillance cameras, barcode readers, cash Industrial equipment such as automated teller machines (ATMs), high-speed cameras, and equipment with personal authentication functions that use face image authentication or biometric authentication; vehicle-mounted camera equipment; endoscopes, capsules Medical camera equipment such as scopes and catheters; and biosensors, biosensors, military reconnaissance cameras, stereo map cameras, weather and ocean observation cameras, land resource exploration cameras, and space astronomy and deep space. It is suitable for light-shielding members and light-shielding films of optical filters and modules used in space equipment such as target search cameras, etc., as well as anti-reflection members and anti-reflection films.
 上記硬化膜は、マイクロLED(Light Emitting Diode)及びマイクロOLED(Organic Light Emitting Diode)等の用途にも使用できる。上記硬化膜は、マイクロLED及びマイクロOLEDに使用される光学フィルタ及び光学フィルムのほか、遮光機能又は反射防止機能を付与する部材に対して好適である。
 マイクロLED及びマイクロOLEDとしては、例えば、特表2015-500562号公報及び特表2014-533890号公報に記載された例が挙げられる。
The cured film can also be used for applications such as micro LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) and micro OLEDs (Organic Light Emitting Diodes). The cured film is suitable for optical filters and optical films used in micro LEDs and micro OLEDs, as well as members imparting a light shielding function or an antireflection function.
Micro LEDs and micro OLEDs include, for example, examples described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 2015-500562 and Japanese Patent Publication No. 2014-533890.
 上記硬化膜は、量子ドットセンサー及び量子ドット固体撮像素子に使用される光学及び光学フィルムとしても好適である。また、遮光機能及び反射防止機能を付与する部材として好適である。量子ドットセンサー及び量子ドット固体撮像素子としては、例えば、米国特許出願公開第2012/37789号明細書及び国際公開第2008/131313号に記載された例が挙げられる。 The above cured film is also suitable as an optical and optical film used in quantum dot sensors and quantum dot solid-state imaging devices. Moreover, it is suitable as a member that imparts a light shielding function and an antireflection function. Examples of quantum dot sensors and quantum dot solid-state imaging devices include those described in US Patent Application Publication No. 2012/37789 and International Publication No. 2008/131313.
〔遮光膜、光学素子、並びに、固体撮像素子及び固体撮像装置〕
 本発明の硬化膜は、いわゆる遮光膜として使用することも好ましい。このような遮光膜は、固体撮像素子に使用することも好ましい。
 本発明の遮光性組成物を用いて形成された硬化膜は、上述のとおり、遮光性、及び、低反射性に優れる。
 なお、遮光膜は、本発明の硬化膜における好ましい用途の1つであって、本発明の遮光膜の製造は、上述の硬化膜の製造方法として説明した方法で同様に行える。具体的には、基板に組成物を塗布して、組成物層を形成し、露光、及び、現像して遮光膜を製造できる。
[Light-shielding film, optical element, solid-state imaging device, and solid-state imaging device]
It is also preferable to use the cured film of the present invention as a so-called light-shielding film. It is also preferable to use such a light shielding film for a solid-state imaging device.
As described above, the cured film formed using the light-shielding composition of the present invention is excellent in light-shielding properties and low reflectivity.
A light-shielding film is one of the preferred applications of the cured film of the present invention, and the light-shielding film of the present invention can be produced in the same manner as described above as the method for producing the cured film. Specifically, the composition can be applied to a substrate to form a composition layer, exposed to light, and developed to produce a light-shielding film.
 本発明は、光学素子の発明をも含有する。本発明の光学素子は、上記硬化膜(遮光膜)を有する光学素子である。光学素子としては、例えば、カメラ、双眼鏡、顕微鏡、及び、半導体露光装置等の光学機器に使用される光学素子が挙げられる。
 中でも、上記光学素子としては、例えば、カメラ等に搭載される固体撮像素子が好ましい。
The present invention also includes the invention of optical elements. The optical element of the present invention is an optical element having the cured film (light shielding film). Examples of optical elements include optical elements used in optical equipment such as cameras, binoculars, microscopes, and semiconductor exposure apparatuses.
Above all, as the optical element, for example, a solid-state imaging element mounted on a camera or the like is preferable.
 また、本発明の固体撮像素子は、上述した本発明の硬化膜(遮光膜)を含有する、固体撮像素子である。
 本発明の固体撮像素子が硬化膜(遮光膜)を含有する形態としては、例えば、基板上に、固体撮像素子(CCDイメージセンサ、CMOSイメージセンサ等)の受光エリアを構成する複数のフォトダイオード及びポリシリコン等からなる受光素子を有し、支持体の受光素子形成面側(例えば、受光部以外の部分及び/又は色調整用画素等)又は形成面の反対側に硬化膜を有する形態が挙げられる。
 また、硬化膜を光減衰膜として使用する場合、例えば、一部の光が光減衰膜を通過した上で受光素子に入射するように、光減衰膜を配置すれば、固体撮像素子のダイナミックレンジを改善できる。
 固体撮像装置は、上記固体撮像素子を具備する。
Further, the solid-state imaging device of the present invention is a solid-state imaging device containing the cured film (light-shielding film) of the present invention described above.
As a form in which the solid-state imaging device of the present invention contains a cured film (light-shielding film), for example, a plurality of photodiodes constituting a light receiving area of a solid-state imaging device (CCD image sensor, CMOS image sensor, etc.) and Examples include a form having a light receiving element made of polysilicon or the like and having a cured film on the side of the support on which the light receiving element is formed (for example, a portion other than the light receiving portion and/or the pixels for color adjustment, etc.) or on the opposite side of the formation surface. be done.
In addition, when a cured film is used as a light attenuation film, for example, if the light attenuation film is arranged so that part of the light passes through the light attenuation film before entering the light receiving element, the dynamic range of the solid-state image sensor can be reduced. can be improved.
A solid-state imaging device includes the above solid-state imaging device.
 固体撮像装置、及び、固体撮像素子の構成例を図1~2を参照して説明する。なお、図1~2では、各部を明確にするため、相互の厚さ及び/又は幅の比率は無視して一部誇張して表示している。
 図1は、本発明の固体撮像素子を含有する固体撮像装置の構成例を示す概略断面図である。
 図1に示すように、固体撮像装置100は、矩形状の固体撮像素子101と、固体撮像素子101の上方に保持され、この固体撮像素子101を封止する透明なカバーガラス103とを備えている。更に、このカバーガラス103上には、スペーサー104を介してレンズ層111が重ねて設けられている。レンズ層111は、支持体113とレンズ材112とで構成されている。レンズ層111は、支持体113とレンズ材112とが一体成形された構成でもよい。レンズ層111の周縁領域に迷光が入射すると光の拡散によりレンズ材112での集光の効果が弱くなり、撮像部102に届く光が低減する。また、迷光によるノイズの発生も生じる。そのため、このレンズ層111の周縁領域は、遮光膜114が設けられて遮光されている。本発明の硬化膜は上記遮光膜114としても使用できる。
A configuration example of a solid-state imaging device and a solid-state imaging device will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 1 and 2, in order to clarify each part, the mutual thickness and/or width ratios are disregarded and partly exaggerated.
FIG. 1 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a configuration example of a solid-state imaging device including the solid-state imaging device of the present invention.
As shown in FIG. 1, a solid-state imaging device 100 includes a rectangular solid-state imaging element 101 and a transparent cover glass 103 held above the solid-state imaging element 101 and sealing the solid-state imaging element 101. there is Further, a lens layer 111 is provided over the cover glass 103 with spacers 104 interposed therebetween. The lens layer 111 is composed of a support 113 and a lens material 112 . The lens layer 111 may have a structure in which the support 113 and the lens material 112 are integrally molded. When stray light enters the peripheral area of the lens layer 111 , light diffusion weakens the light-condensing effect of the lens material 112 , thereby reducing the amount of light reaching the imaging unit 102 . Also, noise is generated due to stray light. Therefore, the peripheral region of the lens layer 111 is provided with a light shielding film 114 to shield the light. The cured film of the present invention can also be used as the light shielding film 114 described above.
 固体撮像素子101は、その受光面となる撮像部102で結像した光学像を光電変換して、画像信号として出力する。この固体撮像素子101は、2枚の基板を積層した積層基板105を備えている。積層基板105は、同サイズの矩形状のチップ基板106及び回路基板107からなり、チップ基板106の裏面に回路基板107が積層されている。 The solid-state imaging device 101 photoelectrically converts an optical image formed by the imaging unit 102 serving as its light-receiving surface, and outputs it as an image signal. This solid-state imaging device 101 has a laminated substrate 105 in which two substrates are laminated. The laminated board 105 is composed of a rectangular chip board 106 and a circuit board 107 of the same size.
 チップ基板106として用いられる基板の材料としては、例えば、公知の材料を使用できる。 As the substrate material used as the chip substrate 106, for example, known materials can be used.
 チップ基板106の表面中央部には、撮像部102が設けられている。また、撮像部102の周縁領域には遮光膜115が設けられている。この周縁領域に入射する迷光を遮光膜115が遮光することにより、この周縁領域内の回路からの暗電流(ノイズ)の発生を防ぐことができる。本発明の硬化膜は遮光膜115として用いることが好ましい。 An imaging unit 102 is provided in the central portion of the surface of the chip substrate 106 . A light shielding film 115 is provided in the peripheral area of the imaging unit 102 . The shielding film 115 shields the stray light incident on the peripheral region, thereby preventing generation of dark current (noise) from circuits in the peripheral region. It is preferable to use the cured film of the present invention as the light shielding film 115 .
 チップ基板106の表面縁部には、複数の電極パッド108が設けられている。電極パッド108は、チップ基板106の表面に設けられた図示しない信号線(ボンディングワイヤでも可)を介して、撮像部102に電気的に接続されている。 A plurality of electrode pads 108 are provided on the surface edge of the chip substrate 106 . The electrode pads 108 are electrically connected to the imaging section 102 via signal lines (not shown) (bonding wires are also possible) provided on the surface of the chip substrate 106 .
 回路基板107の裏面には、各電極パッド108の略下方位置にそれぞれ外部接続端子109が設けられている。各外部接続端子109は、積層基板105を垂直に貫通する貫通電極110を介して、それぞれ電極パッド108に接続されている。また、各外部接続端子109は、図示しない配線を介して、固体撮像素子101の駆動を制御する制御回路、及び固体撮像素子101から出力される撮像信号に画像処理を施す画像処理回路等に接続されている。 External connection terminals 109 are provided on the rear surface of the circuit board 107 at positions substantially below the electrode pads 108 . Each external connection terminal 109 is connected to an electrode pad 108 via a penetrating electrode 110 vertically penetrating through the laminated substrate 105 . Further, each external connection terminal 109 is connected to a control circuit for controlling driving of the solid-state imaging device 101 and an image processing circuit for performing image processing on an imaging signal output from the solid-state imaging device 101 via wiring (not shown). It is
 図2に、撮像部102の概略断面図を示す。図2に示すように、撮像部102は、受光素子201、カラーフィルタ202、マイクロレンズ203等の基板204上に設けられた各部から構成される。カラーフィルタ202は、青色画素205b、赤色画素205r、緑色画素205g、及び、ブラックマトリクス205bmを有している。本発明の硬化膜は、ブラックマトリクス205bmとして用いてもよい。 A schematic cross-sectional view of the imaging unit 102 is shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 2, the imaging unit 102 is composed of units provided on a substrate 204, such as a light receiving element 201, a color filter 202, a microlens 203, and the like. The color filter 202 has blue pixels 205b, red pixels 205r, green pixels 205g, and a black matrix 205bm. The cured film of the present invention may be used as the black matrix 205bm.
 基板204の材料としては、例えば、前述のチップ基板106と同様の材料を使用できる。基板204の表層にはpウェル層206が形成されている。このpウェル層206内には、n型層からなり光電変換により信号電荷を生成して蓄積する受光素子201が正方格子状に配列形成されている。 As the material of the substrate 204, for example, the same material as the chip substrate 106 described above can be used. A p-well layer 206 is formed on the surface layer of the substrate 204 . In the p-well layer 206, light receiving elements 201 which are made of an n-type layer and generate and store signal charges by photoelectric conversion are arranged in a square lattice.
 受光素子201の一方の側方には、pウェル層206の表層の読み出しゲート部207を介して、n型層からなる垂直転送路208が形成されている。また、受光素子201の他方の側方には、p型層からなる素子分離領域209を介して、隣接画素に属する垂直転送路208が形成されている。読み出しゲート部207は、受光素子201に蓄積された信号電荷を垂直転送路208に読み出すためのチャネル領域である。 A vertical transfer path 208 made of an n-type layer is formed on one side of the light receiving element 201 via a readout gate portion 207 on the surface layer of the p-well layer 206 . A vertical transfer path 208 belonging to an adjacent pixel is formed on the other side of the light receiving element 201 via an element isolation region 209 made of a p-type layer. The read gate portion 207 is a channel region for reading signal charges accumulated in the light receiving element 201 to the vertical transfer path 208 .
 基板204の表面上には、ONO(Oxide-Nitride-Oxide)膜からなるゲート絶縁膜210が形成されている。このゲート絶縁膜210上には、垂直転送路208、読み出しゲート部207、及び、素子分離領域209の略直上を覆うように、ポリシリコン又はアモルファスシリコンからなる垂直転送電極211が形成されている。垂直転送電極211は、垂直転送路208を駆動して電荷転送を行わせる駆動電極と、読み出しゲート部207を駆動して信号電荷の読み出しを行わせる読み出し電極として機能する。信号電荷は、垂直転送路208から図示しない水平転送路及び出力部(フローティングディフュージョンアンプ)に順に転送された後、電圧信号として出力される。 A gate insulating film 210 made of an ONO (Oxide-Nitride-Oxide) film is formed on the surface of the substrate 204 . A vertical transfer electrode 211 made of polysilicon or amorphous silicon is formed on the gate insulating film 210 so as to cover the vertical transfer path 208 , the readout gate portion 207 and the element isolation region 209 . The vertical transfer electrode 211 functions as a drive electrode that drives the vertical transfer path 208 to transfer charges, and a readout electrode that drives the readout gate section 207 to read out signal charges. The signal charges are sequentially transferred from the vertical transfer path 208 to a horizontal transfer path (not shown) and an output section (floating diffusion amplifier), and then output as a voltage signal.
 垂直転送電極211上には、その表面を覆うように遮光膜212が形成されている。遮光膜212は、受光素子201の直上位置に開口部を有し、それ以外の領域を遮光している。本発明の硬化膜は、遮光膜212として用いてもよい。
 遮光膜212上には、BPSG(borophospho silicate glass)からなる絶縁膜213、P-SiNからなる絶縁膜(パシベーション膜)214、透明樹脂等からなる平坦化膜215からなる透明な中間層が設けられている。カラーフィルタ202は、中間層上に形成されている。
A light shielding film 212 is formed on the vertical transfer electrode 211 so as to cover the surface thereof. The light shielding film 212 has an opening directly above the light receiving element 201 and shields the other region from light. The cured film of the present invention may be used as the light shielding film 212 .
On the light shielding film 212, there is provided a transparent intermediate layer consisting of an insulating film 213 made of BPSG (borophospho silicate glass), an insulating film (passivation film) 214 made of P—SiN, and a flattening film 215 made of a transparent resin or the like. ing. A color filter 202 is formed on the intermediate layer.
〔画像表示装置〕
 本発明の画像表示装置は、本発明の硬化膜を具備する。
 画像表示装置が硬化膜を有する形態としては、例えば、硬化膜がブラックマトリクスに含有され、このようなブラックマトリクスを含有するカラーフィルタが、画像表示装置に使用される形態が挙げられる。
 次に、ブラックマトリクス及びブラックマトリクスを含有するカラーフィルタについて説明し、更に、画像表示装置の具体例として、このようなカラーフィルタを含有する液晶表示装置について説明する。
[Image display device]
The image display device of the present invention comprises the cured film of the present invention.
Examples of the mode in which the image display device has a cured film include a mode in which the cured film is contained in a black matrix and a color filter containing such a black matrix is used in the image display device.
Next, a black matrix and a color filter containing the black matrix will be described, and further, a liquid crystal display containing such a color filter will be described as a specific example of the image display device.
<ブラックマトリクス>
 本発明の硬化膜は、ブラックマトリクスに含有されることも好ましい。ブラックマトリクスは、カラーフィルタ、固体撮像素子、及び、液晶表示装置等の画像表示装置に含有される場合がある。
 ブラックマトリクスとしては、例えば、上記で既に説明したもの;液晶表示装置等の画像表示装置の周縁部に設けられた黒色の縁;赤、青、及び、緑の画素間の格子状、及び/又は、ストライプ状の黒色の部分;TFT(thin film transistor)遮光のためのドット状、及び/又は、線状の黒色パターン;が挙げられる。このブラックマトリクスの定義については、例えば、菅野泰平著、「液晶ディスプレイ製造装置用語辞典」、第2版、日刊工業新聞社、1996年、p.64に記載がある。
 ブラックマトリクスは表示コントラストを向上させるため、また薄膜トランジスタ(TFT)を用いたアクティブマトリックス駆動方式の液晶表示装置の場合には光の電流リークによる画質低下を防止するため、高い遮光性(光学濃度ODで3以上)を有することが好ましい。
<Black Matrix>
The cured film of the present invention is also preferably contained in a black matrix. A black matrix may be contained in an image display device such as a color filter, a solid-state imaging device, and a liquid crystal display device.
As the black matrix, for example, those already described above; a black edge provided at the periphery of an image display device such as a liquid crystal display device; a grid pattern between red, blue, and green pixels, and/or , striped black portions; dot-shaped and/or linear black patterns for TFT (thin film transistor) light shielding; For the definition of this black matrix, see, for example, Taihei Kanno, "Liquid Crystal Display Manufacturing Equipment Terminology", 2nd Edition, Nikkan Kogyo Shimbun, 1996, p. 64.
The black matrix has a high light shielding property (optical density OD is 3 or more).
 ブラックマトリクスの製造方法としては、例えば、上記の硬化膜の製造方法と同様の方法により製造できる。具体的には、基板に組成物を塗布して、組成物層を形成し、露光、及び、現像してパターン状の硬化膜(ブラックマトリクス)を製造できる。なお、ブラックマトリクスとして用いられる硬化膜の膜厚は、0.1~4.0μmが好ましい。 As a method for producing the black matrix, for example, it can be produced by the same method as the method for producing the cured film. Specifically, the composition can be applied to a substrate to form a composition layer, exposed to light, and developed to produce a patterned cured film (black matrix). The thickness of the cured film used as the black matrix is preferably 0.1 to 4.0 μm.
 上記基板の材料は、可視光(波長400~800nm)に対して80%以上の透過率を有することが好ましい。このような材料としては、例えば、ソーダライムガラス、無アルカリガラス、石英ガラス、及び、ホウケイ酸ガラス等のガラス;ポリエステル系樹脂、及び、ポリオレフィン系樹脂等のプラスチック;等が挙げられ、耐薬品性、及び、耐熱性の点から、無アルカリガラス、又は、石英ガラス等が好ましい。 The substrate material preferably has a transmittance of 80% or more for visible light (wavelength 400 to 800 nm). Examples of such materials include glasses such as soda lime glass, alkali-free glass, quartz glass, and borosilicate glass; plastics such as polyester resins and polyolefin resins; And, from the viewpoint of heat resistance, alkali-free glass, quartz glass, or the like is preferable.
<カラーフィルタ>
 本発明の硬化膜は、カラーフィルタに含有されることも好ましい。
 カラーフィルタが硬化膜を含有する形態としては、例えば、基板と、上記ブラックマトリクスと、を備えるカラーフィルタが挙げられる。すなわち、基板上に形成された上記ブラックマトリクスの開口部に形成された赤色、緑色、及び、青色の着色画素と、を備えるカラーフィルタが例示できる。
<Color filter>
The cured film of the invention is also preferably contained in a color filter.
Examples of the mode in which the color filter contains a cured film include a color filter including a substrate and the black matrix. That is, a color filter having red, green, and blue colored pixels formed in the openings of the black matrix formed on the substrate can be exemplified.
 ブラックマトリクス(硬化膜)を含有するカラーフィルタは、例えば、以下の方法により製造できる。
 まず、基板上に形成されたパターン状のブラックマトリクスの開口部に、カラーフィルタの各着色画素に対応する顔料を含有した組成物の組成物層を形成する。なお、各色用組成物としては、例えば、公知の組成物を使用できるが、本明細書で説明した組成物において、黒色色材を、各画素に対応した着色剤に置き換えた組成物を使用することが好ましい。
 次に、組成物層に対して、ブラックマトリクスの開口部に対応したパターンを有するフォトマスクを介して露光する。次いで、現像処理により未露光部を除去した後、ベークしてブラックマトリクスの開口部に着色画素を形成できる。一連の操作を、例えば、赤色、緑色、及び、青色顔料を含有した各色用組成物を用いて行えば、赤色、緑色、及び、青色画素を有するカラーフィルタを製造できる。
A color filter containing a black matrix (cured film) can be produced, for example, by the following method.
First, a composition layer of a composition containing a pigment corresponding to each colored pixel of a color filter is formed in the openings of a patterned black matrix formed on a substrate. As the composition for each color, for example, a known composition can be used, but in the composition described in this specification, a composition in which the black colorant is replaced with a colorant corresponding to each pixel is used. is preferred.
Next, the composition layer is exposed through a photomask having a pattern corresponding to the openings of the black matrix. Then, after removing the unexposed areas by development, the substrate can be baked to form colored pixels in the openings of the black matrix. By performing a series of operations, for example, using compositions for each color containing red, green, and blue pigments, a color filter having red, green, and blue pixels can be produced.
<液晶表示装置>
 本発明の硬化膜は、液晶表示装置に含有されることも好ましい。液晶表示装置が硬化膜を含有する形態としては、例えば、すでに説明したブラックマトリクス(硬化膜)を含有するカラーフィルタを含有する形態が挙げられる。
<Liquid crystal display device>
It is also preferable that the cured film of the present invention is contained in a liquid crystal display device. As a form in which the liquid crystal display device contains a cured film, for example, a form in which a color filter containing the black matrix (cured film) already described is included.
 本実施形態に係る液晶表示装置としては、例えば、対向して配置された一対の基板と、それらの基板の間に封入されている液晶化合物とを備える形態が挙げられる。上記基板としては、例えば、ブラックマトリクス用の基板として既に説明したとおりである。 A liquid crystal display device according to the present embodiment includes, for example, a mode comprising a pair of substrates arranged facing each other and a liquid crystal compound sealed between the substrates. As the substrate, for example, the substrate for the black matrix has already been described.
 上記液晶表示装置の具体的な形態としては、例えば、使用者側から、偏光板/基板/カラーフィルタ/透明電極層/配向膜/液晶層/配向膜/透明電極層/TFT(Thin Film Transistor)素子/基板/偏光板/バックライトユニットをこの順に含有する積層体が挙げられる。 As a specific form of the liquid crystal display device, for example, from the user side, polarizing plate/substrate/color filter/transparent electrode layer/alignment film/liquid crystal layer/alignment film/transparent electrode layer/TFT (Thin Film Transistor) A laminate containing an element/substrate/polarizing plate/backlight unit in this order is mentioned.
 なお、液晶表示装置としては、例えば「電子ディスプレイデバイス(佐々木 昭夫著、株式会社工業調査会 1990年発行)」、「ディスプレイデバイス(伊吹 順章著、産業図書株式会社 平成元年発行)」等に記載されている液晶表示装置が挙げられる。また、例えば「次世代液晶ディスプレイ技術(内田 龍男編集、株式会社工業調査会 1994年発行)」に記載されている液晶表示装置が挙げられる。 In addition, as a liquid crystal display device, for example, "Electronic display device (written by Akio Sasaki, published by Industrial Research Institute Co., Ltd. in 1990)", "Display device (written by Junsho Ibuki, published by Sangyo Tosho Co., Ltd. in 1989)", etc. The disclosed liquid crystal display device can be mentioned. Also, for example, there is a liquid crystal display device described in "Next Generation Liquid Crystal Display Technology (edited by Tatsuo Uchida, published by Kogyo Choukai Co., Ltd., 1994)".
〔赤外線センサ〕
 本発明の硬化膜は、赤外線センサに含有されることも好ましい。
 上記実施態様に係る赤外線センサについて、図3を用いて説明する。図3は、本発明の硬化膜を備える赤外線センサの構成例を示す概略断面図である。図3に示す赤外線センサ300は、固体撮像素子310を備える。
 固体撮像素子310上に設けられている撮像領域は、赤外線吸収フィルタ311と本発明の実施形態に係るカラーフィルタ312とを組み合せて構成されている。
 赤外線吸収フィルタ311は、可視光領域の光(例えば、波長400~700nmの光)を透過し、赤外領域の光(例えば、波長800~1300nmの光、好ましくは波長900~1200nmの光、より好ましくは波長900~1000nmの光)を遮蔽する膜であり、着色剤として赤外線吸収剤(赤外線吸収剤の形態は既に説明したとおりである。)を含有する硬化膜を使用できる。
 カラーフィルタ312は、可視光領域における特定波長の光を透過及び吸収する画素が形成されたカラーフィルタであって、例えば、赤色(R)、緑色(G)、青色(B)の画素が形成されたカラーフィルタ等が用いられ、その形態は既に説明したとおりである。
 赤外線透過フィルタ313と固体撮像素子310との間には、赤外線透過フィルタ313を透過した波長の光を透過可能な樹脂膜314(例えば、透明樹脂膜等)が配置されている。
 赤外線透過フィルタ313は、可視光遮蔽性を有し、かつ、特定波長の赤外線を透過させるフィルタであって、可視光領域の光を吸収する着色剤(例えば、ペリレン化合物、及び/又は、ビスベンゾフラノン化合物等)と、赤外線吸収剤(例えば、ピロロピロール化合物、フタロシアニン化合物、ナフタロシアニン化合物、及び、ポリメチン化合物等)と、を含有する、本発明の硬化膜を使用できる。赤外線透過フィルタ313は、例えば、波長400~830nmの光を遮光し、波長900~1300nmの光を透過させることが好ましい。
 カラーフィルタ312及び赤外線透過フィルタ313の入射光hν側には、マイクロレンズ315が配置されている。マイクロレンズ315を覆うように平坦化膜316が形成されている。
 図3に示す形態では、樹脂膜314が配置されているが、樹脂膜314に代えて赤外線透過フィルタ313を形成してもよい。すなわち、固体撮像素子310上に、赤外線透過フィルタ313を形成してもよい。
 また、図3に示す形態では、カラーフィルタ312の膜厚と、赤外線透過フィルタ313の膜厚が同一であるが、両者の膜厚は異なっていてもよい。
 また、図3に示す形態では、カラーフィルタ312が、赤外線吸収フィルタ311よりも入射光hν側に設けられているが、赤外線吸収フィルタ311と、カラーフィルタ312との順序を入れ替えて、赤外線吸収フィルタ311を、カラーフィルタ312よりも入射光hν側に設けてもよい。
 また、図3に示す形態では、赤外線吸収フィルタ311とカラーフィルタ312は隣接して積層しているが、両フィルタは必ずしも隣接している必要はなく、間に他の層が設けられていてもよい。本発明の硬化膜は、赤外線吸収フィルタ311の表面の端部及び/又は側面等の遮光膜として使用できるほか、赤外線センサの装置内壁に用いれば、内部反射及び/又は受光部への意味しない光の入射を防ぎ、感度を向上させられる。
 この赤外線センサによれば、画像情報を同時に取り込めるため、動きを検知する対象を認識したモーションセンシング等が可能である。また、この赤外線センサによれば、距離情報を取得できるため、3D情報を含んだ画像の撮影等も可能である。更に、この赤外線センサは、生体認証センサとしても使用できる。
[Infrared sensor]
The cured film of the present invention is also preferably contained in an infrared sensor.
An infrared sensor according to the above embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a configuration example of an infrared sensor provided with the cured film of the present invention. An infrared sensor 300 shown in FIG. 3 includes a solid-state imaging device 310 .
The imaging area provided on the solid-state imaging device 310 is configured by combining an infrared absorption filter 311 and a color filter 312 according to the embodiment of the present invention.
The infrared absorption filter 311 transmits light in the visible region (for example, light with a wavelength of 400 to 700 nm), and transmits light in the infrared region (for example, light with a wavelength of 800 to 1300 nm, preferably light with a wavelength of 900 to 1200 nm). It is preferably a film that shields light having a wavelength of 900 to 1000 nm), and a cured film containing an infrared absorbing agent (the form of the infrared absorbing agent is as described above) as a coloring agent can be used.
The color filter 312 is a color filter formed with pixels that transmit and absorb light of specific wavelengths in the visible light region. For example, pixels of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) are formed. A color filter or the like is used, and its form is as already explained.
Between the infrared transmission filter 313 and the solid-state imaging device 310, a resin film 314 (for example, a transparent resin film or the like) that can transmit light having a wavelength that has passed through the infrared transmission filter 313 is arranged.
The infrared transmission filter 313 is a filter that has a visible light shielding property and transmits infrared rays of a specific wavelength, and is a colorant that absorbs light in the visible light region (for example, a perylene compound and/or a bisbenzoate Furanone compounds, etc.) and infrared absorbers (eg, pyrrolopyrrole compounds, phthalocyanine compounds, naphthalocyanine compounds, polymethine compounds, etc.) can be used in the cured film of the present invention. The infrared transmission filter 313 preferably blocks light with a wavelength of 400 to 830 nm and transmits light with a wavelength of 900 to 1300 nm, for example.
A microlens 315 is arranged on the incident light hν side of the color filter 312 and the infrared transmission filter 313 . A planarization film 316 is formed to cover the microlenses 315 .
Although the resin film 314 is arranged in the form shown in FIG. That is, the infrared transmission filter 313 may be formed on the solid-state imaging device 310 .
Moreover, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3, the film thickness of the color filter 312 and the film thickness of the infrared transmission filter 313 are the same, but the film thicknesses of both may be different.
Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3, the color filter 312 is provided closer to the incident light hv than the infrared absorption filter 311. 311 may be provided on the incident light hν side of the color filter 312 .
In addition, in the form shown in FIG. 3, the infrared absorption filter 311 and the color filter 312 are laminated adjacent to each other. good. The cured film of the present invention can be used as a light shielding film such as the edge and / or side of the surface of the infrared absorption filter 311, and if it is used for the inner wall of the infrared sensor device, it can be used for internal reflection and / or meaningless light to the light receiving part. can be prevented from entering, and the sensitivity can be improved.
According to this infrared sensor, since image information can be captured at the same time, it is possible to perform motion sensing, etc., by recognizing an object whose motion is to be detected. In addition, since distance information can be obtained with this infrared sensor, it is possible to take an image including 3D information. Furthermore, this infrared sensor can also be used as a biometric sensor.
 次に、上記赤外線センサを適用した固体撮像装置について説明する。
 上記固体撮像装置は、レンズ光学系と、固体撮像素子と、赤外発光ダイオード等を含有する。なお、固体撮像装置の各構成については、特開2011-233983号公報の段落0032~0036を参酌でき、この内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。
Next, a solid-state imaging device to which the above infrared sensor is applied will be described.
The solid-state imaging device includes a lens optical system, a solid-state imaging device, an infrared light emitting diode, and the like. For each configuration of the solid-state imaging device, paragraphs 0032 to 0036 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-233983 can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated into the specification of the present application.
〔ヘッドライトユニット〕
 本発明の硬化膜は、遮光膜として、自動車等の車両用灯具のヘッドライトユニットに含有されることも好ましい。遮光膜としてヘッドライトユニットに含有される本発明の硬化膜は、光源から出射される光の少なくとも一部を遮光するように、パターン状に形成されることが好ましい。
 上記実施態様に係るヘッドライトユニットについて、図4及び図5を用いて説明する。図4は、ヘッドライトユニットの構成例を示す模式図であり、図5はヘッドライトユニットの遮光部の構成例を示す模式的斜視図である。
 図4に示すように、ヘッドライトユニット10は、光源12と、遮光部14と、レンズ16とを有し、光源12、遮光部14、及びレンズ16の順で配置されている。
 遮光部14は、図5に示すように基体20と、遮光膜22とを有する。
 遮光膜22は、光源12から出射される光を特定の形状に照射するためのパターン状の開口部23が形成されている。遮光膜22の開口部23の形状により、レンズ16から照射される配光パターンが決定される。レンズ16は、遮光部14を通過した光源12からの光Lを投影するものである。光源12から、特定の配光パターンを照射することができれば、レンズ16は、必ずしも必要ではない。レンズ16は、光Lの照射距離、及び照射範囲に応じて適宜決定されるものである。
 また、基体20は、遮光膜22を保持することができれば、その構成は、特に限定されるものではないが、光源12の熱等により変形しないものであることが好ましく、例えば、ガラスで構成される。
 図5では、配光パターンの一例を示したが、これに限定されるものではない。
 また、光源12も1つに限定されるものではなく、例えば、列状に配置してもよく、マトリクス状に配置してもよい。光源を複数設ける場合、例えば、1つの光源12に対して、1つの遮光部14を設ける構成でもよい。この場合、複数の遮光部14の各遮光膜22は、全て同じパターンでもよく、それぞれ異なるパターンでもよい。
[Headlight unit]
It is also preferable that the cured film of the present invention is contained as a light-shielding film in a headlight unit of a vehicle lighting device such as an automobile. The cured film of the present invention contained in the headlight unit as a light shielding film is preferably formed in a pattern so as to block at least part of the light emitted from the light source.
A headlight unit according to the above embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5. FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing a configuration example of a headlight unit, and FIG. 5 is a schematic perspective view showing a configuration example of a light blocking portion of the headlight unit.
As shown in FIG. 4, the headlight unit 10 has a light source 12, a light shielding section 14, and a lens 16, and the light source 12, the light shielding section 14, and the lens 16 are arranged in this order.
The light shielding part 14 has a base 20 and a light shielding film 22 as shown in FIG.
The light shielding film 22 is formed with a patterned opening 23 for irradiating the light emitted from the light source 12 in a specific shape. The light distribution pattern irradiated from the lens 16 is determined by the shape of the opening 23 of the light shielding film 22 . The lens 16 projects the light L from the light source 12 that has passed through the light blocking portion 14 . If a specific light distribution pattern can be emitted from the light source 12, the lens 16 is not necessarily required. The lens 16 is appropriately determined according to the irradiation distance of the light L and the irradiation range.
The structure of the substrate 20 is not particularly limited as long as it can hold the light shielding film 22. However, it is preferable that the substrate 20 is not deformed by the heat of the light source 12. For example, it is made of glass. be.
Although an example of the light distribution pattern is shown in FIG. 5, it is not limited to this.
Also, the light source 12 is not limited to one, and may be arranged in a row or in a matrix, for example. When a plurality of light sources are provided, for example, one light shielding section 14 may be provided for one light source 12 . In this case, the light shielding films 22 of the plurality of light shielding portions 14 may all have the same pattern or different patterns.
 遮光膜22のパターンによる配光パターンについて説明する。
 図6はヘッドライトユニットによる配光パターンの一例を示す模式図であり、図7はヘッドライトユニットによる配光パターンの他の例を示す模式図である。なお、図6に示す配光パターン30と図7に示す配光パターン32はいずれも光が照射される領域を示している。また、図6に示す領域31及び図7に示す領域31は、いずれも遮光膜22を設けていない場合に光源12(図4参照)で照射される照射領域を示す。
 遮光膜22のパターンにより、例えば、図6に示す配光パターン30のように、エッジ30aで光の強度が急激に低下している。図6に示す配光パターン30は、例えば、左側通行において、対向車に光を照らさないパターンとなる。
 また、図7に示す配光パターン32のように、図6に示す配光パターン30の一部を切り欠いたパターンとすることもできる。この場合も、図6に示す配光パターン30と同じく、エッジ32aで光の強度が急激に低下しており、例えば、左側通行において、対向車に光を照らさないパターンとなる。更に、切欠部33でも光の強度が急激に低下している。このため、切欠部33に対応する領域に、例えば、道路がカーブしている、上り傾斜、下り傾斜等の状態を示すマークを表示することができる。これにより、夜間走行時の安全性を向上させることができる。
A light distribution pattern based on the pattern of the light shielding film 22 will be described.
FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the light distribution pattern by the headlight unit, and FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing another example of the light distribution pattern by the headlight unit. The light distribution pattern 30 shown in FIG. 6 and the light distribution pattern 32 shown in FIG. 7 both indicate areas irradiated with light. A region 31 shown in FIG. 6 and a region 31 shown in FIG. 7 both indicate irradiation regions irradiated by the light source 12 (see FIG. 4) when the light shielding film 22 is not provided.
Due to the pattern of the light shielding film 22, the intensity of the light sharply drops at the edge 30a, as in the light distribution pattern 30 shown in FIG. 6, for example. The light distribution pattern 30 shown in FIG. 6 is, for example, a pattern that does not illuminate an oncoming vehicle in left-hand traffic.
Also, like a light distribution pattern 32 shown in FIG. 7, a pattern obtained by cutting out a part of the light distribution pattern 30 shown in FIG. 6 may be used. In this case as well, the intensity of the light sharply drops at the edge 32a, as in the light distribution pattern 30 shown in FIG. Furthermore, the intensity of the light is sharply reduced at the notch 33 as well. For this reason, in the area corresponding to the notch 33, for example, it is possible to display a mark indicating the state of the road, such as a curved road, an upward slope, a downward slope, or the like. As a result, safety during night driving can be improved.
 なお、遮光部14は、光源12とレンズ16との間に固定されて配置されることに限定されるものではなく、図示しない駆動機構により、光源12とレンズ16との間に、必要に応じて進入させて、特定の配光パターンを得る構成とすることもできる。
 また、遮光部14で、光源12からの光を遮光可能なシェード部材を構成してもよい。この場合、図示しない駆動機構により、光源12とレンズ16との間に、必要に応じて進入させて、特定の配光パターンを得る構成とすることもできる。
The light shielding portion 14 is not limited to being fixed between the light source 12 and the lens 16, and may be placed between the light source 12 and the lens 16 by a drive mechanism (not shown) as necessary. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a specific light distribution pattern is obtained by allowing the light to enter.
Further, the light shielding portion 14 may constitute a shade member capable of shielding the light from the light source 12 . In this case, a driving mechanism (not shown) may be used to enter between the light source 12 and the lens 16 as necessary to obtain a specific light distribution pattern.
 以下に実施例に基づいて本発明を更に詳細に説明する。以下の実施例に示す材料、使用量、割合、処理内容、及び、処理手順等は、本発明の趣旨を逸脱しない限り適宜変更できる。したがって、本発明の範囲は以下に示す実施例により限定的に解釈されるべきではない。なお、無機粒子の粒子径は、上述したTEMを用いる方法で測定した。 The present invention will be described in more detail below based on examples. The materials, amounts used, proportions, processing details, processing procedures, etc. shown in the following examples can be changed as appropriate without departing from the gist of the present invention. Therefore, the scope of the present invention should not be construed as limited by the examples shown below. In addition, the particle diameter of the inorganic particles was measured by the method using the TEM described above.
[修飾無機粒子分散液の製造]
〔S-1の製造〕
 スルーリア4110(日揮触媒化成社製、固形分20質量%、イソプロピルアルコール溶剤、中空シリカゾル、平均一次粒子径60nm)(100g)に、KBM-503(信越化学工業社製、3-メタクリロキシプロピルトリメトキシシラン)(4g)、10質量%蟻酸水溶液(0.5g)、及び、水(1g)を混合し、混合液を得た。得られた混合液を60℃で3時間撹拌した。更に、ロータリーエバポレータを用いて、混合液中の溶剤を、1-メトキシ-2-プロパノールに置き換えた。混合液の固形分濃度を確認し、更に必要量の1-メトキシ-2-プロパノールで希釈することで、固形分20質量%の無機粒子分散液PS-1(メタクリル基で表面修飾された中空シリカの分散液)を得た。
 次に、3口フラスコに、上記で得られた無機粒子分散液PS-1(30.0g)、X-22-2404(信越化学工業社製、片末端メタクリル変性シリコーンオイル、1.8g)、イタコン酸無水物(0.4g)、及び、PGMEA(プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート、28.2g)を入れ、フラスコの内容物を、窒素雰囲気下で80℃に昇温した。得られたフラスコに、重合開始剤V-601(富士フイルム和光純薬社製、0.01g)を添加し、3時間撹拌した。更に、このフラスコに、V-601(0.02g)を添加し、2時間撹拌した。その後、フラスコの内容物を、精密ろ過し、得られたろ物に、1-メトキシ-2-プロパノールを、固形分20質量%になるように添加することで、S-1(固形分20質量%、31.5g)を得た。
[Production of modified inorganic particle dispersion]
[Manufacture of S-1]
Sururia 4110 (manufactured by Nikki Shokubai Kasei Co., Ltd., solid content 20% by mass, isopropyl alcohol solvent, hollow silica sol, average primary particle size 60 nm) (100 g), KBM-503 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., 3-methacryloxypropyltrimethoxy silane) (4 g), 10 mass % formic acid aqueous solution (0.5 g), and water (1 g) were mixed to obtain a mixture. The resulting mixture was stirred at 60° C. for 3 hours. Further, the solvent in the mixture was replaced with 1-methoxy-2-propanol using a rotary evaporator. By checking the solid content concentration of the mixed liquid and further diluting it with the required amount of 1-methoxy-2-propanol, an inorganic particle dispersion liquid PS-1 (hollow silica surface-modified with a methacrylic group) having a solid content of 20% by mass was obtained. dispersion) was obtained.
Next, in a three-necked flask, the inorganic particle dispersion PS-1 (30.0 g) obtained above, X-22-2404 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., one end methacrylic modified silicone oil, 1.8 g), Itaconic anhydride (0.4 g) and PGMEA (propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, 28.2 g) were added, and the contents of the flask were heated to 80° C. under a nitrogen atmosphere. A polymerization initiator V-601 (manufactured by FUJIFILM Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd., 0.01 g) was added to the resulting flask and stirred for 3 hours. Further, V-601 (0.02 g) was added to the flask and stirred for 2 hours. After that, the contents of the flask were subjected to microfiltration, and 1-methoxy-2-propanol was added to the obtained filter cake so that the solid content was 20% by mass, thereby obtaining S-1 (solid content: 20% by mass). , 31.5 g).
〔S-2の製造〕
 上記〔S-1の製造〕において、イタコン酸無水物をメタクリル酸に変更した以外は、S-1と同様の方法で、S-2(固形分20質量%)を得た。
[Manufacture of S-2]
S-2 (solid content: 20% by mass) was obtained in the same manner as S-1, except that itaconic anhydride was changed to methacrylic acid in the above [Production of S-1].
〔S-3の製造〕
 上記〔S-1の製造〕において、イタコン酸無水物をビニルフェノールに変更した以外は、S-1と同様の方法で、S-3(固形分20質量%)を得た。
[Manufacture of S-3]
S-3 (solid content: 20% by mass) was obtained in the same manner as S-1, except that vinylphenol was used instead of itaconic anhydride in the above [Production of S-1].
〔S-4の製造〕
 スルーリア4110(日揮触媒化成社製、固形分20質量%、イソプロピルアルコール溶剤、中空シリカゾル、平均一次粒子径60nm)(150g)に、KP-983(信越シリコーン社製、シランカップリング剤)(9g)、X-12-967C(信越シリコーン社製、3-トリメトキシシリルプロピルコハク酸無水物)(1g)を混合し、混合液とした。得られた混合液に、28質量%アンモニア水溶液を上記スルーリア4110(100g)に対して、アンモニアとして400質量ppmとなるように加え、40℃で5時間撹拌した。その後、得られた混合液に、固形分が20質量%になるように1-メトキシ-2-プロパノールを添加して、S-4(固形分20質量%)を得た。
[Manufacture of S-4]
Sururia 4110 (manufactured by Nikki Shokubai Kasei Co., Ltd., solid content 20% by mass, isopropyl alcohol solvent, hollow silica sol, average primary particle size 60 nm) (150 g), KP-983 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Silicone Co., Ltd., silane coupling agent) (9 g) , and X-12-967C (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Silicone Co., Ltd., 3-trimethoxysilylpropyl succinic anhydride) (1 g) to prepare a mixed solution. A 28% by mass ammonia aqueous solution was added to the resulting mixed solution so that the concentration of ammonia was 400 mass ppm relative to the above Sururia 4110 (100 g), and the mixture was stirred at 40° C. for 5 hours. After that, 1-methoxy-2-propanol was added to the resulting mixed solution so that the solid content was 20% by mass to obtain S-4 (solid content: 20% by mass).
〔S-5の製造〕
 上記〔S-1の製造〕において、スルーリア4110(100g)を、IPA-ST-L(日産化学社製、中実シリカ粒子のイソプロパノール分散液、固形分濃度30質量%、平均一次粒子径45nm)67gに変更した以外は、S-1と同様の方法で、S-5(固形分20質量%)を得た。
[Manufacture of S-5]
In the above [Production of S-1], Sururia 4110 (100 g) was added to IPA-ST-L (manufactured by Nissan Chemical Industries, Ltd., isopropanol dispersion of solid silica particles, solid content concentration 30% by mass, average primary particle diameter 45 nm). S-5 (solid content 20% by mass) was obtained in the same manner as S-1, except that the content was changed to 67 g.
〔S-6の製造〕
 上記〔S-2の製造〕において、スルーリア4110(100g)を、IPA-ST-L(日産化学社製、中実シリカ粒子のイソプロパノール分散液、固形分濃度30質量%、平均一次粒子径45nm)(67g)に変更した以外は、S-2と同様の方法で、S-6(固形分20質量%)を得た。
[Manufacture of S-6]
In the above [Production of S-2], Sururia 4110 (100 g) was added to IPA-ST-L (manufactured by Nissan Chemical Industries, Ltd., isopropanol dispersion of solid silica particles, solid content concentration 30% by mass, average primary particle diameter 45 nm). S-6 (solid content 20% by mass) was obtained in the same manner as S-2, except for changing to (67 g).
〔S-7の製造〕
 上記〔S-3の製造〕において、スルーリア4110(100g)を、IPA-ST-L(日産化学社製、中実シリカ粒子のイソプロパノール分散液、固形分濃度30質量%、平均一次粒子径45nm)(67g)に変更した以外は、S-3と同様の方法で、S-7(固形分20質量%)を得た。
[Manufacture of S-7]
In the above [Production of S-3], Sururia 4110 (100 g) was added to IPA-ST-L (manufactured by Nissan Chemical Industries, Ltd., isopropanol dispersion of solid silica particles, solid content concentration 30% by mass, average primary particle diameter 45 nm). S-7 (solid content 20% by mass) was obtained in the same manner as S-3, except that it was changed to (67 g).
〔S-8の製造〕
 上記〔S-4の製造〕において、スルーリア4110(150g)を、IPA-ST-L(日産化学社製、中実シリカ粒子のイソプロパノール分散液、固形分濃度30質量%、平均一次粒子径45nm)(100g)に変更した以外は、S-4と同様の方法で、S-8(固形分20質量%)を得た。
[Manufacture of S-8]
In the above [Production of S-4], Sururia 4110 (150 g) was added to IPA-ST-L (manufactured by Nissan Chemical Industries, Ltd., isopropanol dispersion of solid silica particles, solid content concentration 30% by mass, average primary particle diameter 45 nm). S-8 (solid content 20% by mass) was obtained in the same manner as S-4, except for changing to (100 g).
〔S-9の製造〕
 上記〔S-1の製造〕において、スルーリア4110(100g)を、IPA-ST-L(日産化学社製、中実シリカ粒子のイソプロパノール分散液、固形分濃度30質量%、平均一次粒子径45nm)(67g)に、X-22-2404(1.8g)をメタクリル酸1,1,1,3,3,3-ヘキサフルオロイソプロピル(1.8g)に変更した以外は、S-1と同様の方法で、S-9(固形分20質量%)を得た。
[Manufacture of S-9]
In the above [Production of S-1], Sururia 4110 (100 g) was added to IPA-ST-L (manufactured by Nissan Chemical Industries, Ltd., isopropanol dispersion of solid silica particles, solid content concentration 30% by mass, average primary particle diameter 45 nm). (67 g), the same as S-1 except that X-22-2404 (1.8 g) was changed to 1,1,1,3,3,3-hexafluoroisopropyl methacrylate (1.8 g) method to obtain S-9 (solids content 20% by weight).
[比較用分散液の製造]
〔C-1の製造〕
 スルーリア4110(日揮触媒化成社製、固形分20質量%、イソプロピルアルコール溶剤、中空シリカゾル、平均一次粒子径60nm)をC-1として使用した。
[Production of Comparative Dispersion]
[Production of C-1]
Sururia 4110 (manufactured by Nikki Shokubai Kasei Co., Ltd., solid content 20%, isopropyl alcohol solvent, hollow silica sol, average primary particle size 60 nm) was used as C-1.
〔C-2の製造〕
 上記〔S-1の製造〕において、X-22-2404(信越化学工業社製、片末端メタクリル変性シリコーンオイル、1.8g)、及び、イタコン酸無水物(0.4g)を、X-22-2404(2.0g)に変更した以外は、S-1と同様の方法で、C-2を得た。
[Production of C-2]
In the above [production of S-1], X-22-2404 (Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., one-end methacrylic modified silicone oil, 1.8 g), and itaconic anhydride (0.4 g), X-22 C-2 was obtained in the same manner as S-1, except that -2404 (2.0 g) was used.
〔C-3の製造〕
 上記〔S-1の製造〕において、X-22-2404(信越化学工業社製、片末端メタクリル変性シリコーンオイル、1.8g)、及び、イタコン酸無水物(0.4g)をイタコン酸無水物(2.0g)に変更した以外は、S-1と同様の方法で、C-3を得た。
[Production of C-3]
In the above [production of S-1], X-22-2404 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., one-end methacryl-modified silicone oil, 1.8 g), and itaconic anhydride (0.4 g) (2.0 g), in the same manner as S-1, to obtain C-3.
〔C-4の製造〕
 特開2016-161926号公報の実施例8(C1)に記載の方法で、C-4を得た。
[Production of C-4]
C-4 was obtained by the method described in Example 8 (C1) of JP-A-2016-161926.
[色材分散液の製造]
 表1に記載の各成分を混合、撹拌した後、直径0.3mmのジルコニアビーズ230質量部を加えて、ペイントシェーカーを用いて5時間分散処理を行い、ビーズをろ過で分離して、表1に記載の各色材分散液を得た。表1中の各成分のうち、略称又は記号で表した成分の詳細は以下のとおりである。
[Production of colorant dispersion]
After mixing and stirring each component described in Table 1, 230 parts by mass of zirconia beads with a diameter of 0.3 mm are added, dispersion treatment is performed using a paint shaker for 5 hours, and the beads are separated by filtration. to obtain each colorant dispersion described in . Among the components in Table 1, the details of the components represented by abbreviations or symbols are as follows.
〔溶剤〕
・PGMEA:プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート
・酢酸ブチル
・シクロペンタノン
〔solvent〕
・PGMEA: Propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate ・Butyl acetate ・Cyclopentanone
〔樹脂〕
・B-1:下記の樹脂(重量平均分子量1.1万、酸価32mgKOH/g(式中、Meはメチル基を表す。))
〔resin〕
· B-1: the following resin (weight average molecular weight 11,000, acid value 32 mgKOH / g (where Me represents a methyl group))
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
・B-4:下記の樹脂(重量平均分子量2.1万、酸価36mgKOH/g) · B-4: the following resin (weight average molecular weight 21,000, acid value 36 mgKOH / g)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
・B-5:下記の樹脂(重量平均分子量2.1万、酸価85mgKOH/g、エチレン性不飽和結合当量が0.7mmol/g、グラフト鎖を有する樹脂)
 下記式中、各繰り返し単位に付した数字及びr~uは各繰り返し単位のモル%を示す。
B-5: the following resin (weight average molecular weight 21,000, acid value 85 mgKOH / g, ethylenically unsaturated bond equivalent 0.7 mmol / g, resin having a graft chain)
In the following formula, the number attached to each repeating unit and r to u indicate mol% of each repeating unit.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
・B-6:Solsperse 36000(Lubrizol社製)
・B-7:国際公開第2020/203080号の段落[0352]に記載のB-10
・B-8:SOLSPERSE20000(Lubrizol社製、アミン価32mgKOH/g)
・ B-6: Solsperse 36000 (manufactured by Lubrizol)
・ B-7: B-10 described in paragraph [0352] of WO 2020/203080
· B-8: SOLSPERSE20000 (manufactured by Lubrizol, amine value 32 mgKOH / g)
〔色材〕
・チタンブラック:三菱マテリアル社製、13M-T
・カーボンブラック:三菱化学社製、#2300
・アルミニウムを含有する窒化ジルコニウム:国際公開第2020/203080号公報の段落[0324]に記載のZr-4である、アルミナで被覆された窒化ジルコニウム
・イットリウムを含有する窒化ジルコニウム:特開2020-180036号公報の<実施例1>のイットリウムを含有する窒化ジルコニウム粉末からなる黒色顔料
・表面処理された窒化ジルコニウム:特開2020-019691号公報の<実施例1>のシラン化合物で表面処理された窒化ジルコニウムからなる黒色顔料
・Irgaphor Black:Irgaphor Black S0100CF(BASF社製)
・Pigment Green36
・Pigment Yellow 150
・Pigment Red254
・Pigment Yellow 139
・Pigment Blue 15:6
・Pigment Violet 23
・Pigment Blue 16
・Pigment Red 122
・Pigment Yellow 150
・SIR顔料:下記の化合物(式中、Phはフェニル基を表し、Meはメチル基を表す。)
[Color material]
・ Titanium black: 13M-T manufactured by Mitsubishi Materials Corporation
・ Carbon black: #2300 manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation
- Zirconium nitride containing aluminum: Zr-4 containing zirconium nitride-yttrium coated with alumina, which is Zr-4 described in paragraph [0324] of WO 2020/203080: JP 2020-180036 Black pigment made of yttrium-containing zirconium nitride powder of <Example 1> of JP-A-2005-210002 Surface-treated zirconium nitride: Nitriding surface-treated with a silane compound of <Example 1> of JP-A-2020-019691 Black pigment made of zirconium Irgaphor Black: Irgaphor Black S0100CF (manufactured by BASF)
・Pigment Green 36
・Pigment Yellow 150
・Pigment Red 254
・Pigment Yellow 139
・Pigment Blue 15:6
Pigment Violet 23
Pigment Blue 16
・Pigment Red 122
・Pigment Yellow 150
- SIR pigment: the following compound (wherein Ph represents a phenyl group and Me represents a methyl group)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
〔顔料誘導体〕
・X-1:下記の化合物
[Pigment derivative]
· X-1: the following compounds
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
・X-2:下記の化合物(式中、Phはフェニル基を表し、Meはメチル基を表す。) · X-2: the following compound (wherein Ph represents a phenyl group and Me represents a methyl group.)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
 表1中、各原料における各含有量の記載は、質量%を示す。 In Table 1, the description of each content in each raw material indicates % by mass.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000029
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000029
[組成物の調製]
 下記原料を使用して、表2~7に示す配合で混合して、実施例及び比較例の組成物を調製した。
[Preparation of composition]
Compositions of Examples and Comparative Examples were prepared by using the following raw materials and mixing them according to the formulations shown in Tables 2 to 7.
〔溶剤〕
・PGMEA:プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート
〔solvent〕
・PGMEA: propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate
〔樹脂(後添加樹脂)〕
・B-1:上記B-1と同一の樹脂
・B-2:カルド樹脂V-259ME(新日鉄住金社製)
・B-5:上記B-5と同一の樹脂
[Resin (post-added resin)]
・ B-1: The same resin as B-1 above ・ B-2: Cardo resin V-259ME (manufactured by Nippon Steel & Sumikin Co., Ltd.)
· B-5: the same resin as B-5 above
〔重合性化合物〕
・M-1:NK エステル A-TMMT(4官能アクリレート、新中村化学社製)
・M-2:アロニックスTO-2349(酸変性多官能アクリレート、東亞合成社製)
・M-3:オグソールEA-0300(フルオレン含有アクリレート、大阪ガスケミカル社製)
[Polymerizable compound]
・ M-1: NK ester A-TMMT (tetrafunctional acrylate, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.)
・ M-2: Aronix TO-2349 (acid-modified polyfunctional acrylate, manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.)
・ M-3: Ogsol EA-0300 (fluorene-containing acrylate, manufactured by Osaka Gas Chemicals Co., Ltd.)
〔重合開始剤〕
・Ini-1:IRGACURE OXE01(BASF社製)
・Ini-2:下記の化合物
・Ini-3:下記の化合物
・Ini-4:NCI-831(ADEKA社製)
[Polymerization initiator]
・ Ini-1: IRGACURE OXE01 (manufactured by BASF)
· Ini-2: the following compound · Ini-3: the following compound · Ini-4: NCI-831 (manufactured by ADEKA)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
〔密着剤〕
・M-5:下記の化合物
[Adhesion agent]
· M-5: the following compounds
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031
・M-6:KBM-5103(信越シリコーン社製) ・ M-6: KBM-5103 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Silicone Co., Ltd.)
〔重合禁止剤〕
・A-1:p-メトキシフェノール
・A-2:下記の化合物(式中、t-Buは、tert-ブチル基を表す。)
[Polymerization inhibitor]
· A-1: p-methoxyphenol · A-2: the following compound (wherein t-Bu represents a tert-butyl group.)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000032
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000032
〔界面活性剤〕
・W-1:下記の界面活性剤(各繰り返し単位に付した数字又は文字は各繰り返し単位のモル比を示す。重量平均分子量1.5万)
[Surfactant]
· W-1: the following surfactant (numbers or letters attached to each repeating unit indicate the molar ratio of each repeating unit. Weight average molecular weight 15,000)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033
・W-2:下記の界面活性剤(重量平均分子量3000、式中、nは1以上の整数を表す。) · W-2: the following surfactant (weight average molecular weight 3000, where n represents an integer of 1 or more.)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034
・W-3:KF6000(信越シリコーン社製)
・W-4:FZ-2122(東レダウケミカル社製)
・ W-3: KF6000 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Silicone Co., Ltd.)
・ W-4: FZ-2122 (manufactured by Dow Toray Chemical Co., Ltd.)
〔エポキシ化合物〕
・E-1:EHPE 3150(エポキシ基を含有する化合物、ダイセル社製)
[Epoxy compound]
E-1: EHPE 3150 (compound containing an epoxy group, manufactured by Daicel Corporation)
〔修飾無機粒子分散液又は比較用分散液〕
・S-1~S-9:上述のS-1~S-9の修飾無機粒子分散液
・C-1~C-4:上述のC-1~C-4の比較用分散液
[Modified inorganic particle dispersion or comparative dispersion]
・S-1 to S-9: Modified inorganic particle dispersions of S-1 to S-9 above ・C-1 to C-4: Comparative dispersions of C-1 to C-4 above
〔色材分散液〕
 表1に示す各色材分散液を用いた。
[Colorant dispersion]
Each colorant dispersion liquid shown in Table 1 was used.
[評価]
〔反射率(低反射性)の評価〕
<組成物を用いた遮光膜付き基板の作製>
 上記で得られた実施例1の組成物をガラス基板上にスピンコート法により塗布し、厚さ1.5μmの組成物層を作製した。100℃で120秒のプリベイクを行った後、基板全面に対してUX-1000SM-EH04(ウシオ電機社製)を用いて高圧水銀ランプ(ランプパワ50mW/cm)にて500mJ/cmの露光量で露光した。露光後の基板を220℃で300秒間のポストベイクを行い、実施例1の組成物を用いた遮光膜付き基板を得た。
 また、表2~7に従って組成物を変更した以外は、実施例1と同様にして、遮光膜付き基板を作製した。
[evaluation]
[Evaluation of reflectance (low reflectivity)]
<Preparation of a substrate with a light-shielding film using the composition>
The composition of Example 1 obtained above was applied onto a glass substrate by spin coating to prepare a composition layer having a thickness of 1.5 μm. After pre-baking at 100° C. for 120 seconds, the entire surface of the substrate was exposed to light of 500 mJ/cm 2 with a high pressure mercury lamp (lamp power 50 mW/cm 2 ) using UX-1000SM-EH04 (manufactured by Ushio Inc.). exposed with The exposed substrate was post-baked at 220° C. for 300 seconds to obtain a substrate with a light-shielding film using the composition of Example 1.
Further, a substrate with a light-shielding film was produced in the same manner as in Example 1, except that the composition was changed according to Tables 2-7.
<反射率の評価>
 上記<組成物を用いた遮光膜付き基板の作製>で得られた遮光膜付き基板に対し、日本分光株式会社製分光器V7200(商品名)VARユニットを用いて角度5°の入射角で波長350~1200nmの光を入射し、得られた反射率スペクトルより、各波長の反射率を評価した。具体的には、波長400~1100nmの範囲で最大反射率を示した波長の光の反射率を評価の基準として下記区分に照らして評価した。A~Cの評価であれば、実用上問題ないと判断した。
(評価基準)
 A:反射率が1%未満
 B:反射率が1%以上3%未満
 C:反射率が3%以上5%未満
 D:反射率が5%以上
<Evaluation of Reflectance>
For the substrate with a light-shielding film obtained in <Preparation of a substrate with a light-shielding film using the composition>, a spectrometer V7200 (trade name) manufactured by JASCO Corporation was used to obtain a wavelength at an incident angle of 5 °. Light of 350 to 1200 nm was incident, and the reflectance of each wavelength was evaluated from the obtained reflectance spectrum. Specifically, the reflectance of light having the maximum reflectance in the wavelength range of 400 to 1100 nm was used as an evaluation standard and evaluated according to the following categories. If the evaluation was A to C, it was determined that there was no practical problem.
(Evaluation criteria)
A: Reflectance less than 1% B: Reflectance 1% or more and less than 3% C: Reflectance 3% or more and less than 5% D: Reflectance 5% or more
〔引き置いた際のパターン形状の評価〕
 シリコンウエハ上に、シリコン酸化物層をプラズマCVD(chemical vapor deposition)法で形成した。次いで、このシリコン酸化物層をドライエッチング法でパターニングして、シリコン酸化物からなる隔壁(幅100nm、厚さ500nm)を1.0μm間隔で格子状に形成した。シリコンウエハ上の隔壁の開口の寸法(シリコンウエハ上の隔壁で区画された領域)は、縦1.0μm、横1.0μmであった。
 次に、上記で作製したシリコンウエハ上に、各実施例及び各比較例の組成物を、製膜後の膜厚が0.8μmになるようにスピンコート法で塗布し、次いで、ホットプレートを用いて90℃で2分間加熱した後、室温で24時間静置した(引き置き)。次いで、i線ステッパー露光装置FPA-3000i5+(Canon(株)製)を用い、1.0μmのアイランドパターンを有するマスクを介して、50~2000mJ/cmの露光量で露光した。次いで、水酸化テトラメチルアンモニウム(TMAH)0.3%水溶液を用い、23℃で60秒間パドル現像を行った。その後、スピンシャワーにてリンスを行い、更に純水にて水洗した後に、ホットプレートを用いて220℃で5分間加熱して、隔壁で区画された領域にカラーフィルタを形成した。
 上記で得られた隔壁内に埋め込まれたカラーフィルタのアイランドパターンにおいて、集束イオンビーム(FIB)を用いて、隔壁内にカラーフィルタが埋め込まれた部分の断面サンプルを作製し、走査型電子顕微鏡(SEM)(S-4800H、(株)日立ハイテクノロジーズ製)にて観測し、カラーフィルタ断面のテーパー角を測定し、以下の基準よりパターン形状の精度を評価した。カラーフィルタ断面のテーパー角が90度に近いほど、パターン形状の精度が高いことを表す。A~Cの評価であれば、実用上問題ないと判断した。
(評価基準)
 A:カラーフィルタ断面のテーパー角が88度以上90度以下
 B:カラーフィルタ断面のテーパー角が85度以上88度未満
 C:カラーフィルタ断面のテーパー角が75度以上85度未満
 D:カラーフィルタ断面のテーパー角が75度未満
[Evaluation of pattern shape when set]
A silicon oxide layer was formed on a silicon wafer by plasma CVD (chemical vapor deposition). Next, this silicon oxide layer was patterned by a dry etching method to form barrier ribs (width 100 nm, thickness 500 nm) made of silicon oxide in a grid pattern at intervals of 1.0 μm. The dimensions of the opening of the partition on the silicon wafer (the area partitioned by the partition on the silicon wafer) were 1.0 μm long and 1.0 μm wide.
Next, on the silicon wafer produced above, the composition of each example and each comparative example was applied by a spin coating method so that the film thickness after film formation was 0.8 μm, and then a hot plate was applied. After heating at 90° C. for 2 minutes, the mixture was allowed to stand at room temperature for 24 hours (leaving). Then, using an i-line stepper exposure apparatus FPA-3000i5+ (manufactured by Canon Inc.), exposure was performed at an exposure amount of 50 to 2000 mJ/cm 2 through a mask having an island pattern of 1.0 μm. Then, using a 0.3% aqueous solution of tetramethylammonium hydroxide (TMAH), puddle development was performed at 23° C. for 60 seconds. After that, it was rinsed with a spin shower, washed with pure water, and heated at 220° C. for 5 minutes using a hot plate to form color filters in the regions partitioned by the partition walls.
In the island pattern of the color filters embedded in the barrier ribs obtained above, a focused ion beam (FIB) was used to prepare a cross-sectional sample of the portion where the color filters were embedded in the barrier ribs, and a scanning electron microscope ( SEM) (S-4800H, manufactured by Hitachi High-Technologies Corporation) was used to measure the taper angle of the cross section of the color filter, and the accuracy of the pattern shape was evaluated according to the following criteria. The closer the taper angle of the color filter cross section to 90 degrees, the higher the accuracy of the pattern shape. If the evaluation was A to C, it was determined that there was no practical problem.
(Evaluation criteria)
A: The taper angle of the color filter cross section is 88 degrees or more and 90 degrees or less B: The taper angle of the color filter cross section is 85 degrees or more and less than 88 degrees C: The taper angle of the color filter cross section is 75 degrees or more and less than 85 degrees D: The color filter cross section taper angle is less than 75 degrees
〔引き置いた際の残渣抑制性の評価〕
 上記〔引き置いた際のパターン形状の評価〕で得られたカラーフィルタのアイランドパターンにおいて、隔壁内にカラーフィルタが埋め込まれていないパターン(非画像部)の残渣を走査型電子顕微鏡(SEM)(S-4800H、(株)日立ハイテクノロジーズ製)観察により評価した。評価基準は以下のとおりである。A~Cの評価であれば、実用上問題ないと判断した。
(評価基準)
 A:非画像部に残渣が観測されなかった
 B:非画像部に0.01μm未満の残渣が観測された
 C:非画像部に0.01μm以上0.05μm未満の残渣が観測された
 D:非画像部に0.05μm以上の残渣が観測された
[Evaluation of residue suppression property when left]
In the island pattern of the color filter obtained in the above [Evaluation of pattern shape when placed], the residue of the pattern (non-image area) in which the color filter is not embedded in the partition wall was examined with a scanning electron microscope (SEM) ( S-4800H, manufactured by Hitachi High-Technologies Corporation) was evaluated by observation. Evaluation criteria are as follows. If the evaluation was A to C, it was determined that there was no practical problem.
(Evaluation criteria)
A: No residue was observed in the non-image area B: A residue of less than 0.01 μm was observed in the non-image area C: A residue of 0.01 μm or more and less than 0.05 μm was observed in the non-image area D: A residue of 0.05 μm or more was observed in the non-image area
〔保存安定性(粘度)の評価〕
 各実施例及び各比較例において、それぞれ、静置処理前の組成物の粘度(mPa・s)を、RE-85L(東機産業社製)にて測定した。上記測定後、組成物を45℃、遮光下、3日間の条件にて静置(静置処理)した後、静置処理後の組成物の粘度(mPa・s)をRE-85L(東機産業社製)にて測定した。
 上記静置前後での粘度差の絶対値(ΔVis)から下記評価基準に従って保存安定性を評価した。粘度差(ΔVis)の数値が小さいほど、組成物の保存安定性(粘度)が良好である。なお、上記粘度測定は、いずれも、温度22±5℃、湿度60±20%に管理した実験室で、組成物の温度を25℃に調整した状態で測定した。A~Cの評価であれば、実用上問題ないと判断した。
(評価基準)
 A:ΔVisが0.5mPa・s以下
 B:ΔVisが0.5mPa・s超1.0mPa・s以下
 C:ΔVisが1.0mPa・s超2.0mPa・s以下
 D:ΔVisが2.0mPa・s超
[Evaluation of storage stability (viscosity)]
In each example and each comparative example, the viscosity (mPa·s) of the composition before standing treatment was measured with RE-85L (manufactured by Toki Sangyo Co., Ltd.). After the above measurement, the composition was left to stand (stationary treatment) under the conditions of 45 ° C. and light shielding for 3 days, and the viscosity (mPa s) of the composition after the standing treatment was measured by RE-85L (Toki manufactured by Sangyo Co., Ltd.).
Storage stability was evaluated according to the following evaluation criteria from the absolute value (ΔVis) of the difference in viscosity before and after standing. The smaller the numerical value of the viscosity difference (ΔVis), the better the storage stability (viscosity) of the composition. All of the above viscosity measurements were performed in a laboratory controlled at a temperature of 22±5° C. and a humidity of 60±20%, with the temperature of the composition adjusted to 25° C. If the evaluation was A to C, it was determined that there was no practical problem.
(Evaluation criteria)
A: ΔVis is 0.5 mPa s or less B: ΔVis is more than 0.5 mPa s and 1.0 mPa s or less C: ΔVis is more than 1.0 mPa s and 2.0 mPa s or less D: ΔVis is 2.0 mPa s over s
〔保存安定性(反射率)の評価〕
 上記<組成物を用いた遮光膜付き基板の作製>と同様に手順で、静置処理前の組成物を用いて遮光膜付き基板を作製し、反射率を測定した。
 一方で、組成物を45℃、遮光下、3日間の条件にて静置(静置処理)し、静置処理後の組成物の上層の液を用いて、遮光膜付き基板を作製した以外は、<組成物を用いた遮光膜付き基板の作製>と同様に手順で遮光膜付き基板を作製し、反射率を測定した。
 上記静置前後での反射率の差の絶対値ΔRを算出して、下記の評価基準に従って評価した。ΔRが小さいほど、反射率変化が起こりにくく、好ましいといえる。A~Cの評価であれば、実用上問題ないと判断した。
(評価基準)
 A:ΔRが0.5%以下
 B:ΔRが0.5%超1%以下
 C:ΔRが1%超3%以下
 D:ΔRが3%超
[Evaluation of Storage Stability (Reflectance)]
A substrate with a light-shielding film was prepared using the composition before the standing treatment in the same manner as <Preparation of a substrate with a light-shielding film using the composition>, and the reflectance was measured.
On the other hand, except that the composition was allowed to stand (stationary treatment) under the conditions of 45° C. and light shielding for 3 days, and the upper layer liquid of the composition after the stationary treatment was used to prepare a substrate with a light-shielding film. prepared a substrate with a light-shielding film in the same manner as <Production of a substrate with a light-shielding film using the composition>, and measured the reflectance.
The absolute value ΔR of the difference in reflectance before and after the standing was calculated and evaluated according to the following evaluation criteria. The smaller the ΔR, the less the change in reflectance occurs, which is preferable. If the evaluation was A to C, it was determined that there was no practical problem.
(Evaluation criteria)
A: ΔR is 0.5% or less B: ΔR is more than 0.5% and 1% or less C: ΔR is more than 1% and 3% or less D: ΔR is more than 3%
 表2~7に評価結果を示す。
 表2~7中、各記載は以下を示す。
 「修飾無機粒子の含有量(質量%)」は、組成物の全固形分に対する修飾無機粒子の含有量を示す。
 「疎水性基」における「A」又は「B」の記載は、「A」である場合、疎水性基がケイ素原子を含む基であることを示し、「B」である場合、疎水性基がフッ素原子を含む基であることを示す。
 「特定基」における「A」又は「B」の記載は、「A」である場合、特定基がアルカリの作用により極性が増大する基であることを示し、「B」である場合、特定基がアルカリの作用により塩を形成する基であることを示す。
Tables 2 to 7 show the evaluation results.
In Tables 2 to 7, each description shows the following.
"Content of modified inorganic particles (% by mass)" indicates the content of modified inorganic particles relative to the total solid content of the composition.
The description of "A" or "B" in the "hydrophobic group" indicates that the hydrophobic group is a group containing a silicon atom when it is "A", and when it is "B", the hydrophobic group is Indicates a group containing a fluorine atom.
The description of "A" or "B" in "specific group" indicates that the specific group is a group whose polarity is increased by the action of alkali when it is "A", and when it is "B", the specific group is a group that forms a salt under the action of alkali.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000035
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000035
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000036
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000036
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000037
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000037
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000038
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000038
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000039
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000039
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000040
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000040
[結果]
 表2~7の結果より、本発明の組成物は、引き置いた際の現像残渣抑制性に優れ、かつ、低反射性に優れる硬化膜を形成できることが確認された。
 実施例1~8と、実施例9との比較から、疎水性基がケイ素原子を含む基を含有する場合、反射率がより優れることが確認された。
 実施例10~12及び14~18と、実施例13との比較から、修飾無機粒子の含有量が、組成物の全固形分に対して、1.0~20.0質量%である場合、反射率がより優れることが確認され、実施例10~11及び14~17と、実施例18との比較から、修飾無機粒子の含有量が、組成物の全固形分に対して、2.5~16.0質量%である場合、反射率が引き置きた際の現像残渣抑制性がより優れることが確認された。
 実施例8及び34~35と、実施例33との比較から、界面活性剤がフッ素原子を含有しない界面活性剤(例えば、シリコーン系界面活性剤)である場合、反射率がより優れることが確認された。
 実施例4及び8~9と、実施例1~3及び5~7との比較から、修飾無機粒子の製造方法が上述した製造方法Aである場合、引き置いた際のパターン形状がより優れることが確認された。
 実施例1、4~5及び8~9と、実施例2~3及び6~7との比較から、特定基がアルカリの作用により極性が増大する基である場合、保存安定性(粘度)がより優れることが確認された。
 実施例1及び3~5と、実施例2及び6との比較から、特定基がアルカリの作用により極性が増大する基又はカルボン酸基以外のアルカリの作用により塩を形成する基である場合、保存安定性(反射率)がより優れることが確認された。
 実施例8、19、20、23及び45~52と、実施例24及び44との比較等から、色材が有彩色着色剤及び無機顔料の黒色着色剤からなる群から選択される少なくとも1種を含む場合、引き置いた際のパターン形状がより優れることが確認され、実施例8及び23と、実施例19、20及び45~52との比較等から、色材がカーボンブラック以外の無機顔料の黒色着色剤を含む場合、引き置いた際のパターン形状が更に優れることが確認された。
[result]
From the results in Tables 2 to 7, it was confirmed that the composition of the present invention can form a cured film that is excellent in suppressing development residue when set aside and has excellent low reflectivity.
A comparison between Examples 1 to 8 and Example 9 confirmed that the reflectance was better when the hydrophobic group contained a silicon atom-containing group.
From a comparison of Examples 10 to 12 and 14 to 18 with Example 13, when the content of the modified inorganic particles is 1.0 to 20.0% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the composition, It was confirmed that the reflectance was better, and from a comparison of Examples 10 to 11 and 14 to 17 with Example 18, the content of the modified inorganic particles was 2.5 with respect to the total solid content of the composition. It was confirmed that when the reflectance is 16.0% by mass, the development residue suppressing property is more excellent when the reflectance is set.
From the comparison between Examples 8 and 34-35 and Example 33, it is confirmed that the reflectance is better when the surfactant is a surfactant containing no fluorine atom (for example, a silicone-based surfactant). was done.
From a comparison between Examples 4 and 8-9 and Examples 1-3 and 5-7, it was found that when the modified inorganic particles were produced by the above-described production method A, the pattern shape was superior when the particles were set aside. was confirmed.
From a comparison between Examples 1, 4 to 5 and 8 to 9 and Examples 2 to 3 and 6 to 7, when the specific group is a group whose polarity is increased by the action of alkali, storage stability (viscosity) is improved. confirmed to be superior.
From a comparison between Examples 1 and 3 to 5 and Examples 2 and 6, when the specific group is a group whose polarity increases under the action of an alkali or a group other than a carboxylic acid group which forms a salt under the action of an alkali, It was confirmed that the storage stability (reflectance) was superior.
From the comparison of Examples 8, 19, 20, 23 and 45 to 52 with Examples 24 and 44, etc., the colorant is at least one selected from the group consisting of chromatic colorants and black colorants of inorganic pigments. If it contains, it is confirmed that the pattern shape is more excellent when placed, and from the comparison of Examples 8 and 23 and Examples 19, 20 and 45 to 52, the colorant is an inorganic pigment other than carbon black. When the black colorant is contained, it was confirmed that the pattern shape when placed was further excellent.
10・・・ヘッドライトユニット
12・・・光源
14・・・遮光部
16・・・レンズ
20・・・基体
22・・・遮光膜
23・・・開口部
30・・・配光パターン
30a・・・エッジ
31・・・領域
32・・・配光パターン
32a・・・エッジ
33・・・切欠部
100・・・固体撮像装置
101・・・固体撮像素子
102・・・撮像部
103・・・カバーガラス
104・・・スペーサー
105・・・積層基板
106・・・チップ基板
107・・・回路基板
108・・・電極パッド
109・・・外部接続端子
110・・・貫通電極
111・・・レンズ層
112・・・レンズ材
113・・・支持体
114、115・・・遮光膜
201・・・受光素子
202・・・カラーフィルタ
203・・・マイクロレンズ
204・・・基板
205b・・・青色画素
205r・・・赤色画素
205g・・・緑色画素
205bm・・・ブラックマトリクス
206・・・pウェル層
207・・・読み出しゲート部
208・・・垂直転送路
209・・・素子分離領域
210・・・ゲート絶縁膜
211・・・垂直転送電極
212・・・遮光膜
213、214・・・絶縁膜
215・・・平坦化膜
300・・・赤外線センサ
310・・・固体撮像素子
311・・・赤外線吸収フィルタ
312・・・カラーフィルタ
313・・・赤外線透過フィルタ
314・・・樹脂膜
315・・・マイクロレンズ
316・・・平坦化膜
Reference Signs List 10 Headlight unit 12 Light source 14 Light shielding part 16 Lens 20 Substrate 22 Light shielding film 23 Opening 30 Light distribution pattern 30a Edge 31 Area 32 Light distribution pattern 32a Edge 33 Notch 100 Solid-state imaging device 101 Solid-state imaging device 102 Imaging unit 103 Cover Glass 104 Spacer 105 Laminated substrate 106 Chip substrate 107 Circuit substrate 108 Electrode pad 109 External connection terminal 110 Through electrode 111 Lens layer 112 Lens material 113 Supports 114, 115 Light-shielding film 201 Light-receiving element 202 Color filter 203 Microlens 204 Substrate 205b Blue pixel 205r Red pixel 205g Green pixel 205bm Black matrix 206 P-well layer 207 Readout gate section 208 Vertical transfer path 209 Element isolation region 210 Gate insulation Film 211 Vertical transfer electrode 212 Light shielding films 213, 214 Insulating film 215 Flattening film 300 Infrared sensor 310 Solid-state imaging device 311 Infrared absorption filter 312 ... color filter 313 ... infrared transmission filter 314 ... resin film 315 ... microlens 316 ... flattening film

Claims (19)

  1.  修飾無機粒子と、重合性化合物とを含有し、
     前記修飾無機粒子が、無機粒子と、前記無機粒子の一部又は全部を被覆する被覆層とを含有し、
     前記被覆層が、アルカリの作用により塩を形成する基、及び、アルカリの作用により極性が増大する基からなる群から選択される少なくとも1つの特定基と、疎水性基とを含有する、組成物。
    containing modified inorganic particles and a polymerizable compound,
    The modified inorganic particles contain inorganic particles and a coating layer covering part or all of the inorganic particles,
    The composition, wherein the coating layer contains at least one specific group selected from the group consisting of a group that forms a salt by the action of an alkali and a group that increases in polarity by the action of an alkali, and a hydrophobic group. .
  2.  前記特定基が、カルボン酸基又はカルボン酸無水物基である、請求項1に記載の組成物。 The composition according to claim 1, wherein the specific group is a carboxylic acid group or a carboxylic anhydride group.
  3.  修飾無機粒子と、重合性化合物とを含有し、
     前記修飾無機粒子が、無機粒子と、前記無機粒子の一部又は全部を被覆する被覆層とを含有し、
     前記被覆層が、カルボン酸基、スルホン酸基、リン酸基、硝酸基、フェノール性水酸基、及び、酸無水物基からなる群から選択される少なくとも1種と、疎水性基とを含有する、組成物。
    containing modified inorganic particles and a polymerizable compound,
    The modified inorganic particles contain inorganic particles and a coating layer covering part or all of the inorganic particles,
    The coating layer contains at least one selected from the group consisting of a carboxylic acid group, a sulfonic acid group, a phosphoric acid group, a nitric acid group, a phenolic hydroxyl group, and an acid anhydride group, and a hydrophobic group. Composition.
  4.  前記無機粒子の粒子径が、100nm未満である、請求項1~3のいずれか1項に記載の組成物。 The composition according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the inorganic particles have a particle size of less than 100 nm.
  5.  更に、色材を含有する、請求項1~4のいずれか1項に記載の組成物。 The composition according to any one of claims 1 to 4, further comprising a coloring material.
  6.  前記色材が、黒色着色剤である、請求項5に記載の組成物。 The composition according to claim 5, wherein the colorant is a black colorant.
  7.  前記色材が、無機顔料である、請求項5又は6に記載の組成物。 The composition according to claim 5 or 6, wherein the coloring material is an inorganic pigment.
  8.  更に、樹脂、及び、重合開始剤を含有する、請求項1~7のいずれか1項に記載の組成物。 The composition according to any one of claims 1 to 7, further comprising a resin and a polymerization initiator.
  9.  更に、樹脂、重合開始剤、及び、色材を含有し、
     前記色材の含有量に対する、
     前記修飾無機粒子、前記樹脂、前記重合開始剤、及び、前記重合性化合物の合計含有量の質量比が、0.01~2.00である、請求項1~8のいずれか1項に記載の組成物。
    Furthermore, it contains a resin, a polymerization initiator, and a coloring material,
    For the content of the coloring material,
    The modified inorganic particles, the resin, the polymerization initiator, and the polymerizable compound according to any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein the mass ratio of the total content is 0.01 to 2.00. composition.
  10.  前記修飾無機粒子の含有量が、組成物の全固形分に対して、1.0~20.0質量%である、請求項1~9のいずれか1項に記載の組成物。 The composition according to any one of claims 1 to 9, wherein the content of the modified inorganic particles is 1.0 to 20.0% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the composition.
  11.  前記無機粒子が、シリカ、チタニア、及び、アルミナからなる群から選択される少なくとも1種を含有する、請求項1~10のいずれか1項に記載の組成物。 The composition according to any one of claims 1 to 10, wherein the inorganic particles contain at least one selected from the group consisting of silica, titania, and alumina.
  12.  前記疎水性基が、フッ素原子及びケイ素原子からなる群から選択される少なくとも1種を含有する、請求項1~11のいずれか1項に記載の組成物。 The composition according to any one of claims 1 to 11, wherein the hydrophobic group contains at least one selected from the group consisting of fluorine atoms and silicon atoms.
  13.  前記疎水性基が、ジアルキルシロキサン基、又は、フルオロアルキル基である、請求項1~12のいずれか1項に記載の組成物。 The composition according to any one of claims 1 to 12, wherein the hydrophobic group is a dialkylsiloxane group or a fluoroalkyl group.
  14.  請求項1~13のいずれか1項に記載の組成物を用いて形成された、硬化膜。 A cured film formed using the composition according to any one of claims 1 to 13.
  15.  請求項14に記載の硬化膜を含有する、カラーフィルタ。 A color filter containing the cured film according to claim 14.
  16.  請求項14に記載の硬化膜を含有する、遮光膜。 A light-shielding film containing the cured film according to claim 14.
  17.  請求項14に記載の硬化膜を含有する、光学素子。 An optical element containing the cured film according to claim 14.
  18.  請求項14に記載の硬化膜を含有する、固体撮像素子。 A solid-state imaging device containing the cured film according to claim 14.
  19.  車両用灯具のヘッドライトユニットであって、
     光源と、
     前記光源から出射された光の少なくとも一部を遮光する遮光部とを有し、
     前記遮光部が、請求項14に記載の硬化膜を含有する、ヘッドライトユニット。
    A headlight unit for a vehicle lamp,
    a light source;
    and a light shielding part that shields at least part of the light emitted from the light source,
    A headlight unit, wherein the light shielding portion contains the cured film according to claim 14 .
PCT/JP2022/000329 2021-01-20 2022-01-07 Composition, cured film, color filter, light-shielding film, optical element, solid imaging element, and headlight unit WO2022158313A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2022576600A JPWO2022158313A1 (en) 2021-01-20 2022-01-07

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2021-007037 2021-01-20
JP2021007037 2021-01-20

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022158313A1 true WO2022158313A1 (en) 2022-07-28

Family

ID=82548822

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2022/000329 WO2022158313A1 (en) 2021-01-20 2022-01-07 Composition, cured film, color filter, light-shielding film, optical element, solid imaging element, and headlight unit

Country Status (3)

Country Link
JP (1) JPWO2022158313A1 (en)
TW (1) TW202237727A (en)
WO (1) WO2022158313A1 (en)

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN116674279A (en) * 2023-05-29 2023-09-01 珠海市凯拓塑料制品有限公司 Anti-falling packaging box for circuit board protection and preparation process thereof
WO2023190455A1 (en) * 2022-03-29 2023-10-05 太陽ホールディングス株式会社 Photosensitive resin composition, cured product, printed circuit board, and method for producing printed circuit board
WO2024043110A1 (en) * 2022-08-22 2024-02-29 富士フイルム株式会社 Photosensitive composition, film, and optical sensor

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2010007900A1 (en) * 2008-07-17 2010-01-21 東レフィルム加工株式会社 Filter for display
JP2019061241A (en) * 2017-09-25 2019-04-18 東レ株式会社 Image display device
WO2019176409A1 (en) * 2018-03-13 2019-09-19 富士フイルム株式会社 Method for manufacturing cured film, and method for manufacturing solid-state imaging element
WO2020066420A1 (en) * 2018-09-25 2020-04-02 富士フイルム株式会社 Light-shielding composition, cured film, light-shielding film, and solid-state imaging element

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2010007900A1 (en) * 2008-07-17 2010-01-21 東レフィルム加工株式会社 Filter for display
JP2019061241A (en) * 2017-09-25 2019-04-18 東レ株式会社 Image display device
WO2019176409A1 (en) * 2018-03-13 2019-09-19 富士フイルム株式会社 Method for manufacturing cured film, and method for manufacturing solid-state imaging element
WO2020066420A1 (en) * 2018-09-25 2020-04-02 富士フイルム株式会社 Light-shielding composition, cured film, light-shielding film, and solid-state imaging element

Cited By (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2023190455A1 (en) * 2022-03-29 2023-10-05 太陽ホールディングス株式会社 Photosensitive resin composition, cured product, printed circuit board, and method for producing printed circuit board
WO2024043110A1 (en) * 2022-08-22 2024-02-29 富士フイルム株式会社 Photosensitive composition, film, and optical sensor
CN116674279A (en) * 2023-05-29 2023-09-01 珠海市凯拓塑料制品有限公司 Anti-falling packaging box for circuit board protection and preparation process thereof
CN116674279B (en) * 2023-05-29 2023-12-22 珠海市凯拓塑料制品有限公司 Anti-falling packaging box for circuit board protection and preparation process thereof

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JPWO2022158313A1 (en) 2022-07-28
TW202237727A (en) 2022-10-01

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2022158313A1 (en) Composition, cured film, color filter, light-shielding film, optical element, solid imaging element, and headlight unit
JP7423646B2 (en) Curable compositions, cured films, color filters, solid-state imaging devices, and image display devices
JP7231713B2 (en) Composition, light-shielding film, color filter, optical element, sensor, solid-state imaging device, headlight unit
JP7109565B2 (en) Light-shielding composition, cured film, light-shielding film, solid-state imaging device
WO2018142804A1 (en) Resin composition, resin film, method for producing resin film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element, image display device and infrared sensor
WO2020017184A1 (en) Light blocking resin composition, cured film, color filter, light blocking film, solid-state image sensor, and image display device
WO2020059382A1 (en) Light-shielding film, method for manufacturing light-shielding film, optical element, solid-state imaging element, and headlight unit
CN112534312A (en) Light-shielding composition, cured film, color filter, light-shielding film, optical element, solid-state imaging element, and headlamp unit
JP7240483B2 (en) Composition, cured film, color filter, light-shielding film, optical element, solid-state imaging device, headlight unit, modified silica particles, method for producing modified silica particles
KR20190103446A (en) Resin composition, film | membrane, an infrared cut filter, its manufacturing method, a solid-state image sensor, an infrared sensor, and a camera module
KR20200040834A (en) Manufacturing method of cured film, manufacturing method of solid-state imaging element, manufacturing method of an image display device
JP7288515B2 (en) Dispersion liquid, composition, cured film, color filter, optical element, solid-state imaging device and headlight unit
WO2021059849A1 (en) Dispersion, composition, cured film, color filter, solid-state imaging element, and image display device
JP7301143B2 (en) Photosensitive composition, cured film, color filter, light-shielding film, optical element, solid-state imaging device, infrared sensor, headlight unit
EP4318057A1 (en) Black photosensitive composition, manufacturing method of black photosensitive composition, cured film, color filter, light-shielding film, optical element, solid-state image capturing element, and headlight unit
WO2021177027A1 (en) Photosensitive composition, cured film, color filter, light-blocking film, optical element, solid-state imaging element, infrared sensor, and headlight unit
US20230107659A1 (en) Composition, light shielding film, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and method for manufacturing cured film
TWI836039B (en) Composition, cured film, color filter, light shielding film, optical element, solid state imaging device, headlight unit, modified silica particle, and method for producing modified silica particle
WO2024024494A1 (en) Photosensitive composition, cured film, light-blocking film, color filter, optical element, solid imaging element, headlight unit
TW202409112A (en) Photosensitive composition, cured film, light-shielding film, color filter, optical element, solid-state image capturing element, and headlight unit

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 22742437

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2022576600

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 22742437

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1